This manual contains proprietary information of Zebra Technologies ... takes steps to ensure that its published Engineering specifications and manuals are.
• Proprietary Statement This manual contains proprietary information of Zebra Technologies Corporation and its subsidiaries (“Zebra Technologies”).
DS9308
Imaging Scanner
Product Reference Guide
MN-003532-03EN
Copyright
ZEBRA and the stylized Zebra head are trademarks of Zebra Technologies Corporation, registered in many jurisdictions worldwide. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. ©2020 Zebra Technologies Corporation and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
COPYRIGHTS & TRADEMARKS: For complete copyright and trademark information, go to www.zebra.com/copyright.
WARRANTY: For complete warranty information, go to www.zebra.com/warranty.
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT: For complete EULA information, go to www.zebra.com/eula.
For Australia Only
For Australia Only. This warranty is given by Zebra Technologies Asia Pacific Pte. Ltd., 71 Robinson Road, #0502/03, Singapore 068895, Singapore. Our goods come with guarantees that cannot be excluded under the Australia Consumer Law. You are entitled to a replacement or refund for a major failure and compensation for any other reasonably foreseeable loss or damage. You are also entitled to have the goods repaired or replaced if the goods fail to be of acceptable quality and the failure does not amount to a major failure.
Zebra Technologies Corporation Australia's limited warranty above is in addition to any rights and remedies you may have under the Australian Consumer Law. If you have any queries, please call Zebra Technologies Corporation at +65 6858 0722. You may also visit our website: www.zebra.com for the most updated warranty terms.
Terms of Use
· Proprietary Statement This manual contains proprietary information of Zebra Technologies Corporation and its subsidiaries ("Zebra Technologies"). It is intended solely for the information and use of parties operating and maintaining the equipment described herein. Such proprietary information may not be used, reproduced, or disclosed to any other parties for any other purpose without the express, written permission of Zebra Technologies.
· Product Improvements Continuous improvement of products is a policy of Zebra Technologies. All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
· Liability Disclaimer Zebra Technologies takes steps to ensure that its published Engineering specifications and manuals are correct; however, errors do occur. Zebra Technologies reserves the right to correct any such errors and disclaims liability resulting therefrom.
· Limitation of Liability In no event shall Zebra Technologies or anyone else involved in the creation, production, or delivery of the accompanying product (including hardware and software) be liable for any damages whatsoever (including, without limitation, consequential damages including loss of business profits, business interruption, or loss of business information) arising out of the use of, the results of use of, or inability to use such product, even if Zebra Technologies has been advised of the possibility of such damages. Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.
2
Revision History
Changes to the original guide are listed below:
Change -01 Rev A -02 Rev A
Date 09/2019 12/2019
-03EN Rev A 6/2020
Description
Initial release.
Updated defaults for Parity and ASCII Format in Terminal Specific RS-232 Table; Replaced High Illumination barcode; Added USB CDC Host Variant.
- Updated Data Formatting: ADF, MDF, Preferred Symbol - Updated Electronic Article Surveillance (EAS) - Updated 123Scan Requirements - Updated Zebra copyright statement - Added USB Certification in Table 6.
3
Table of Contents
Copyright ........................................................................................................................................... 2 For Australia Only ....................................................................................................................... 2
Terms of Use .................................................................................................................................... 2 Revision History ................................................................................................................................ 3
Table of Contents................................................................................................................................... 4
List of Figures ...................................................................................................................................... 20
List of Tables........................................................................................................................................ 21
About This Guide Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 23 Configurations ................................................................................................................................. 23 Accessories ..................................................................................................................................... 24 Chapter Descriptions ...................................................................................................................... 25 Notational Conventions ................................................................................................................... 26 Related Documents and Software .................................................................................................. 27 Service Information ......................................................................................................................... 27 Provide Documentation Feedback .................................................................................................. 27
Getting Started Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 28 Interfaces ........................................................................................................................................ 29 Unpacking ....................................................................................................................................... 29 Features .......................................................................................................................................... 30 Setting Up the Scanner ................................................................................................................... 31 Inserting the Interface Cable ..................................................................................................... 31 Removing the Interface Cable ................................................................................................... 32 Connecting Power (if required) ................................................................................................. 33 Configuring the Scanner ........................................................................................................... 33 Mounting the Scanner ..................................................................................................................... 33 Multi-Mount Bracket .................................................................................................................. 33
4
Table of Contents
Installing Multi-Mount With Adhesive Pad ........................................................................... 33 Installing Multi-Mount With Screws on Table ...................................................................... 34 Installing Multi-Mount with Screws on Wall ......................................................................... 35 Locking Table Mount ................................................................................................................. 36 Installing Locking Table Mount ............................................................................................ 36 Removing DS9308 from Locking Table Mount ................................................................... 38
123Scan and Software Tools Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 39 123Scan .......................................................................................................................................... 39 Communication with 123Scan ................................................................................................... 40 123Scan Requirements ............................................................................................................. 40 123Scan Information ................................................................................................................. 40 Scanner SDK, Other Software Tools, and Videos .................................................................... 41
Data Capture Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 42 Beeper and LED Indicators ............................................................................................................. 42 Scanning ......................................................................................................................................... 45 Hands-free Scanning ................................................................................................................ 45 Hand-held Scanning .................................................................................................................. 45 Aiming ....................................................................................................................................... 46 Decode Ranges .............................................................................................................................. 47 Electronic Article Surveillance (EAS) .............................................................................................. 47 Installing .................................................................................................................................... 47 Checkpoint EAS Model Compatibility .................................................................................. 47 Considerations .................................................................................................................... 47 Checkpoint Contact Information .......................................................................................... 48
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Technical Specifications Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 49 Maintenance ................................................................................................................................... 49 Known Harmful Ingredients ....................................................................................................... 49 Approved Cleaners for the Scanner .......................................................................................... 49 Cleaning the Scanner ................................................................................................................ 50 Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................. 51 Report Product Information ....................................................................................................... 54 Report Software Version ..................................................................................................... 54 Report Serial Number ......................................................................................................... 54 Report Manufacturing Information ....................................................................................... 54 Technical Specifications ................................................................................................................. 55 Scanner Signal Descriptions ........................................................................................................... 58
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 59 Setting Parameters ......................................................................................................................... 59 Scanning Sequence Examples ................................................................................................. 59
5
Table of Contents
Errors While Scanning .............................................................................................................. 60 User Preferences/Miscellaneous Options Parameter Defaults ....................................................... 60 Standard User Preferences ............................................................................................................ 62
Default Parameters ................................................................................................................... 62 Write to Custom Defaults .................................................................................................... 62
Parameter Barcode Scanning ................................................................................................... 63 Beep After Good Decode .......................................................................................................... 63 Beep Volume ............................................................................................................................. 64 Beep Tone ................................................................................................................................. 65
Standard Beep Tones ......................................................................................................... 65 Beep Duration ........................................................................................................................... 66 Volume Adjustment Trigger Timeout ......................................................................................... 67 Suppress Power Up Beeps ....................................................................................................... 68 Direct Decode Indicator ............................................................................................................. 69 Low Power Mode ...................................................................................................................... 70
Time Delay to Low Power Mode ......................................................................................... 71 Trigger Mode ............................................................................................................................. 73 Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern ............................................................................................ 74 Presentation (Hands-free) Decode Aiming Pattern ................................................................... 75 Momentary Trigger Mode Timeout ............................................................................................ 76 Picklist Mode ............................................................................................................................. 77 Continuous Barcode Read ........................................................................................................ 78 Unique Barcode Reporting ........................................................................................................ 78 Decode Session Timeout .......................................................................................................... 79 Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol ............................................................................... 79 Timeout Between Decodes, Different Symbols ......................................................................... 80 Triggered Timeout, Same Symbol ............................................................................................ 80 Mobile Phone/Display Mode ..................................................................................................... 81 PDF Prioritization ...................................................................................................................... 82 PDF Prioritization Timeout ........................................................................................................ 82 Decoding Illumination ................................................................................................................ 83 Illumination Brightness .............................................................................................................. 83 Motion Tolerance (Hand-held Trigger Modes Only) .................................................................. 85 Product ID (PID) Type ............................................................................................................... 85 Product ID (PID) Value .............................................................................................................. 86 ECLevel ..................................................................................................................................... 86 Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters ............................................................................................... 87 Enter Key .................................................................................................................................. 87 Tab Key ..................................................................................................................................... 87 Transmit Code ID Character ..................................................................................................... 88 Prefix/Suffix Values ................................................................................................................... 89 Scan Data Transmission Format ............................................................................................... 90 FN1 Substitution Values ............................................................................................................ 92 Transmit "No Read" Message ................................................................................................... 93 Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval ................................................................................................... 94 securPharm Decoding ............................................................................................................... 95 securPharm Output Formatting ................................................................................................. 96
Sample GS1 Format ........................................................................................................... 96 Sample IFA Format ............................................................................................................. 97 securPharm Output Formatting Barcodes ........................................................................... 98
6
Table of Contents
Imager Preferences Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 99 Setting Parameters ......................................................................................................................... 99 Scanning Sequence Examples ............................................................................................... 100 Errors While Scanning ............................................................................................................ 100 Image Capture Preferences Parameter Defaults .......................................................................... 100 Image Capture Preferences .......................................................................................................... 102 Operational Modes .................................................................................................................. 102 Decode Mode .................................................................................................................... 102 Snapshot Mode ................................................................................................................. 102 Image Capture Illumination ..................................................................................................... 103 Image Capture Autoexposure ................................................................................................. 103 Fixed Exposure ....................................................................................................................... 104 Analog and Digital Gain .......................................................................................................... 105 Analog Gain ...................................................................................................................... 105 Digital Gain ........................................................................................................................ 105 Gain/Exposure Priority for Snapshot Mode ............................................................................. 106 Snapshot Mode Timeout ......................................................................................................... 107 Snapshot Aiming Pattern ........................................................................................................ 108 Silence Operational Mode Changes ....................................................................................... 108 Image Cropping ....................................................................................................................... 109 Crop to Pixel Addresses .......................................................................................................... 109 Image Size (Number of Pixels) ............................................................................................... 111 Image Brightness (Target White) ............................................................................................ 112 JPEG Image Options .............................................................................................................. 112 JPEG Quality Value ................................................................................................................ 113 JPEG Size Value ..................................................................................................................... 113 Image Enhancement ............................................................................................................... 114 Image File Format Selector ..................................................................................................... 115 Image Rotation ........................................................................................................................ 116 Bits Per Pixel ........................................................................................................................... 117 Signature Capture ................................................................................................................... 118 Output File Format ............................................................................................................ 118 Signature Capture File Format Selector .................................................................................. 119 Signature Capture Bits Per Pixel ............................................................................................. 120 Signature Capture Width ......................................................................................................... 121 Signature Capture Height ........................................................................................................ 121 Signature Capture JPEG Quality ............................................................................................ 121
Symbologies Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 123 Setting Parameters ....................................................................................................................... 123 Scanning Sequence Examples ............................................................................................... 124 Errors While Scanning ............................................................................................................ 124 Symbology Parameter Defaults .................................................................................................... 124 Enable/Disable All Code Types .................................................................................................... 131 UPC/EAN/JAN .............................................................................................................................. 131 UPC-A ..................................................................................................................................... 131 UPC-E ..................................................................................................................................... 132 UPC-E1 ................................................................................................................................... 132
7
Table of Contents
EAN-8/JAN-8 ........................................................................................................................... 133 EAN-13/JAN-13 ....................................................................................................................... 133 Bookland EAN ......................................................................................................................... 134 Bookland ISBN Format ........................................................................................................... 135 ISSN EAN ............................................................................................................................... 136 Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals .................................................................................. 137 User-Programmable Supplementals ....................................................................................... 140 UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy ............................................................................ 140 UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental AIM ID Format ......................................................................... 141 Transmit UPC-A Check Digit ................................................................................................... 142 Transmit UPC-E Check Digit ................................................................................................... 142 Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit ................................................................................................. 143 UPC-A Preamble ..................................................................................................................... 144 UPC-E Preamble ..................................................................................................................... 145 UPC-E1 Preamble ................................................................................................................... 146 Convert UPC-E to UPC-A ....................................................................................................... 147 Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A ..................................................................................................... 147 EAN/JAN Zero Extend ............................................................................................................ 148 UCC Coupon Extended Code ................................................................................................. 148 Coupon Report ........................................................................................................................ 149 UPC Reduced Quiet Zone ...................................................................................................... 150 Code 128 ...................................................................................................................................... 150 Set Lengths for Code 128 ....................................................................................................... 151 GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128) ......................................................................................... 152 ISBT 128 ................................................................................................................................. 153 ISBT Concatenation ................................................................................................................ 153 Check ISBT Table ................................................................................................................... 154 ISBT Concatenation Redundancy ........................................................................................... 155 Code 128 <FNC4> .................................................................................................................. 155 Code 128 Security Level ......................................................................................................... 156 Code 128 Reduced Quiet Zone .............................................................................................. 157 Code 39 ........................................................................................................................................ 157 Trioptic Code 39 ...................................................................................................................... 158 Convert Code 39 to Code 32 .................................................................................................. 158 Code 32 Prefix ........................................................................................................................ 159 Set Lengths for Code 39 ......................................................................................................... 159 Code 39 Check Digit Verification ............................................................................................ 161 Transmit Code 39 Check Digit ................................................................................................ 161 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion .............................................................................................. 162 Code 39 Security Level ........................................................................................................... 163 Code 39 Reduced Quiet Zone ................................................................................................ 164 Code 93 ........................................................................................................................................ 164 Set Lengths for Code 93 ......................................................................................................... 165 Code 11 ........................................................................................................................................ 167 Set Lengths for Code 11 ......................................................................................................... 167 Code 11 Check Digit Verification ............................................................................................ 169 Transmit Code 11 Check Digits .............................................................................................. 170 Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) ................................................................................................................. 170 Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 ........................................................................................... 171 I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification ............................................................................................... 172 Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit ................................................................................................... 173
8
Table of Contents
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 ...................................................................................................... 173 Febraban ................................................................................................................................. 174 I 2 of 5 Security Level .............................................................................................................. 175 I 2 of 5 Reduced Quiet Zone ................................................................................................... 176 Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF) .................................................................................................................... 176 Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 ................................................................................................ 177 Codabar (NW - 7) .......................................................................................................................... 179 Set Lengths for Codabar ......................................................................................................... 179 CLSI Editing ............................................................................................................................ 181 NOTIS Editing ......................................................................................................................... 181 Codabar Security Level ........................................................................................................... 182 Codabar Upper or Lower Case Start/Stop Characters ............................................................ 183 Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit Verification ............................................................................... 183 Transmit Codabar Check Digit ................................................................................................ 184 MSI ................................................................................................................................................ 184 Set Lengths for MSI ................................................................................................................ 185 MSI Check Digits ..................................................................................................................... 187 Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) ................................................................................................... 187 MSI Check Digit Algorithm ...................................................................................................... 189 MSI Reduced Quiet Zone ........................................................................................................ 189 Chinese 2 of 5 ............................................................................................................................... 190 Matrix 2 of 5 .................................................................................................................................. 190 Set Lengths for Matrix 2 of 5 ................................................................................................... 191 Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit ......................................................................................................... 193 Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit .......................................................................................... 193 Korean 3 of 5 ................................................................................................................................ 194 Inverse 1D ............................................................................................................................... 194 GS1 DataBar ................................................................................................................................. 196 GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly GS1 DataBar-14), GS1 DataBar Truncated, GS1 DataBar Stacked, GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional .............................................. 196 GS1 DataBar Limited .............................................................................................................. 197 GS1 DataBar Expanded, GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked ................................................... 197 Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN/JAN ................................................................................ 198 GS1 DataBar Security Level ................................................................................................... 199 GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check ....................................................................................... 200 Symbology-Specific Security Features ......................................................................................... 201 Redundancy Level .................................................................................................................. 201 Security Level .......................................................................................................................... 203 1D Quiet Zone Level ............................................................................................................... 204 Intercharacter Gap Size .......................................................................................................... 205 Composite ..................................................................................................................................... 205 Composite CC-C ..................................................................................................................... 205 Composite CC-A/B .................................................................................................................. 206 Composite TLC-39 .................................................................................................................. 206 Composite Inverse .................................................................................................................. 206 UPC Composite Mode ............................................................................................................ 208 Composite Beep Mode ............................................................................................................ 209 GS1-128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN Composite Codes ................................................... 209 2D Symbologies ............................................................................................................................ 210 PDF417 ................................................................................................................................... 210 MicroPDF417 .......................................................................................................................... 210
9
Table of Contents
Code 128 Emulation ................................................................................................................ 211 Data Matrix .............................................................................................................................. 212 GS1 Data Matrix ...................................................................................................................... 212 Data Matrix Inverse ................................................................................................................. 213 Decode Data Matrix Mirror Images ......................................................................................... 214 Maxicode ................................................................................................................................. 215 QR Code ................................................................................................................................. 215 GS1 QR ................................................................................................................................... 216 MicroQR .................................................................................................................................. 216 Linked QR Mode ..................................................................................................................... 217 Aztec ....................................................................................................................................... 218 Aztec Inverse .......................................................................................................................... 218 Han Xin ................................................................................................................................... 219 Han Xin Inverse ....................................................................................................................... 219 Grid Matrix ............................................................................................................................... 220 Grid Matrix Inverse .................................................................................................................. 220 Grid Matrix Mirror .................................................................................................................... 221 DotCode .................................................................................................................................. 222 DotCode Inverse ..................................................................................................................... 223 DotCode Mirrored .................................................................................................................... 224 DotCode Prioritize ................................................................................................................... 225 Macro PDF Features ..................................................................................................................... 225 Flush Macro Buffer .................................................................................................................. 226 Abort Macro PDF Entry ........................................................................................................... 226 Postal Codes ................................................................................................................................. 226 US Postnet .............................................................................................................................. 226 US Planet ................................................................................................................................ 227 Transmit US Postal Check Digit .............................................................................................. 227 UK Postal ................................................................................................................................ 228 Transmit UK Postal Check Digit .............................................................................................. 228 Japan Postal ........................................................................................................................... 229 Australia Post .......................................................................................................................... 229 Australia Post Format .............................................................................................................. 230 Netherlands KIX Code ........................................................................................................... 231 USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail ..................................................................................... 231 UPU FICS Postal .................................................................................................................... 232 Mailmark .................................................................................................................................. 232
USB Interface Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 233 Setting Parameters ....................................................................................................................... 233 Scanning Sequence Examples ............................................................................................... 233 Errors While Scanning ............................................................................................................ 233 Connecting a USB Interface ......................................................................................................... 234 USB Parameter Defaults ............................................................................................................... 235 USB Host Parameters ................................................................................................................... 237 USB Device Type .................................................................................................................... 237 Symbol Native API (SNAPI) Status Handshaking ................................................................... 239 USB Keystroke Delay .............................................................................................................. 239 USB Caps Lock Override ........................................................................................................ 240
10
Table of Contents
Barcodes with Unknown Characters ....................................................................................... 240 USB Convert Unknown to Code 39 ......................................................................................... 241 USB Fast HID .......................................................................................................................... 241 USB Polling Interval ................................................................................................................ 242 Keypad Emulation ................................................................................................................... 244 Quick Keypad Emulation ......................................................................................................... 244 Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero ..................................................................................... 245 USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution ............................................................................................. 245 Function Key Mapping ............................................................................................................ 246 Simulated Caps Lock .............................................................................................................. 246 Convert Case .......................................................................................................................... 247 USB Static CDC ...................................................................................................................... 248 CDC Beep on <BEL> .............................................................................................................. 248 TGCS (IBM) USB Beep Directive ............................................................................................ 249 TGCS (IBM) USB Barcode Configuration Directive ................................................................ 249 TGCS (IBM) USB Specification Version ................................................................................. 249 USB CDC Host Variant ........................................................................................................... 250
Parameter Scanning Lockout ............................................................................................ 250 Parameter Default ............................................................................................................. 250 Transmitting Data Formatting ............................................................................................ 251 ASCII Character Sets .................................................................................................................... 253
SSI Interface Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 254 Communication ............................................................................................................................. 254 SSI Commands ....................................................................................................................... 255 SSI Transactions ........................................................................................................................... 256 General Data Transactions ..................................................................................................... 256 ACK/NAK Handshaking .................................................................................................... 256 Decoded Data Transmission ................................................................................................... 257 ACK/NAK Enabled and Packeted Data ............................................................................. 257 ACK/NAK Enabled and Unpacketed ASCII Data .............................................................. 257 ACK/NAK Disabled and Packeted DECODE_DATA ......................................................... 258 ACK/NAK Disabled and Unpacketed ASCII Data ............................................................. 258 Communication Summary ............................................................................................................. 258 RTS/CTS Lines ....................................................................................................................... 258 ACK/NAK Option ..................................................................................................................... 258 Number of Data Bits ................................................................................................................ 258 Serial Response Timeout ........................................................................................................ 259 Retries ..................................................................................................................................... 259 Baud Rate, Stop Bits, Parity, Response Timeout, ACK/NAK Handshaking ............................ 259 Errors ...................................................................................................................................... 259 SSI Communication Notes ...................................................................................................... 259 Using Time Delay to Low Power Mode with SSI ........................................................................... 260 Encapsulation of RSM Commands/Responses over SSI ............................................................. 261 Command Structure ................................................................................................................ 261 Response Structure ................................................................................................................ 261 Example Transaction .............................................................................................................. 262 Command from Host to Query Packet Size Supported by Device .................................... 262 Response from Device with Packet Size Information ....................................................... 262
11
Table of Contents
Command from Host to Retrieve Diagnostic Information .................................................. 262 Response from Device with Diagnostic Information .......................................................... 262 Setting Parameters ....................................................................................................................... 263 Scanning Sequence Examples ............................................................................................... 263 Errors While Scanning ............................................................................................................ 263 Simple Serial Interface Parameter Defaults .................................................................................. 264 SSI Host Parameters .................................................................................................................... 265 Select SSI Host ....................................................................................................................... 265 Baud Rate ............................................................................................................................... 265 Parity ....................................................................................................................................... 267 Check Parity ............................................................................................................................ 268 Stop Bits .................................................................................................................................. 268 Software Handshaking ............................................................................................................ 269 Host RTS Line State ............................................................................................................... 270 Decode Data Packet Format ................................................................................................... 271 Host Serial Response Timeout ............................................................................................... 272 Host Character Timeout .......................................................................................................... 273 Multipacket Option .................................................................................................................. 274 Interpacket Delay .................................................................................................................... 275 Event Reporting ............................................................................................................................ 276 Decode Event .......................................................................................................................... 276 Boot Up Event ......................................................................................................................... 277 Parameter Event ..................................................................................................................... 278
RS-232 Interface Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 279 Setting Parameters ....................................................................................................................... 279 Scanning Sequence Examples ............................................................................................... 280 Errors While Scanning ............................................................................................................ 280 Connecting an RS-232 Interface ................................................................................................... 280 RS-232 Parameter Defaults .......................................................................................................... 281 RS-232 Host Parameters .............................................................................................................. 282 RS-232 Host Types ................................................................................................................. 284 Baud Rate ............................................................................................................................... 286 Parity ....................................................................................................................................... 287 Stop Bits .................................................................................................................................. 287 Data Bits .................................................................................................................................. 288 Check Receive Errors ............................................................................................................. 288 Hardware Handshaking ........................................................................................................... 289 Software Handshaking ............................................................................................................ 291 Host Serial Response Timeout ............................................................................................... 293 RTS Line State ........................................................................................................................ 294 Beep on <BEL> ....................................................................................................................... 294 Intercharacter Delay ................................................................................................................ 295 Nixdorf Beep/LED Options ...................................................................................................... 296 Barcodes with Unknown Characters ....................................................................................... 296 ASCII Character Sets .................................................................................................................... 297
12
Table of Contents
IBM Interface Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 298 Setting Parameters ....................................................................................................................... 298 Scanning Sequence Examples ............................................................................................... 298 Errors While Scanning ............................................................................................................ 298 Connecting an IBM 468X/469X Host ............................................................................................ 299 IBM Parameter Defaults ................................................................................................................ 300 IBM Host Parameters .................................................................................................................... 301 Port Address ........................................................................................................................... 301 Convert Unknown to Code 39 ................................................................................................. 302 RS-485 Beep Directive ............................................................................................................ 302 RS-485 Barcode Configuration Directive ................................................................................ 303 IBM-485 Specification Version ................................................................................................ 303
Keyboard Wedge Interface Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 304 Setting Parameters ....................................................................................................................... 304 Scanning Sequence Examples ............................................................................................... 304 Errors While Scanning ............................................................................................................ 304 Connecting a Keyboard Wedge Interface ..................................................................................... 305 Keyboard Wedge Parameter Defaults .......................................................................................... 306 Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters .............................................................................................. 307 Keyboard Wedge Host Types ................................................................................................. 307 Barcodes with Unknown Characters ....................................................................................... 307 Keystroke Delay ...................................................................................................................... 308 Intra-keystroke Delay .............................................................................................................. 308 Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation ..................................................................................... 309 Quick Keypad Emulation ......................................................................................................... 309 Simulated Caps Lock .............................................................................................................. 310 Caps Lock Override ................................................................................................................ 311 Convert Case .......................................................................................................................... 311 Function Key Mapping ............................................................................................................ 312 FN1 Substitution ...................................................................................................................... 312 Send Make and Break ............................................................................................................. 313 Keyboard Map ............................................................................................................................... 313 ASCII Character Sets .................................................................................................................... 314
OCR Programming Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 315 Setting Parameters ....................................................................................................................... 315 Scanning Sequence Examples ............................................................................................... 316 Errors While Scanning ............................................................................................................ 316 OCR Parameter Defaults .............................................................................................................. 316 OCR Programming Parameters .................................................................................................... 317 OCR-A ..................................................................................................................................... 317 OCR-A Variant ........................................................................................................................ 318 OCR-B ..................................................................................................................................... 319 OCR-B Variant ........................................................................................................................ 320 MICR E13B ............................................................................................................................. 324
13
Table of Contents
US Currency Serial Number .................................................................................................... 325 OCR Orientation ...................................................................................................................... 325 OCR Lines ............................................................................................................................... 327 OCR Minimum Characters ...................................................................................................... 327 OCR Maximum Characters ..................................................................................................... 328 OCR Subset ............................................................................................................................ 328 OCR Quiet Zone ..................................................................................................................... 329 OCR Template ........................................................................................................................ 329
Required Digit (9) .............................................................................................................. 330 Required Alpha (A) ............................................................................................................ 330 Require and Suppress (0) ................................................................................................. 330 Optional Alphanumeric (1) ................................................................................................ 330 Optional Alpha (2) ............................................................................................................. 331 Alpha or Digit (3) ............................................................................................................... 331 Any Including Space & Reject (4) ..................................................................................... 331 Any except Space & Reject (5) ......................................................................................... 332 Optional Digit (7) ............................................................................................................... 332 Digit or Fill (8) .................................................................................................................... 332 Alpha or Fill (F) .................................................................................................................. 333 Optional Space ( ) ............................................................................................................. 333 Optional Small Special (.) .................................................................................................. 333 Other Template Operators ................................................................................................ 333 Repeat Previous (R) .......................................................................................................... 337 Multiple Templates ............................................................................................................ 338 Template Examples .......................................................................................................... 338 OCR Check Digit Modulus ...................................................................................................... 339 OCR Check Digit Multiplier ..................................................................................................... 339 OCR Check Digit Validation .................................................................................................... 340 None .................................................................................................................................. 340 Product Add Left to Right .................................................................................................. 341 Digit Add Left to Right ....................................................................................................... 342 Digit Add Right to Left ....................................................................................................... 343 Product Add Right to Left Simple Remainder ................................................................... 343 Digit Add Right To Left Simple Remainder ....................................................................... 344 Health Industry - HIBCC43 ................................................................................................ 345 Inverse OCR ........................................................................................................................... 346 OCR Redundancy ................................................................................................................... 347
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only) Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 348 The IDC Process ........................................................................................................................... 348 Barcode Acceptance Test ....................................................................................................... 349 Capture Region Determination ................................................................................................ 349 IDC Operating Mode = Anchored ...................................................................................... 349 IDC Operating Mode = Free-Form or Linked .................................................................... 350 Image Post Processing ........................................................................................................... 350 Data Transmission .................................................................................................................. 350 PC Application and Programming Support ................................................................................... 350 Setting Parameters ....................................................................................................................... 351 Scanning Sequence Examples ............................................................................................... 351
14
Table of Contents
Errors While Scanning ............................................................................................................ 351 Image Document Capture Parameter Defaults ....................................................................... 352 IDC Operating Mode ............................................................................................................... 353 IDC Symbology ....................................................................................................................... 354 IDC X Coordinate .................................................................................................................... 355 IDC Y Coordinate .................................................................................................................... 355 IDC Width ................................................................................................................................ 356 IDC Height ............................................................................................................................... 356 IDC Aspect .............................................................................................................................. 357 IDC File Format Selector ......................................................................................................... 357 IDC Bits Per Pixel .................................................................................................................... 358 IDC JPEG Quality ................................................................................................................... 358 IDC Find Box Outline .............................................................................................................. 359 IDC Minimum Text Length ...................................................................................................... 359 IDC Maximum Text Length ..................................................................................................... 360 IDC Captured Image Brighten ................................................................................................. 360 IDC Captured Image Sharpen ................................................................................................. 361 IDC Border Type ..................................................................................................................... 362 IDC Delay Time ....................................................................................................................... 363 IDC Zoom Limit ....................................................................................................................... 363 IDC Maximum Rotation ........................................................................................................... 364 Quick Start .................................................................................................................................... 365 Sample IDC Setup .................................................................................................................. 365 IDC Demonstrations ................................................................................................................ 366
Anchored Mode Demo ...................................................................................................... 366 Free-Form Mode Demo ..................................................................................................... 366 Linked Mode Demo ........................................................................................................... 366 Other Suggestions .................................................................................................................. 367 Quick Start Form ..................................................................................................................... 367
Digimarc (DS9308-SRD and DS9308-DLD) Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 368 Digimarc Symbology Selection ..................................................................................................... 368 Picklist ..................................................................................................................................... 368 Digimarc Digital Watermarks ........................................................................................................ 369
Data Formatting: ADF, MDF, Preferred Symbol Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 370 Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) ................................................................................................. 370 Multicode Data Formatting (Hand-held Mode Only) ..................................................................... 370 MDF in Hands-Free Mode ....................................................................................................... 371 MDF Best Practices ................................................................................................................ 372 Preferred Symbol .......................................................................................................................... 373
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL) Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 374 Driver's License Parsing ............................................................................................................... 375 Parsing Driver's License Data Fields (Embedded Driver's License Parsing) ................................ 376
15
Table of Contents
Embedded Driver's License Parsing Criteria - Code Type ...................................................... 376 Driver's License Parse Field Barcodes ................................................................................... 377 AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes ................................................................................................ 379 Parser Version ID Barcode ..................................................................................................... 388 ................................................................................................................................................ 388 User Preferences .......................................................................................................................... 389 Set Default Parameter ............................................................................................................. 389 Output Gender as M or F ........................................................................................................ 389 Date Format ............................................................................................................................ 390
No Separator ..................................................................................................................... 391 Send Keystroke (Control Characters and Keyboard Characters) ........................................... 392
Control Characters ............................................................................................................ 392 Keyboard Characters ........................................................................................................ 396 Parsing Rule Example .................................................................................................................. 410 Embedded Driver's License Parsing ADF Example ................................................................ 414
Parameter Defaults
Numeric Barcodes Cancel ........................................................................................................................................... 431 Numeric Barcodes ........................................................................................................................ 431
Alphanumeric Barcodes Cancel ........................................................................................................................................... 433 Alphanumeric Barcodes ................................................................................................................ 433
ASCII Character Sets Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 450
Programming Reference Symbol Code Identifiers ................................................................................................................ 461 AIM Code Identifiers ..................................................................................................................... 462
Communication Protocol Functionality Functionality Supported via Communication (Cable) Interface ..................................................... 468
Country Codes Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 470 USB and Keyboard Wedge Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes) ....................................... 471
Country Code Pages Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 486 Country Code Page Defaults ........................................................................................................ 486
16
Table of Contents
Country Code Page Barcodes ...................................................................................................... 490
CJK Decode Control Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 500 CJK Control Parameters ............................................................................................................... 500 Unicode Output Control ........................................................................................................... 500 CJK Output Method to Windows Host ..................................................................................... 501 Non-CJK UTF Barcode Output ............................................................................................... 503 Country Keyboard Type Missing Characters .................................................................... 503 Unicode/CJK Decode Setup with Windows Host .......................................................................... 504 Setting Up the Windows Registry Table for Unicode Universal Output .................................. 504 Adding CJK IME on Windows ................................................................................................. 504 Selecting the Simplified Chinese Input Method on the Host ................................................... 506 Selecting the Traditional Chinese Input Method on the Host .................................................. 507
Signature Capture Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 508 Code Structure .............................................................................................................................. 508 Signature Capture Area .......................................................................................................... 508 CapCode Pattern Structure ..................................................................................................... 509 Start / Stop Patterns ...................................................................................................................... 509 Dimensions ................................................................................................................................... 510 Data Format .................................................................................................................................. 510 Additional Capabilities ................................................................................................................... 511 Signature Boxes ........................................................................................................................... 511
Non-Parameter Attributes (Attribute Data Dictionary) Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 512 Attributes ....................................................................................................................................... 512 Model Number ......................................................................................................................... 512 Serial Number ......................................................................................................................... 512 Date of Manufacture ................................................................................................................ 513 Date of First Programming ...................................................................................................... 513 Configuration Filename ........................................................................................................... 513 Beeper/LED ............................................................................................................................. 514 Parameter Defaults ................................................................................................................. 515 Parameter Buffer ..................................................................................................................... 515 Beep on Next Bootup .............................................................................................................. 515 Reboot ..................................................................................................................................... 515 Host Trigger Session ............................................................................................................... 516 Firmware Version .................................................................................................................... 516 Device Class ........................................................................................................................... 516 Scankit Version ....................................................................................................................... 516 Combined Firmware Version ................................................................................................... 517 RSM Version ........................................................................................................................... 517 Top Level Release Name ........................................................................................................ 517 Imagekit Version ..................................................................................................................... 517 DL Parser Version ................................................................................................................... 518
17
Table of Contents
DL Parser Activated ................................................................................................................ 518 ScanSpeed Analytics .............................................................................................................. 518 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 519 Histogram Decode Information ..................................................................................................... 519
ScanSpeed Analytics Image of Slowest Decoded Barcode ............................................................................................. 523
Sample Barcodes UPC/EAN ..................................................................................................................................... 525 UPC-A, 100% .......................................................................................................................... 525 UPC-A with 2-digit Add-on ...................................................................................................... 525 UPC-A with 5-digit Add-on ...................................................................................................... 526 UPC-E ..................................................................................................................................... 526 UPC-E with 2-digit Add-on ...................................................................................................... 526 UPC-E with 5-digit Add-on ...................................................................................................... 527 EAN-8 ...................................................................................................................................... 527 EAN-13, 100% ........................................................................................................................ 527 EAN-13 with 2-digit Add-on ..................................................................................................... 528 EAN-13 with 5-digit Add-on ..................................................................................................... 528 Code 128 ...................................................................................................................................... 528 GS1-128 .................................................................................................................................. 529 Code 39 ........................................................................................................................................ 529 Code 93 ........................................................................................................................................ 529 Code 11 with 2 Check Digits ......................................................................................................... 530 Interleaved 2 of 5 .......................................................................................................................... 530 MSI with 2 Check Digits ................................................................................................................ 530 Chinese 2 of 5 ............................................................................................................................... 531 Matrix 2 of 5 .................................................................................................................................. 531 Korean 3 of 5 ................................................................................................................................ 531 GS1 DataBar ................................................................................................................................. 532 GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly GS1 DataBar-14) ..................................................... 532 GS1 DataBar Truncated .......................................................................................................... 532 GS1 DataBar Stacked ............................................................................................................. 532 GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional ................................................................................... 533 GS1 DataBar Limited .............................................................................................................. 533 GS1 DataBar Expanded .......................................................................................................... 533 GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked ............................................................................................ 534 2D Symbologies ............................................................................................................................ 534 PDF417 ................................................................................................................................... 534 Data Matrix .............................................................................................................................. 534 GS1 Data Matrix ...................................................................................................................... 535 Maxicode ................................................................................................................................. 535 QR Code ................................................................................................................................. 535 GS1 QR ................................................................................................................................... 535 MicroQR .................................................................................................................................. 536 Aztec ....................................................................................................................................... 536 Grid Matrix ............................................................................................................................... 536 Han Xin ................................................................................................................................... 537
18
Table of Contents
Postal Codes ................................................................................................................................. 537 US Postnet .............................................................................................................................. 537 UK Postal ................................................................................................................................ 537 Japan Postal ........................................................................................................................... 537 Australian Post ........................................................................................................................ 538
OCR .............................................................................................................................................. 538 OCR-A ..................................................................................................................................... 538 OCR-B ..................................................................................................................................... 538 MICR E13B ............................................................................................................................. 538 US Currency ............................................................................................................................ 539
Index
19
List of Figures
Figure 1. DS9308 Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Figure 2. Parts of the Scanner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Figure 3. Inserting the Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Figure 4. Removing the Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Figure 5. Mounting with Adhesive Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Figure 6. Securing Multi-Mount Bracket to Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Figure 7. Inserting Scanner into Multi-Mount on Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Figure 8. Securing Multi-Mount Bracket to Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Figure 9. Inserting Scanner into Multi-Mount on Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Figure 10. Installing Locking Table Mount Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Figure 11. Inserting Scanner onto Locking Table Mount Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Figure 12. Securing Scanner to Locking Mount Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Figure 13. Removing Scanner from Locking Mount Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Figure 14. Scanning in Hands-free Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Figure 15. Scanning in Hand-held (Momentary Trigger) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Figure 16. Scanning Orientation with Imager Aiming Dot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Figure 17. Acceptable and Incorrect Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Figure 18. Scanner Cable Pinouts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Figure 19. USB Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 Figure 20. RS-232 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 Figure 21. IBM Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Figure 22. Keyboard Wedge Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 Figure 23. IBM PS2 Type Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313 Figure 24. Quick Start Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367 Figure 25. Scanning Label in a Horizontal Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 Figure 26. Scanning Label in a Vertical Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 Figure 27. Figure Match Setting for Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 Figure 28. CapCode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508 Figure 29. CapCode Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509 Figure 30. Acceptable Signature Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511 Figure 31. 123Scan Statistics Tab - Histogram Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
20
List of Tables
Table 1. DS9308 Scanner Only Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Table 2. Scanner Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Table 3. Scanner Beeper and LED Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Table 4. DS9308 Decode Ranges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Table 5. Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Table 6. Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Table 7. DS9308 Scanner Signal Pin-outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Table 8. User Preferences Parameter Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Table 9. Image Capture Preferences Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Table 10. Image Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Table 11. Output File Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Table 12. Symbology Parameter Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 Table 13. USB Interface Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 Table 14. USB CDC Host Variant Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Table 15. Parameter Defaults for Airport Device Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Table 16. SITA Code ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251 Table 17. ARINC Barcode Identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251 Table 18. SSI Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Table 19. Values for Selecting Time Delay to Low Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260 Table 20. SSI Interface Default Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264 Table 21. Event Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276 Table 22. RS-232 Interface Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 Table 23. Terminal Specific RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 Table 24. Terminal Specific Code ID Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 Table 25. IBM 468X/469X Interface Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 Table 26. Keyboard Wedge Interface Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 Table 27. OCR Programming Default Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 Table 28. Table of Numeric Value Assignments for Computing HIBC LIC Data Format Check Digit . . . . . . . . . .345 Table 29. Intelligent Document Capture (IDC) Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 Table 30. IDC Symbologies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Table 31. DL Parsing Parameter Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 Table 32. Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 Table 33. ASCII Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450 Table 34. ALT Key Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455 Table 35. GUI Key Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456 Table 36. PF Key Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457 Table 37. F Key Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458 Table 38. Numeric Key Character Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458 Table 39. Extended Key Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459 Table 40. Symbol Code Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461 Table 41. Aim Code Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462 Table 42. Modifier Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
21
List of Tables
Table 43. Communication Interface Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 Table 44. Country Code Page Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486 Table 45. Missing Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 Table 46. Missing Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504 Table 47. Start / Stop Pattern Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509 Table 48. User Defined CapCode Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509 Table 49. Data Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510 Table 50. Attributes Numbers of Barcode Symbology Statistic Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520 Table 51. RSM Attributes to Store/Retrieve Image of Slowest Decoded Barcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
22
About This Guide
Introduction
The DS9308 scanner Product Reference Guide provides general instructions for setting up, operating, maintaining, and troubleshooting the DS9308 scanner.
Configurations
This guide includes the DS9308 scanner configurations listed in Table 1.
Table 1 DS9308 Scanner Only Configurations
Configuration
Description
DS9308-SR00004ZZWW Presentation Area Imager, Standard Range, Corded, Midnight Black
DS9308-SR00004ZCWW Presentation Area Imager, Standard Range, Corded, Midnight Black, Checkpoint EAS
DS9308-SRD0004ZZWW Presentation Area Imager, Standard Range, Corded, Midnight Black, Digimarc
DS9308-DL00004ZZNA
Presentation Area Imager, Standard Range, DL Parsing, Corded, Midnight Black
DS9308-DL00004ZCNA
Presentation Area Imager, Standard Range, DL Parsing, Corded, Midnight Black, Checkpoint EAS
DS9308-DLD0004ZZNA
Presentation Area Imager, Standard Range, DL Parsing, Corded, Midnight Black, Digimarc
DS9308-TT00004ZZJP
Presentation Area Imager, Standard Range, Toshiba TEC, Corded, Midnight Black
DS9308-TT00004ZCJP
Presentation Area Imager, Standard Range, Toshiba TEC, Corded, Midnight Black, Checkpoint EAS
DS9308-SR00004ZZY
Presentation Area Imager, Standard Range, Corded, Midnight Black - India Only
DS9308-SR0000WZZWW Presentation Area Imager, Standard Range, Corded, Alpine White
DS9308-SR00004ZTWW Presentation Area Imager, Standard Range, Corded, Midnight Black, TAA
23
About This Guide
Accessories
NOTE: Check Solution Builder for additional information regarding all available accessories, and the latest available
configurations.
The scanner ships with the DS9308 Quick Start Guide. The following required accessories must be ordered:
· Interface cable for the appropriate interface. For example, a shielded connector cable when connecting via
USB.
· Universal power supply, if the interface requires this.
The product configurations related to the DS9308 scanner are listed in Table 2.
Table 2 Scanner Accessories
Product Type
Part Number
Description
Cables
For information about cables, cable compatibility, and the full list of supported cables go to the Zebra Partner Portal at:
https://partnerportal.zebra.com/PartnerPortal/product_services/downloads_z/barcode_scann ers/Universal-Cable-Guide-Bar-Code-Scanners.xlsx.
Stands and Holders (optional)
BRKT-MM0093C-04
DS9308 Multi-mount bracket, Black. Can be used as wall mount or table mount. See Mounting the Scanner on page 33 for installation instructions.
BRKT-LM0093C-04
DS9308 Locking-mount bracket, Black. Can be used to lock the scanner into position on a horizontal or vertical surface. See Mounting the Scanner on page 33 for installation instructions.
BRKT-MM0093C-0W
DS9308 Multi-mount bracket, White. Can be used as wall mount or table mount. See Mounting the Scanner on page 33 for installation instructions.
BRKT-LM0093C-0W
DS9308 Locking-mount bracket, White. Can be used to lock the scanner into position on a horizontal or vertical surface. See Mounting the Scanner on page 33 for installation instructions.
Power Supplies PWR-WUA5V4W0US
(if required)
PWR-WUA5V4W0BR
Power Supply, 5VDC, 100 - 240VAC, US/CA/MX/JP/TW Power Supply, 5VDC, 100 - 240VAC, KR (Korea)
PWR-WUA5V4W0EU
Power Supply, 5VDC, 100 - 240VAC, EU/UK
PWR-WUA5V4W0CN Power Supply, 5VDC, 100 - 240VAC, CN
PWR-WUA5V4W0AU
Power Supply, 5VDC, 100 - 240VAC, HK/AU
24
About This Guide
Chapter Descriptions
Topics covered in this guide are as follows:
· Getting Started provides a product overview, unpacking instructions, and cable connection information. · 123Scan and Software Tools describes the Zebra software tools available for customizing scanner
operation.
· Data Capture describes parts of the scanner, beeper and LED definitions, and how to use the scanner in
hand-held and hands-free (presentation) modes.
· Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Technical Specifications provides information on how to care for the
scanner, troubleshooting, and technical specifications.
· User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options describes features frequently used to customize how data
transmits to the host device and programming barcodes for selecting user preference features for the scanner.
· Imager Preferences provides imaging preference features and programming barcodes for selecting these
features.
· Symbologies describes all symbology features and provides programming barcodes for selecting these
features for the scanner.
· USB Interface describes how to set up the scanner with a USB host. · SSI Interface describes the system requirements of the Simple Serial Interface (SSI), which provides a
communications link between Zebra decoders and a serial host.
· RS-232 Interface describes how to set up the scanner with an RS-232 host, such as point-of-sale devices,
host computers, or other devices with an available RS-232 port.
· IBM Interface describes how to set up the scanner with IBM 468X/469X POS systems. · Keyboard Wedge Interface describes how to set up a Keyboard Wedge interface with the scanner. · OCR Programming describes how to set up the scanner for OCR programming. · Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only) describes IDC, an advanced image processing
firmware, including IDC functionality, parameter barcodes to control its features, and a quick start procedure.
· Digimarc (DS9308-SRD and DS9308-DLD) provides barcodes to either enable or disable Digimarc
Barcode, a machine-readable code that is invisible to people.
· Data Formatting: ADF, MDF, Preferred Symbol briefly describes the Zebra features available for
customizing scanner operation.
· Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL) describes how the DS9308-DL scanner can parse out information
from standard US driver's licenses and certain other American Association of Motor Vehicle Administrators (AAMVA) compliant ID cards.
· Parameter Defaults provides a table of all host devices and miscellaneous scanner defaults. · Numeric Barcodes includes the numeric barcodes to scan for parameters requiring specific numeric
values.
· Alphanumeric Barcodes includes the barcodes representing the alphanumeric keyboard, used when
setting ADF rules.
· ASCII Character Sets provides ASCII character value tables. · Programming Reference provides a table of AIM code identifiers, ASCII character conversions, and
keyboard maps.
25
About This Guide
· Communication Protocol Functionality lists supported scanner functionality by communication protocol. · Country Codes provides barcodes for programming the country keyboard type for the USB keyboard (HID)
device and the keyboard wedge host.
· Country Code Pages provides barcodes for selecting code pages for the country keyboard type. · CJK Decode Control describes control parameters for Unicode/CJK (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) barcode
decode through USB HID Keyboard Emulation mode.
· Signature Capture provides information on CapCode, a signature capture code that encloses a signature
area on a document and allows a scanner to capture a signature.
· Non-Parameter Attributes (Attribute Data Dictionary) defines non-parameter attributes. · ScanSpeed Analytics describes the Zebra ScanSpeed Analytics software that allows the identification of
barcodes that slow down processes.
· Sample Barcodes includes sample barcodes of various code types.
Notational Conventions
The following conventions are used in this document:
· Bold text is used to highlight the following: · Dialog box, window and screen names · Drop-down list and list box names · Check box and radio button names · Icons on a screen · Key names on a keypad · Button names on a screen.
· Bullets (·) indicate: · Action items · Lists of alternatives · Lists of required steps that are not necessarily sequential.
· Sequential lists (e.g., those that describe step-by-step procedures) appear as numbered lists.
26
About This Guide
Related Documents and Software
· DS9308 Quick Start Guide, p/n MN-003533-xx, provides general information for getting started with the
DS9308 scanner, and includes basic set up and operation instructions.
· Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide, p/n 72E-69680-xx - provides information on ADF, a means
of customizing data before transmission to a host.
· Multicode Data Formatting and Preferred Symbol (MDF) User Guide, p/n MN-002895-xx, provides
programming instructions for using MDF and Preferred Symbol on the DS9308 scanner.
· Plural Stage Programmer's Guide, p/n 72E-67113-xx, provides the barcodes necessary to program the
DS9308 scanner to decode Plural Stage barcodes and enable Supplemental Recognition Characters.
· Toshiba TEC Programmer's Guide, p/n MN-002707-xx, provides the barcodes necessary to program the
DS9308 scanner for the Toshiba TEC host. For the latest version of this guide and all guides, go to: zebra.com/support.
Service Information
If you have a problem with your equipment, contact Zebra Global Customer Support for your region. Contact information is available at: zebra.com/support. When contacting support, please have the following information available:
· Serial number of the unit · Model number or product name · Software type and version number.
Zebra responds to calls by email, telephone or fax within the time limits set forth in support agreements. If your problem cannot be solved by Zebra Customer Support, you may need to return your equipment for servicing and will be given specific directions. Zebra is not responsible for any damages incurred during shipment if the approved shipping container is not used. Shipping the units improperly can possibly void the warranty. If you purchased your Zebra business product from a Zebra business partner, contact that business partner for support.
Provide Documentation Feedback
If you have comments, questions, or suggestions about this guide, send an email to EVM-Techdocs@zebra.com.
27
Getting Started
Introduction
The DS9308 combines superior 1D and 2D omnidirectional barcode scanning with advanced imaging applications in a compact, easy to use form factor. The DS9308 is designed primarily for hands-free presentation scanning but can easily be picked up and triggered like a hand-held. Figure 1 DS9308 Scanner
28
Getting Started
Interfaces
NOTE: Only the Symbol Native API (SNAPI) with Imaging interface supports image capture. See USB Device Type
on page 237 to enable this host. The DS9308 scanner supports:
· USB connection to a host. The scanner autodetects a USB host and defaults to the HID keyboard interface
type. Select other USB interface types by scanning programming barcode menus.This interface supports the international keyboards (for Windows® environment) included in the chapter Country Codes.
· Standard RS-232 connection to a host. Scan barcode menus to set up communication of the scanner with
the host.
· Connection to IBM 468X/469X hosts. Scan barcode menus to set up communication of the scanner with
the IBM terminal.
· Keyboard Wedge connection to a host. The host interprets scanned data as keystrokes. Scan barcode
menus to set up communication of the scanner with the host. This interface supports the international keyboards (for Windows® environment) included in the chapter Country Codes.
Unpacking
Remove the scanner from its packing and inspect it for damage. If the scanner was damaged in transit, contact support. See page 27 for contact information. KEEP THE PACKING. It is the approved shipping container; use this to return the equipment for servicing.
29
Features
Figure 2 Parts of the Scanner LED Indicator Scan Window
Getting Started
Scan Trigger
Beeper
Interface Cable Port
30
Getting Started
Setting Up the Scanner
Inserting the Interface Cable
NOTE: Different hosts require different cables. The connectors illustrated in each host chapter are examples only.
Connectors vary from those illustrated, but the steps to connect the scanner are the same.
1. Place the scanner on a flat surface and tilt the scanner all the way forward.
2. Plug the interface cable modular connector into the cable interface port on the rear of the scanner until you hear a click (see Figure 3). Gently tug the cable to ensure the connector is secure. The green LED lights and low/medium/high beeps sound, indicating that the scanner is operational.
IMPORTANT: For information about cables and cable compatibility, go to the Zebra Partner Portal at:
https://partnerportal.zebra.com/PartnerPortal/product_services/downloads_z/barcode_scan ners/Universal-Cable-Guide-Bar-Code-Scanners.xlsx.
Figure 3 Inserting the Cable
1
2
3
Interface Cable Port
Interface Cable Modular Connetor
Clip
To Host
3. Connect the other end of the interface cable to the host (see the specific host chapter for information on host connections).
31
Getting Started
Removing the Interface Cable
Figure 4 Removing the Cable
1
2
3
Cable Release Opening
1. Place the scanner on a flat surface and tilt the scanner all the way forward. 2. Insert a small screw driver into the under side of the cable release opening to lift up the cable clip. 3. Pull the cable/connector UP and OUT of the connection and carefully slide out the cable. 4. Follow the steps for Inserting the Interface Cable to connect a new cable.
32
Getting Started
Connecting Power (if required)
If the host does not provide power to the scanner, connect an external power supply: 1. Connect the interface cable to the base of the scanner, as described in Inserting the Interface Cable on page
31. 2. Connect the other end of the interface cable to the host (refer to the host manual to locate the correct port). 3. Plug the power supply into the power jack on the interface cable. Plug the other end of the power supply into
an AC outlet.
Configuring the Scanner
To configure the scanner use the barcodes included in this manual. See User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options and Imager Preferences for information about programming the scanner using barcode menus. Also see each host-specific chapter to set up connection to a specific host type.
Mounting the Scanner
The DS9308 offers the following mounting options:
· Multi-Mount Bracket - Mounts the scanner to a wall (or other vertical surface) or to a table. The device can
easily be removed from the multi-mount for hand-held use.
· Locking Table Mount - Mounts to a flat surface and the scanner is locked into place.
Multi-Mount Bracket
The optional multi-mount bracket mounts the scanner to a table top or wall (or other vertical surface). When mounting to a table top, use either screws or the adhesive pad. When mounting to a wall (or other vertical surface) screws are required.
NOTE: When mounting to a table top, screws are more secure than the adhesive pad.
Installing Multi-Mount With Adhesive Pad
Figure 5 Mounting with Adhesive Pad
Peel Off
Table Top
33
Getting Started
To mount the optional multi-mount bracket using the adhesive pad: 1. Clean the table top surface with Isopropyl alcohol to remove any dirt or debris. 2. Peel the corner of the paper liner off the tape on the bottom of the multi-mount bracket (Figure 5). 3. Press the bottom of the multi-mount bracket on the flat table top and apply uniform pressure for minimally 10
seconds to secure it to the surface (Figure 5). 4. Slide the base of the scanner into the bracket.
Installing Multi-Mount With Screws on Table
To mount the scanner to a table using the optional multi-mount bracket with screws: 1. Place the bracket in the desired location on the table top. 2. Insert two #8 screws through each screw hole in the bracket. Figure 6 Securing Multi-Mount Bracket to Table
3. Screw into place until secure. Figure 7 Inserting Scanner into Multi-Mount on Table
4. Slide the base of the scanner into the bracket.
34
Getting Started Installing Multi-Mount with Screws on Wall
To mount the scanner on a wall using the optional multi-mount bracket with screws: 1. Place the bracket in its desired location on the wall and insert two #8 screws through each screw hole in the
bracket. Figure 8 Securing Multi-Mount Bracket to Wall
2. Tighten the screws to secure the bracket to the wall. 3. Slide the base of the scanner into the bracket, oriented so the scan window faces down (Figure 9). Figure 9 Inserting Scanner into Multi-Mount on Wall
35
Getting Started
Locking Table Mount
The optional locking table mount is secured to a flat surface and the scanner is locked into place.
Installing Locking Table Mount
To mount the scanner using the optional locking table mount: 1. Place the bracket in the desired location on the table top and insert two #8 screws through each screw hole in
the bracket.
NOTE: When selecting the desired location to install the locking table mount bracket, be sure to consider that when
the scanner is placed on the mount bracket, it is turned a 1/4 revolution clockwise which will be the final location the scanner faces. Figure 10 Installing Locking Table Mount Bracket
2. Place the scanner onto the bracket.
36
Getting Started
Figure 11 Inserting Scanner onto Locking Table Mount Bracket
37
Getting Started
3. Turn the scanner 1/4 revolution clockwise until you hear a click and the scanner faces its final position. Figure 12 Securing Scanner to Locking Mount Bracket
Removing DS9308 from Locking Table Mount
To remove the scanner from the locking table mount, turn counter-clockwise until the scanner is released. Figure 13 Removing Scanner from Locking Mount Bracket
38
123Scan and Software Tools
Introduction
This chapter briefly describes the Zebra software tools available for customizing scanner operation.
123Scan
123Scan is a software tool that simplifies scanner setup and more. Intuitive enough for first time users, the 123Scan wizard guides users through a streamlined setup process. Settings are saved in a configuration file that can be printed as a single programming barcode for scanning, emailed to a smart phone for scanning from its screen, or downloaded to the scanner using a USB cable. Through 123Scan a user can:
· Configure a scanner using a wizard. · Program the following scanner settings.
· Beeper tone / volume settings. · Enable / disable symbologies. · Communication settings.
· Modify data before transmission to a host using:
· Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) - Scan one barcode per trigger pull. · Multicode Data Formatting (MDF) - Scan many barcodes in one trigger pull (select scanners). · Preferred Symbol - Single out one barcode on label of many (select scanners).
· Load parameter settings to a scanner via the following. · Barcode scanning.
· Scan a paper barcode. · Scan a barcode from a PC screen. · Scan a barcode from a smart phone screen.
· Download over a USB cable.
· Load settings to one scanner. · Stage up to 10 scanners simultaneously (Powered USB Hub recommended with 0.5 amp / port).
39
123Scan and Software Tools
· Validate scanner setup. · View scanned data within the utility's Data view screen. · Capture an image and save to a PC within the utility's Data view screen. · Review settings using the Parameter Report. · Clone settings from an already deployed scanner from the Start screen.
· Upgrade scanner firmware. · Load settings to one scanner. · Stage up to 10 scanners simultaneously (Powered USB Hub recommended with 0.5 amp / port).
· View statistics such as: · Asset tracking information. · Time and usage information. · Barcodes scanned by symbology. · Battery diagnostics (select scanners).
· Generate the following reports. · Barcode Report - Programming barcode, included parameter settings, and supported scanner models. · Parameter Report - Parameters programmed within a configuration file. · Inventory Report - Scanner asset tracking information. · Validation Report - Scanned data from the Data view. · Statistics Report - All statistics retrieved from the scanner.
For more information go to: www.zebra.com/123Scan.
Communication with 123Scan
Use a USB cable to connect the scanner to a Windows host computer running 123Scan.
123Scan Requirements
· Host computer running Windows 7, 8, and 10 · Scanner · USB cable.
123Scan Information
For more information on123Scan, go to: www.zebra.com/123Scan. For a 1 minute tour of 123Scan, go to: www.zebra.com/ScannerHowToVideos. To see a list of all of our software tools, go to: www.zebra.com/scannersoftware.
40
123Scan and Software Tools
Scanner SDK, Other Software Tools, and Videos
Tackle all your scanner programming needs with our diversified set of software tools. Whether you need to simply stage a device, or develop a fully featured application with image and data capture as well as asset management, these tools help you every step of the way. To download any of the following free tools, go to: www.zebra.com/scannersoftware.
· 123Scan configuration utility · SDKs
· Scanner SDK for Windows · Scanner SDK for Linux · Scanner SDK for Android · Drivers · OPOS driver · JPOS driver · USB CDC driver · TWAIN driver · Scanner Management Service (SMS) for Remote Management · Windows · Linux · How-To-Videos NOTE: For a list of SDK supported scanner functionality by communication protocol, see Communication
Protocol Functionality.
41
Data Capture
Introduction
This chapter provides beeper and LED definitions, general instructions and tips about scanning, and decode zone diagrams.
Beeper and LED Indicators
In addition to beep sequences, the scanner uses a two-color LED to indicate status.
· The DS9308 scanner includes one LED indicator for system/decode indications.
Table 3 defines beep sequences that occur during both normal scanning and while programming the scanner; LED colors that display during scanning.
Table 3 Scanner Beeper and LED Indications
Beeper Sequence
LED
Standard Use
Low/medium/high beeps Green
Medium beep (or as configured)
Hands-free - solid green LED; turns off after decode. Hand-held - LED is off; green upon decode.
None
Green (solid)
None
No LED (green LED is turned off)
Four long low beeps
Red
Five long low beeps None
Image Capture Low beep
Red Red (blinking) on trigger pull
Green (blinking)
Indication
Power up. A barcode was successfully decoded. (See User Preferences Parameter Defaults on page 60 for programming beeper sounds.)
Presentation (Hands-free) Mode on. Presentation (Hands-free) Mode off.
A transmission error occurred. The data is ignored. This occurs if a unit is not properly configured. Check option setting. Conversion or format error. Scanner is disabled by a host command to the scanner.
Snapshot mode started.
42
Data Capture
Table 3 Scanner Beeper and LED Indications (Continued)
Beeper Sequence
LED
Indication
Low beep
Default Green LED based upon hand-held or hands-free mode
Snapshot mode completed.
High/low beeps
Default Green LED based upon hand-held or hands-free mode
Snapshot mode timed-out.
Parameter Programming
Long low/long high beeps Red
Input error; incorrect barcode or Cancel scanned, wrong entry, incorrect barcode programming sequence; remain in program mode.
High/low beeps
Green
Number expected. Enter value using numeric barcodes.
High/low/high/low beeps Green
Successful program exit with change in the parameter setting.
ADF Programming
Low/high/low beeps
None
ADF transmit error.
High/low beeps
Green
Number expected. Enter another digit. Add leading zeros to the front if necessary.
Low/low beeps
Green
Alphanumeric expected. Enter another alphanumeric character or scan the End of Message barcode.
High/high beeps
Green blinking
ADF criteria or action is expected. Enter another criteria or action or scan the Save Rule barcode.
High/low/low beeps
Green
All criteria or actions cleared for current rule, continue entering rule.
High/low/high/low beeps Green
Rule saved. Rule entry mode exited.
(turns off after blinking)
Long low/long high beeps Red
Rule error. Entry error, wrong barcode scanned, or criteria/action list is too long for a rule. Re-enter criteria or action.
Low beep
Green
Deleted last saved rule. The current rule is left intact.
Low/high/high beeps
Green
All rules deleted.
Long low/long high/long Red low/long high beeps
Out of rule memory. Erase some existing rules, then try to save rule again.
Long low/long high/long low beeps
Green
Cancel rule entry. Rule entry mode exited because of an
(turns off after blinking) error or the user asked to exit rule entry.
Host Specific
USB only
Four high beeps
None
Scanner has not completed initialization. Wait several seconds and scan again.
RS-232 only
Low/low/low/extra low
Red
beeps
RS-232 receive error (parity error).
High beep
None
A <BEL> character is received when Beep on <BEL> is enabled (Point-to-Point mode only).
43
Data Capture
Table 3 Scanner Beeper and LED Indications (Continued)
Beeper Sequence
LED
Indication
123Scan only (When in use, the utility controls the scanner LED)
None
Green (slow blinking) Scanner connected to 123Scan.
None
Red (fast blinking)
File being transferred to the scanner (parameters and firmware).
None
Red (slow blinking)
Firmware being activated on the scanner, loaded into memory.
None
Green (solid)
Programming completed successfully (parameters and firmware).
None
Red (solid)
Error state.
SMS only
None
Red (blinking)
Loading the SMS package to scanner.
Maintenance Indications
High/high beeps
Red (stays on)
Enter Bootloader.
None
Red (blinking)
Firmware installation.
Macro PDF
Low/low beeps
None
Buffered File ID error. A barcode not in the current MPDF sequence was scanned.
Long low/long low beeps None (2 long low beeps)
File ID error. A barcode not in the current MPDF sequence was scanned.
Long low/long low/long low beeps (3 long low beeps)
None
Out of memory. There is not enough buffer space to store the current MPDF symbol.
Long low/long low/long
None
low/long low beeps (4 long
low beeps)
Bad symbology. Scanned a 1D or 2D barcode in an MPDF sequence, a duplicate MPDF label, a label in an incorrect order, or trying to transmit an empty or illegal MPDF field.
Long low/long low/long low/long low/long low beeps (5 long low beeps)
None
Flushing MPDF buffer.
Fast Warble
None
Aborting MPDF sequence.
Low/high beeps
None
Flushing an already empty MPDF buffer.
44
Data Capture
Scanning
The DS9308 has a built-in, adjustable base to easily accommodate both hands-free (presentation) and hand-held scanning.
Hands-free Scanning
The scanner is in hands-free (presentation) mode when it sits on a counter top, or when it is mounted on a wall using the multi-mount bracket. In this mode, the scanner operates in continuous (constant-on) mode, where it automatically decodes a barcode presented in its field of view. In hands-free mode the LED indicator turns solid green. An aiming dot does not appear. Figure 14 Scanning in Hands-free Mode
Hand-held Scanning
To operate the digital scanner in hand-held mode (momentary trigger mode): 1. Pick up the digital scanner and press the trigger. The aiming dot displays. Figure 15 Scanning in Hand-held (Momentary Trigger) Mode
2. Ensure the aiming dot is centered on the barcode (see Figure 17).
45
Data Capture
3. Press and hold the trigger until either: a. The digital scanner reads the barcode. The digital scanner beeps and the successful decode LED flashes. b. The digital scanner does not read the barcode and the illumination turns off.
4. Release the trigger. The aiming dot reappears. To read another barcode, repeat steps 2 and 3. After a programmable time period (see Momentary Trigger Mode Timeout on page 76), the aiming dot turns off and the digital scanner returns to presentation mode, ready to read barcodes without the use of the trigger. For beeper definitions, see Table 3 on page 42.
Aiming
The scanner may project an LED dot which allows positioning the barcode within its field of view. See Decode Ranges on page 47 for the proper distance to achieve between the scanner and a barcode.
Figure 16 Scanning Orientation with Imager Aiming Dot
The scanner can also read a barcode presented within the aiming dot not centered. The top examples in Figure 17 show acceptable aiming options, while the bottom examples can not be decoded.
Figure 17 Acceptable and Incorrect Aiming
012345
012345
012345
012345
The aiming dot is smaller when the scanner is closer to the symbol and larger when it is farther from the symbol. Scan symbols with smaller bars or elements (mil size) closer to the scanner, and those with larger bars or elements (mil size) farther from the scanner.
The scanner beeps to indicate that it successfully decoded the barcode. For more information on beeper and LED definitions, see Table 3 on page 42.
46
Data Capture
Decode Ranges
Table 4 DS9308 Decode Ranges
Symbol Density 3.0 mil 4.0 mil 5.0 mil 7.5 mil 20 mil 3 mil 5 mil
13 mil (100%) 10 mil 20 mil
Barcode Type Code 39 Code 39 Code 39 Code 39 Code 39 Code 128 Code 128 UPC Data Matrix QR
Working Ranges
Near 0 in. / 0 cm
Far 2.5 in. / 6.35 cm
0 in. / 0 cm
4.0 in. / 10.2 cm
0 in. / 0 cm
5.0 in. / 12.7 cm
0 in. / 0 cm
6.5 in. / 16.5 cm
0 in. / 0 cm
11.0 in. / 27.9 cm
0 in. / 0 cm
2.0 in. / 5.1 cm
0 in. / 0 cm
4.0 in. / 10.2 cm
0 in. / 0 cm
8.8 in. / 22.4 cm
0 in. / 0 cm
4.5 in. / 11.4 cm
0 in. / 0 cm
7.5 in. / 19.1 cm
Electronic Article Surveillance (EAS)
NOTE: EAS is available only on scanner models that support Checkpoint EAS.
Some scanner configurations include an integrated Electronic Article Surveillance (EAS) antenna. The scanner's integrated EAS deactivation antenna requires an EAS host cable. This Y-cable connects to the scanner's host port at one end, and splits to the host and the EAS system at the other end.
Installing
Checkpoint EAS Model Compatibility
The scanner is intended for use with Checkpoint CP-VII, CP-IX, and CP-XI systems. It does not support CP-IV and other low-power receiver-based EAS deactivation systems.
Considerations
The Checkpoint CP-VII system generates a periodic burst of electromagnetic energy that deactivates EAS tags brought near the scanner. To avoid interference with the scanner's operation, take the following precautions when installing the EAS system:
· Position the EAS antenna box as far as possible from the scanner (at least 6 in. / 15.24 cm.) · Position the EAS antenna, EAS antenna box, EAS control cable, and EAS controller box as far as possible
from the scanner's host and power cables.
47
Data Capture
EAS range is as dependent on the Checkpoint system (which is calibrated onsite) as it is on the scanner. Therefore, we cannot provide estimated ranges, however these are some of the factors that contribute to EAS range:
· Antenna Length, gauge, number of turns, placement in the scanner. · Type of Checkpoint EAS system used (ie. CP-VII, CP-IX, and CP-XI). · Length of wire connecting antenna to (Checkpoint) EAS (site/installation dependent) · Settings done within Checkpoint system (site/installation dependent).
Checkpoint Contact Information
Contact your local Checkpoint representative to install the EAS cable to the Checkpoint Deactivation System.
48
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Technical Specifications
Introduction
This chapter provides suggested scanner maintenance, troubleshooting, technical specifications, and signal descriptions (pinouts).
Maintenance
Known Harmful Ingredients
The following chemicals are known to damage the plastics on Zebra scanners and should not come in contact with the device:
· Acetone · Ammonia solutions · Aqueous or alcoholic alkaline solutions · Aromatic and chlorinated hydrocarbons · Benzene · Carbolic acid · Compounds of amines or ammonia · Ethanolamine · Ethers · Ketones · TB-lysoform · Toluene · Trichloroethylene.
Approved Cleaners for the Scanner
· Isopropyl alcohol 70% (including pre-moistened wipes).
49
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Technical Specifications
Cleaning the Scanner
Routinely cleaning the exit window is required. A dirty window may affect scanning accuracy. Do not allow any abrasive material to touch the window. To clean the scanner: 1. Dampen a soft cloth with one of the approved cleaning agents listed above or use pre-moistened wipes. 2. Gently wipe all surfaces, including the front, back, sides, top and bottom. Never apply liquid directly to the
scanner. Be careful not to let liquid pool around the scanner window, trigger, cable connector or any other area on the device. 3. Be sure to clean the trigger and in between the trigger and the housing (use a cotton-tipped applicator to reach tight or inaccessible areas). 4. Do not spray water or other cleaning liquids directly into the exit window. 5. Wipe the scanner exit window with a lens tissue or other material suitable for cleaning optical material such as eyeglasses. 6. Immediately dry the scanner window after cleaning with a soft non-abrasive cloth to prevent streaking. 7. Allow the unit to air dry before use. 8. Scanner connectors: a. Dip the cotton portion of a cotton-tipped applicator in isopropyl alcohol. b. Rub the cotton portion of the cotton-tipped applicator back-and-forth across the connector on the Zebra
scanner at least 3 times. Do not leave any cotton residue on the connector. c. Use the cotton-tipped applicator dipped in alcohol to remove any grease and dirt near the connector area. d. Use a dry cotton tipped applicator and rub the cotton portion of the cotton-tipped applicator back-and-forth
across the connectors at least 3 times. Do not leave any cotton residue on the connectors.
50
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Technical Specifications
Troubleshooting
NOTE: If after performing the possible solutions in Table 5 the scanner still experiences problems, contact the
distributor or call support.
Table 5 Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible Causes
Possible Solutions
The illumination does not appear when pressing the trigger.
No power to the scanner.
Incorrect host interface cable is used.
If the configuration requires a power supply, re-connect the power supply.
Connect the correct host interface cable.
Interface/power cables are loose. Re-connect cables.
Scanner is disabled.
For IBM 468x and USB IBM hand-held, IBM table-top, and OPOS modes, enable the scanner via the host interface. Otherwise, see the technical person in charge of scanning.
If using RS-232 Nixdorf B mode, Assert CTS line. CTS is not asserted.
Illumination is disabled.
Enable the illumination. See Decoding Illumination on page 83.
Scanner emits illumination, but does not decode the barcode.
Scanner is not programmed for the correct barcode type.
Barcode symbol is unreadable.
Program the scanner to read that type of barcode. See Symbologies.
Scan test symbols of the same barcode type to determine if the barcode is defaced.
The symbol is not completely inside illumination.
Move the symbol completely within the illumination.
Move the symbol completely within the field of view (AIM pattern does NOT define FOV)
Distance between scanner and barcode is incorrect.
Move the scanner closer to or further from the barcode. See Decode Ranges on page 47.
51
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Technical Specifications
Table 5 Troubleshooting (Continued)
Problem
Possible Causes
Possible Solutions
Scanner decodes barcode, Scanner is not programmed for but does not transmit the the correct host type. data to the host.
Scan the appropriate host type programming barcode. See the chapter corresponding to the host type.
Interface cable is loose.
Re-connect the cable.
If the scanner emits four long low beeps, a transmission error occurred.
This occurs if a unit is not properly configured or connected to the wrong host type.
Set the scanner's communication parameters to match the host's setting.
If the scanner emits 5 low beeps, a conversion or format error occurred.
Configure the scanner's conversion parameters properly.
If the scanner emits low/high/low beeps, it detected an invalid ADF rule.
Program the correct ADF rules. Refer to the Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide.
Host displays scanned data incorrectly.
Scanner is not programmed to work with the host.
Scan the appropriate host type programming barcode.
For RS-232, set the scanner's communication parameters to match the host's settings.
For a Keyboard Wedge configuration, program the system for the correct keyboard type, and turn off the CAPS LOCK key.
Program the proper editing options (e.g., UPC-E to UPC-A Conversion).
Scanner emits short low/short medium/short high beep sequence (power-up beep sequence) more than once.
The USB bus may put the scanner in a state where power to the scanner is cycled on and off more than once.
Normal during host reset.
Scanner emits 4 short high Scanner has not completed USB
beeps during decode
initialization.
attempt.
Wait several seconds and scan again.
Scanner emits Low/low/low/extra low beeps when not in use.
RS-232 receive error.
Normal during host reset. Otherwise, set the scanner's RS-232 parity to match the host setting.
Scanner emits low/high beeps during programming.
Input error, incorrect barcode or Cancel barcode was scanned.
Scan the correct numeric barcodes within range for the parameter programmed.
52
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Technical Specifications
Table 5 Troubleshooting (Continued)
Problem
Possible Causes
Possible Solutions
Scanner emits low/high/low/high beeps during programming.
Out of host parameter storage space.
Out of memory for ADF rules.
Scan Default Parameters on page 62.
Reduce the number of ADF rules or the number of steps in the ADF rules.
During programming, indicates out of ADF parameter storage space.
Erase all rules and re-program with shorter rules.
Scanner emits low/high/low ADF transmit error. beeps.
Refer to the Advanced Data Formatting Guide for information.
Invalid ADF rule is detected.
Refer to the Advanced Data Formatting Guide for information.
Scanner emits a power-up beep after changing USB host type.
The USB bus re-established power to the scanner.
Normal when changing USB host type.
Scanner emits one high beep when not in use.
In RS-232 mode, a <BEL>
Normal when Beep on <BEL> is enabled
character was received and Beep and the scanner is in RS-232 mode.
on <BEL> option is enabled.
Scanner emits frequent beeps.
Inadequate power supplied to the Check the system power. If the configuration
scanner.
requires a power supply, re-connect the
power supply.
Incorrect host interface cable is used.
Verify that the correct host interface cable is used. If not, connect the correct host interface cable.
Interface/power cables are loose. Check for loose cable connections and re-connect cables.
Scanner emits five long low beeps after a barcode is decoded.
Conversion or format error was detected.
The scanner conversion parameters are not properly configured.
Ensure the scanner conversion parameters are properly configured.
Conversion or format error was detected.
An ADF rule was set up with characters that can't be sent for the host selected.
Change the ADF rule, or change to a host that can support the ADF rule.
Conversion or format error was detected.
A barcode was scanned with characters that can't be sent for that host.
Change the barcode, or change to a host that can support the barcode.
53
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Technical Specifications
Report Product Information
Report Software Version
Scan the following barcode to send the version of software installed in the scanner. Report Software Version
Report Serial Number
Scan the following barcode to send the scanner serial number to the host. Serial Number
Report Manufacturing Information
Scan the following barcode to send the scanner manufacturing information to the host. Manufacturing Information
54
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Technical Specifications
Technical Specifications
Table 6 Technical Specifications
Item
Description
Physical Characteristics
Dimensions
5.7 in H x 3.4 in W x 3.3 in D 14.5 cm H x 8.6 cm W x 8.3 cm D
Weight
11.2 oz (318 g)
Available Colors
Midnight Black, Alpine White
Supported Host Interfaces
USB, RS232, Keyboard Wedge, TGCS (IBM) 46XX over RS485
USB Certification
DS9308 is USB2.0 Full Speed Compliant, visit USB.org for more details.
Keyboard Support
Supports over 90 international keyboards
Electronic Article Surveillance
Compatible with Checkpoint deactivation system
Electrical Characteristics
SR and DL Models
Minimum
Maximum Unit
Supply Voltage 4.5
5.0
5.5
V
Idle current (Hand-held)
75
mA
Idle current (Hands-free)
135
mA
Scanning current (Hand-held)
350
mA
Scanning current (Hands-free)
335
mA
Performance Characteristics Swipe Speed
Aiming Dot Illumination Field of View (Horizontal x Vertical) Nominal
Up to 120 in./305 cm per second for 13 mil UPC in optimized mode Amber 617nm LED Red 660nm LED
52° H x 33° V
55
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Technical Specifications
Table 6 Technical Specifications (Continued)
Item
Description
Image Sensor
1280 x 800 pixels
Minimum Print Contrast
15% minimum reflective difference
Skew Tolerance
+/- 60°
Pitch Tolerance
+/- 60°
Roll Tolerance
360°
Image Capture
Graphics Format Support
Images can be exported as Bitmap, JPEG, or TIFF
Resolution (4 x 5.8 in. document @ 6 in.)
109 PPI
User Environment
Operating Temperature
32º F to 122º F (0º C to 50º C)
Storage Temperature
-40° to 158°F / -40° to 70°C
Humidity
5% to 95% RH, non-condensing
Drop Specifications
Designed to withstand multiple drops at 5.0 ft/1.5 m to concrete
Tumble Specification (Scanner)
Designed to withstand 1,000 tumbles in 1.5 ft./0.5 m tumbler
Ambient Light Immunity
0 to 10,000 Foot Candles/0 to 107,700 Lux
Environmental Sealing
IP52
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
ESD per EN61000-4-2, +/-15 KV Air, +/-8 KV Indirect
Accessories (see page 24)
Symbol Decode Capability
1D
Code 39, Code 128, Code 93, Codabar/NW7, Code 11, MSI
Plessey, UPC/EAN, I 2 of 5, Korean 3 of 5, GS1 DataBar, Base
32 (Italian Pharma)
2D
PDF417, Micro PDF417, Composite Codes, TLC-39, Aztec,
Data Matrix, MaxiCode, QR Code, Micro QR, Han Xin, Postal
Codes, SecurPharm, Dotcode, Dotted Datamatrix
Digimarc
Digital watermark technology; available on specific models only
OCR
OCR-A, OCR-B, MICR, US Currency
Minimum Element Resolution
Code 39 3 mil Code 128 3 mil QR Code 5 mil Data Matrix 5 mil
Regulatory
See Decode Ranges on page 47 for working ranges.
56
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Technical Specifications
Table 6 Technical Specifications (Continued)
Item
Description
Environmental: Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)
EN 50581 EN IEC 63000
EMC
EN 55032, EN55024, EN55035 EN 61000-3-2, EN 61000-3-3
47 CFR Part 15, Subpart B, Class B, ICES-003, Class B
Health and Safety
IEC 62368-1, UL 62368-1, CAN/CSA-22.2 N0. 62368-1-14 IEC 62471
Utilities and Management
123Scan
Programs scanner parameters, upgrades firmware, provides scanned barcode data and prints reports. See 123Scan and Software Tools.
www.zebra.com/123Scan
Symbol Scanner SDK
Generates a fully-featured scanner application, including documentation, drivers, test utilities and sample source code.
www.zebra.com/ScannerSDKforWindows
Scanner Management Service (SMS)
Remotely manages your Zebra scanner and queries its asset information.
www.zebra.com/sms
57
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Technical Specifications
Scanner Signal Descriptions
Figure 18 Scanner Cable Pinouts
Cable Interface Port
PIN 1
Interface Cable Modular Connector
PIN 10
The signal descriptions in Table 7 apply to the connectors on the DS9308 scanner and are for reference only.
Table 7 DS9308 Scanner Signal Pin-outs
Pin
IBM
RS-232
Keyboard Wedge
USB
1
Cable ID
Cable ID
Cable ID
Cable ID
2
Power (+5V)
Power (+5V)
Power (+5V)
Power (+5V)
3
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
4
IBM_OUT
TxD
KeyClock
Reserved
5
IBM_IN
RxD
TermData
D +
6
IBM_T/R
RTS
KeyData
Reserved
7
Reserved
CTS
TermClock
D -
8
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
9
See note
10
See note
Note: EAS configurations use pins 9 and 10 for an EAS antenna. For other configurations pins 9 and 10 are open.
58
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Introduction
You can program the scanner to perform various functions, or activate different features. This chapter describes user preference features and provides programming barcodes for selecting these features. The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 8 on page 60 (also see Parameter Defaults for all defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.
Setting Parameters
To set feature values, scan a single barcode or a short barcode sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the scanner powers down.
NOTE: Most computer monitors allow scanning barcodes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen,
be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the barcode clearly, and bars and/or spaces do not merge.
If not using the default host, select the host type (see each host chapter for specific host information) after the power-up beeps sound. This is only necessary upon the first power-up when connected to a new host. To return all features to default values, see Default Parameters on page 62. Throughout the programming barcode
menus, asterisks indicate (*) default values.
* Indicates default * Enable Parameter
(1)
Feature/option Option value
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases, scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to set the beeper tone to high, scan the High Frequency (beep tone) barcode listed under Beep Tone on page 65. The scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry. Other parameters require scanning several barcodes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
59
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
User Preferences/Miscellaneous Options Parameter Defaults
Table 8 lists defaults for user preferences parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
· Scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in
memory. To recall default parameter values, see Default Parameters on page 62.
· Configure the scanner using the 123Scan configuration program. See 123Scan and Software Tools.
NOTE: See Parameter Defaults for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 8 User Preferences Parameter Defaults
Parameter
Parameter Number 1
SSI Number 2
Default
Standard User Preferences
Set Default Parameter
N/A
N/A
N/A
Parameter Barcode Scanning
236
ECh
Enable
Beep After Good Decode
56
38h
Enable
Beep Volume
140
8Ch
High
Beep Tone
145
91h
Medium
Beep Duration
628
F1h 74h
Short
Volume Adjustment Trigger Timeout
403
F0h 93h
5 Seconds
Suppress Power Up Beeps
721
F1h D1h
Do Not Suppress
Direct Decode Indicator
859
F2h 5Bh
Disable
Low Power Mode
128
80h
Disable
Time Delay to Low Power Mode
146
92h
1 Hour
Trigger Mode
138
8Ah
Presentation Mode
Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern
306
F0h 32h
Enable
Presentation (Hands-free) Decode Aiming 590 Pattern
F1h 4Eh
Disable Presentation (Hands-free) Decode Aiming Pattern
Momentary Trigger Mode Timeout
2030
EDh
5 Seconds
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page Number
62 63 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 73 74 75
76
60
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Table 8 User Preferences Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number 1
SSI Number 2
Picklist Mode
402
F0h 92h
Continuous Barcode Read Unique Barcode Reporting Decode Session Timeout
649
F1h 89h
723
F1h D3h
136
88h
Default
Enable Picklist Mode in Hand-held Mode Disable Enable 9.9 Seconds
Timeout Between Decodes, Same
137
89h
Symbol
0.5 Seconds
Timeout Between Decodes, Different
144
90h
Symbols
0.1 Seconds
Triggered Timeout, Same Symbol
724
F1h D4h
Disable
Mobile Phone/Display Mode
716
F1h CCh
Normal
PDF Prioritization PDF Prioritization Timeout Decoding Illumination Illumination Brightness
719
F1h CFh
Disable
720
F1h D0h
200 ms
298
F0h 2Ah
Enable
669
F1h 9Dh
High
Motion Tolerance (Hand-held Trigger
858
Mode Only)
F2h 5Ah
Less Motion Tolerance
Product ID (PID) Type
1281
F8h 05h 01h Host Type Unique
Product ID (PID) Value ECLevel
1725 1710
F8h 06h BDh 0 F8h 06h AEh 0
Miscellaneous Options Enter Key Tab Key Transmit Code ID Character
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
45
2Dh
N/A N/A None
Prefix Value
99, 105
63h, 69h
7013 <CR><LF>
Suffix 1 Value Suffix 2 Value
98, 104 100, 106
62h, 68h 64h, 6Ah
7013 <CR><LF>
Scan Data Transmission Format
235
EBh
Data As Is
FN1 Substitution Values
103, 109 67h, 6Dh
7013 <CR><LF>
Transmit "No Read" Message
94
5E
Disable
Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval
1118
F8h 04h 5Eh Disable
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page Number 77
78 78 79 79
80
80 81 82 82 83 83 85
85 86 86
87 87 88 89 89
90 92 93 94
61
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Table 8 User Preferences Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number 1
SSI Number 2
Default
securPharm Decoding
1752
F8h 06h D8h Disable
securPharm Output Formatting
1753
F8h 06h D9h No Formatting
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page Number
95
96
Standard User Preferences
Default Parameters
Scan one of the following barcodes to reset the scanner to its default settings as follows:
· Restore Defaults resets all default parameters as follows: · If you configured custom default parameter values via the Write to Custom Defaults barcode,
scanning the Restore Defaults barcode restores these custom values.
· If you did not configure custom default parameter values, scanning the Restore Defaults barcode
restores the factory default values. See Parameter Defaults for these values.
· Set Factory Defaults clears all custom default values and sets the factory default values. See Parameter
Defaults for these values.
Write to Custom Defaults
To create a set of custom defaults, select the desired parameter values in this guide, and then scan Write to Custom Defaults.
Restore Defaults Set Factory Defaults
Write to Custom Defaults
62
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Parameter Barcode Scanning Parameter # 236 SSI # ECh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether to enable or disable the decoding of parameter barcodes, including the Set Defaults barcodes.
* Enable Parameter Barcode Scanning
(1)
Disable Parameter Barcode Scanning (0)
Beep After Good Decode Parameter # 56 SSI # 38h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether or not the scanner beeps after a good decode. If you select Do Not Beep After Good Decode, the beeper still operates during parameter menu scanning and to indicate error conditions.
* Enable Beep After Good Decode
(1)
Disable Beep After Good Decode (0)
63
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Beep Volume Parameter # 140 SSI # 8Ch
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a beep volume.
Low Volume (2)
* High Volume
(0)
Medium Volume (1)
64
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Beep Tone Parameter # 145 SSI # 91h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a beep tone for audible feedback indicating a good decode. Select from the Standard Beep Tones below or from the Beep Duration on page 66. Scan Disable Beep Tone to disable all tones.
Disable Beep Tone (3)
Standard Beep Tones
Low Beep Tone (2)
* Medium Beep Tone
(1)
High Beep Tone (0)
Medium to High Beep Tone (2-tone) (4)
65
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Beep Duration Parameter # 628 SSI # F1h 74h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the duration for the good decode beep.
* Short Duration
(0)
Long Duration (2)
Medium Duration (1)
66
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Volume Adjustment Trigger Timeout Parameter # 403 SSI # F0h 93h
Scan one of the following barcodes to set the length of time needed to hold the trigger to adjust the volume. The scanner changes volume and beeps with the new volume.
3 Seconds (30)
7 Seconds (70)
* 5 Seconds (50)
10 Seconds (100)
67
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Suppress Power Up Beeps Parameter # 721 SSI # F1h D1h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether or not to suppress the scanner's power-up beeps.
* Do Not Suppress Power Up Beeps
(0)
Suppress Power Up Beeps (1)
68
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Direct Decode Indicator Parameter # 859 SSI # F2h 5Bh
This parameter is only supported in Standard (Level) Trigger Mode. Scan one of the following barcodes to select optional blinking of the illumination on a successful decode if you continue to hold the trigger. If you release the trigger upon decode, the blinking does not occur. This allows you to choose additional feedback for a successful decode by holding the trigger, or to continue to scan as normal.
· * Disable Direct Decode Indicator - Illumination does not blink on a successful decode. · 1 Blink - Illumination blinks once upon a successful decode. · 2 Blinks - Illumination blinks twice upon a successful decode.
* Disable Direct Decode Indicator
(0)
2 Blinks (2)
1 Blink (1)
69
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Low Power Mode Parameter # 128 SSI # 80h
NOTE: The Low Power Mode parameter only applies for non-USB and non-RS485 host interfaces, and when
Trigger Mode is set to Level (Standard). Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether or not the scanner enters low power mode after a decode attempt or host communication. This applies to serial and keyboard wedge connections. If disabled, power remains on after each decode attempt. If you enable this, see Time Delay to Low Power Mode to set the inactivity time period.
Enable Low Power Mode (1)
* Disable Low Power Mode
(0)
70
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Time Delay to Low Power Mode Parameter # 146 SSI # 92h
NOTE: This parameter only applies when Low Power Mode is enabled.
Scan one of the following barcodes to set the time the scanner remains active before entering low power mode. The scanner wakes upon trigger press or when the host attempts to communicate with the scanner.
1 Second (17)
1 Minute (33)
15 Minutes (43)
10 Seconds (26)
5 Minutes (37)
71
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options Time Delay to Low Power Mode (continued)
30 Minutes (45)
* 1 Hour
(49)
45 Minutes (46)
3 Hours (51)
6 Hours (54)
9 Hours (57)
72
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Trigger Mode Parameter # 138 SSI # 8Ah
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a trigger mode for the scanner:
· Standard (Level) - A trigger press activates decode processing. Decode processing continues until the
barcode decodes, you release the trigger, or the Decode Session Timeout on page 79 occurs.
· * Presentation (Blink) - The scanner activates decode processing when it detects a barcode in its field of
view. After a period of non-use, the LEDs turn off until the scanner senses motion..
Standard (Level) (0)
* Presentation (Blink)
(7)
73
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern Parameter # 306 SSI # F0h 32h
NOTE: The decode aiming pattern flashes even if you disable the Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern if the trigger
button is pressed. Scan one of the following barcodes to select when to project the aiming pattern in hand-held mode:
· Enable Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern - This projects the aiming pattern during barcode capture. · Disable Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern - This turns the aiming pattern off. · Enable Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF - This projects the aiming pattern when the scanner
detects a PDF barcode.
* Enable Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern
(2)
Disable Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern (0)
Enable Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF (3)
74
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Presentation (Hands-free) Decode Aiming Pattern Parameter # 590 SSI # F1h 4Eh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select when to project the aiming pattern in hands-free mode:
· Enable Presentation (Hands-free) Decode Aiming Pattern - This projects the aiming pattern during
barcode capture.
· Disable Presentation (Hands-free) Decode Aiming Pattern - This turns the aiming pattern off. · Enable Presentation (Hands-free) Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF - This projects the aiming pattern
when the scanner detects a PDF barcode.
NOTE: With Momentary Trigger Mode Timeout on page 76 enabled, the decode aiming pattern flashes
even when you disable the Hands-free Decode Aiming Pattern.
Enable Presentation (Hands-free) Decode Aiming Pattern (1)
Enable Presentation (Hands-free) Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF (2)
* Disable Presentation (Hands-free)
Decode Aiming Pattern
(0)
75
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Momentary Trigger Mode Timeout Parameter # 2030 SSI # EDh
In momentary trigger mode, the aiming pattern appears upon pressing the trigger. Once in this mode, upon each trigger press the scanner attempts to decode the barcode in front of it. After a period of inactivity while the trigger is not pressed, the scanner reverts to presentation mode where there is no illumination until an item is presented. Scan one of the following barcodes to set the length of the period of inactivity in momentary trigger mode before the scanner reverts to presentation mode.
2 Seconds (20)
4 Seconds (40)
3 Seconds (30)
* 5 Seconds (50)
76
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Picklist Mode Parameter # 402 SSI # F0h 92h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a Picklist Mode. In this mode, you can pick out and decode a barcode from a group of barcodes that are printed close together by placing the aiming pattern on the barcode you want to decode.
NOTES: Enabling Picklist Mode overrides the Disable Decode Aiming Pattern options. You can not disable the
decode aiming pattern when Picklist Mode is enabled. Enabling Picklist Mode can slow decode speed and hinder the ability to decode longer barcodes.
· Enable Picklist Mode Always - Picklist Mode is always enabled. · Enable Picklist Mode in Hand-held Mode - Picklist Mode is enabled when the scanner is out of
hands-free mode and disabled when the scanner is in presentation mode.
· Enable Picklist Mode in Hands-free Mode - Picklist Mode is enabled when the scanner is in hands-free
mode only.
NOTE: When using Picklist Mode in Hands-free Mode, increase the time of the Timeout Between Decodes,
Same Symbol on page 79.
· Disable Picklist Mode Always - Picklist Mode is always disabled.
Enable Picklist Mode Always (2)
* Enable Picklist Mode in Hand-held Mode (1)
Enable Picklist Mode in Hands-free Mode (3)
Disable Picklist Mode Always (0)
77
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Continuous Barcode Read Parameter # 649 SSI # F1h 89h
Scan Enable Continuous Barcode Read to report every barcode while the trigger is pressed.
NOTE: We strongly recommend enabling Momentary Trigger Mode Timeout on page 76 with this parameter.
Disabling Picklist Mode can cause accidental decodes when more than one barcode is in the scanner's field of view.
Enable Continuous Barcode Read (1)
* Disable Continuous Barcode Read
(0)
Unique Barcode Reporting Parameter # 723 SSI # F1h D3h
Scan Enable Continuous Barcode Read Uniqueness to report only unique barcodes while the trigger is pressed. This option only applies when Continuous Barcode Read is enabled.
* Enable Unique Barcode Reporting
(1)
Disable Unique Barcode Reporting (0)
78
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Decode Session Timeout Parameter # 136 SSI # 88h
This parameter sets the maximum time decode processing continues during a scan attempt. It is programmable in 0.1 second increments from 0.5 to 9.9 seconds. The default timeout is 9.9 seconds. To set a Decode Session Timeout, scan the following barcode, and then scan two barcodes from Numeric Barcodes that correspond to the desired on time. Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. For example, to set a Decode Session Timeout of 0.5 seconds, scan this barcode, and then scan the 0 and 5 barcodes. To correct an
error or change the selection, scan Cancel.
Decode Session Timeout
Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol Parameter # 137 SSI # 89h
Use this option in presentation mode or Continuous Barcode Read mode to prevent the scanner from continuously decoding the same barcode when it is left in the scanner's field of view. The barcode must be out of the field of view for the timeout period before the scanner reads the same consecutive symbol. It is programmable in 0.1 second increments from 0.0 to 9.9 seconds. The default interval is 0.5 seconds. To select the timeout between decodes for the same symbol, scan the following barcode, and then scan two barcodes from Numeric Barcodes that correspond to the desired interval, in 0.1 second increments.
Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol
79
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Timeout Between Decodes, Different Symbols Parameter # 144 SSI # 90h
Use this option in presentation mode or Continuous Barcode Read to control the time the scanner waits before decoding a different symbol. It is programmable in 0.1 second increments from 0.1 to 9.9 seconds. The default is 0.1 seconds. To select the timeout between decodes for different symbols, scan the following barcode, and then scan two barcodes from Numeric Barcodes that correspond to the desired interval, in 0.1 second increments.
NOTE: Timeout Between Decodes, Different Symbols cannot be greater than or equal to the Decode Session
Timeout.
Timeout Between Decodes, Different Symbols
Triggered Timeout, Same Symbol
Parameter # 724 (SSI # F1h D4h)
NOTE: This feature does not apply to Timeout Between Decodes, Different Symbols.
NOTE: Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol cannot be greater than or equal to the Time Delay to Low
Power Mode (parameter #146 on page 71). Scan Enable Triggered Timeout, Same Symbol below to apply Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol (parameter #137 on page 79) in hand-held trigger mode. Subsequent scans of Enable Triggered Timeout, Same Symbol are ignored until Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol expires.
Enable Triggered Timeout, Same Symbol (1)
* Disable Triggered Timeout, Same Symbol
(0)
80
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Mobile Phone/Display Mode Parameter # 716 SSI # F1h CCh
This mode improves barcode reading performance off mobile phones and electronic displays. Scan one of the following barcodes to select the desired mode.
* Normal Mobile Phone/Display Mode
(0)
Enhanced in Hands-free Mode (2)
Enhanced in Hand-held Mode (1)
Enhanced in Both Modes (3)
81
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
PDF Prioritization Parameter # 719 SSI # F1h CFh
Scan Enable PDF Prioritization to delay decoding certain 1D barcodes (see Note below) by the value specified in PDF Prioritization Timeout. During that time the scanner attempts to decode a PDF417 symbol (e.g., on a US driver's license), and if successful, reports this only. If it does not decode (can not find) a PDF417 symbol, it reports the 1D symbol after the timeout. The 1D symbol must be in the device's field of view for the scanner to report it. This parameter does not affect decoding other symbologies.
NOTE: To use PDF Prioritization in hand-held mode, you must disable Picklist Mode.
NOTE: The 1D Code 128 barcode lengths include the following: · 7 to 10 characters · 14 to 22 characters · 27 to 28 characters
In addition, a Code 39 barcode with the following lengths are considered to potentially be part of a US driver's license:
· 8 characters · 12 characters
Enable PDF Prioritization (1)
* Disable PDF Prioritization
(0)
PDF Prioritization Timeout Parameter # 720 SSI # F1h D0h
If you enabled PDF Prioritization, set this timeout to indicate how long the scanner attempts to decode a PDF417 symbol before reporting the 1D barcode in the field of view.
82
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Scan the following barcode, and then scan four barcodes from Numeric Barcodes that specify the timeout in milliseconds. For example, to enter 400 ms, scan the following barcode, and then scan 0400. The range is 0 to 5000 ms, and the default is 200 ms.
PDF Prioritization Timeout
Decoding Illumination Parameter # 298 SSI # F0h 2Ah
Scan one of the following barcodes to determine whether the scanner turns on illumination to aid decoding. Enabling illumination usually results in superior images and better decode performance. The effectiveness of the illumination decreases as the distance to the target increases.
* Enable Decoding Illumination
(1)
Disable Decoding Illumination (0)
Illumination Brightness Parameter # 669 SSI # F1h 9Dh
Scan one of the following barcodes to set the illumination brightness used during an active decode session. This only applies in hand-held mode (not in presentation mode).
NOTE: Selecting a lower brightness level can affect decode performance.
83
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Low Illumination Brightness (0)
* High Illumination Brightness (10)
Medium Illumination Brightness (3)
84
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Motion Tolerance (Hand-held Trigger Modes Only) Parameter # 858 SSI # F2h 5Ah
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a motion tolerance option:
· Less Motion Tolerance - This provides optimal decoding performance on 1D barcodes. · More Motion Tolerance - This increases motion tolerance and speeds decoding when scanning a series
of 1D barcodes in rapid progression.
* Less Motion Tolerance (0)
More Motion Tolerance (1)
Product ID (PID) Type Parameter # 1281 SSI # F8h 05h 01h
Scan one of the following barcodes to define the PID value reported in USB enumeration.
* Host Type Unique (0)
IBM Unique (2)
85
Product Unique (1)
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Product ID (PID) Value Parameter # 1725 SSI # F8h 06h BDh
To set a Product ID value, scan Set PID Value, and then scan four numeric barcodes in Numeric Barcodes that correspond to the value. Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. To correct an error, or change a selection, scan Cancel on page 431. The range is (0,1600-1649).
NOTE: This parameter is applicable to customers using a Firmware Flash Update per the Toshiba Global
Commerce Solutions (TGCS) Universal Serial Bus OEM Point-of-Sale Device Interface.
Set PID Value
ECLevel Parameter # 1710 SSI # F8h 06h AEh
To set an ECLevel value, scan Set ECLevel, and then scan five numeric barcodes in Numeric Barcodes that correspond to the desired level. Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. To correct an error, or change a selection, scan Cancel on page 431.
NOTE:
This parameter is applicable to customers using a Firmware Flash Update per the Toshiba Global Commerce Solutions (TGCS) Universal Serial Bus OEM Point-of-Sale Device Interface. It allows a customer to define an ECLevel value in order to manage and control Flash Update operations on the 4690 operating system.
Contact the Zebra Customer Support Center online at: www.zebra.com/support for more information.
Set ECLevel
86
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters
Enter Key
Scan the following barcode to add an Enter key (carriage return/line feed) after scanned data. To program other prefixes and/or suffixes, see Prefix/Suffix Values on page 89.
Add Enter Key (Carriage Return/Line Feed)
Tab Key
Scan the following barcode to add a Tab key after scanned data. Tab Key
87
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Transmit Code ID Character Parameter # 45 SSI # 2Dh
A Code ID character identifies the code type of a scanned barcode. This is useful when decoding more than one code type. In addition to any single character prefix selected, the Code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the decoded symbol. Select no Code ID character, a Symbol Code ID character, or an AIM Code ID character. For Code ID characters, see Symbol Code Identifiers on page 461 and AIM Code Identifiers on page 462.
NOTE: If you enable Symbol Code ID Character or AIM Code ID Character, and enable Transmit "No Read"
Message on page 93, the scanner appends the code ID for Code 39 to the NR message.
Symbol Code ID Character (2)
* None
(0)
AIM Code ID Character (1)
88
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Prefix/Suffix Values Key Category Parameter # P = 99, S1 = 98, S2 = 100 SSI # P = 63h, S1 = 62h, S2 = 64h Decimal Value Parameter # P = 105, S1 = 104, S2 = 106 SSI # P = 69h, S1 = 68h, S2 = 6Ah
NOTE: To use Prefix/Suffix values, first set the Scan Data Transmission Format on page 90.
You can append a prefix and/or one or two suffixes to scan data for use in data editing. To set a value for a prefix or suffix, scan one of the following barcodes, and then scan four barcodes from Numeric Barcodes that correspond to that value. See ASCII Character Sets for the four-digit codes. When using host commands to set the prefix or suffix, set the key category parameter to 1, and then set the 3-digit decimal value. See ASCII Character Sets for the four-digit codes. The default prefix and suffix value is 7013 <CR><LF> (Enter key). To correct an error or change a selection, scan Cancel on page 431.
Scan Prefix (7)
Scan Suffix 2 (8)
Scan Suffix 1 (6)
Data Format Cancel
89
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Scan Data Transmission Format Parameter # 235 SSI # EBh
NOTE: If using this parameter do not use ADF rules to set the prefix/suffix.
To change the scan data format, scan one of the following barcodes corresponding to the desired format. To set values for the prefix and/or suffix, see Prefix/Suffix Values on page 89.
* Data As Is
(0)
<DATA> <SUFFIX 2> (2)
<DATA> <SUFFIX 1> (1)
<DATA> <SUFFIX 1> <SUFFIX 2> (3)
90
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Scan Data Transmission Format (continued)
<PREFIX> <DATA > (4)
<PREFIX> <DATA> <SUFFIX 2> (6)
<PREFIX> <DATA> <SUFFIX 1> (5)
<PREFIX> <DATA> <SUFFIX 1> <SUFFIX 2> (7)
91
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
FN1 Substitution Values Key Category Parameter # 103 Key Category SSI # 67h Decimal Value Parameter # 109 Decimal Value SSI # 6Dh
Keyboard wedge and USB HID keyboard hosts support a FN1 substitution feature. Enabling this substitutes any FN1 character (0x1b) in an EAN128 barcode with a value. This value defaults to 7013 <CR><LF> (Enter key). When using host commands to set the FN1 substitution value, set the key category parameter to 1, and then set the 3-digit keystroke value. See the ASCII Character Set table for the current host interface for the desired value. To select a FN1 substitution value via barcode menus: 1. Scan the following barcode.
Set FN1 Substitution Value 2. Locate the keystroke desired for FN1 Substitution in the ASCII Character Set table for the current host
interface, and enter the 4-digit ASCII value by scanning four barcodes from Numeric Barcodes. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel. To enable FN1 substitution for USB HID keyboard, scan Enable USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution on page 245. To enable FN1 substitution for keyboard wedge, scan Enable FN1 Substitution on page 312.
92
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Transmit "No Read" Message Parameter # 94 SSI # 5Eh
Scan one of the following barcodes to set an option for transmitting the No Read (NR) characters.
NOTE: If you enable Transmit No Read, and also enable Symbol Code ID Character or AIM Code ID
Character for Transmit Code ID Character on page 88, the scanner appends the code ID for Code 39 to the NR message.
NOTE: This does not apply in presentation mode.
· Enable No Read - This transmits the characters NR when a successful decode does not occur before
trigger release or the Decode Session Timeout expires. See Decode Session Timeout on page 79.
· Disable No Read - This sends nothing to the host if a symbol does not decode.
Enable No Read (1)
* Disable No Read
(0)
93
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval Parameter # 1118 SSI # F8h 04h 5Eh
The scanner can send unsolicited heartbeat messages to assist in diagnostics. To enable this parameter and set the desired unsolicited heartbeat interval, scan one of the following time interval barcodes, or scan Set Another Interval followed by four barcodes from Numeric Barcodes that correspond to the desired number of seconds. Scan Disable Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval to turn off the feature. The heartbeat event is sent as decode data (with no decode beep) in the form of:
MOTEVTHB:nnn where nnn is a three-digit sequence number starting at 001 and wrapping after 100.
10 Seconds (10)
Set Another Interval
1 Minute (60)
* Disable Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval
(0)
94
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
securPharm Decoding Parameter # 1752
SSI # F8h 06h D8h
securPharm implements the IFA and GS1 Coding System for the European pharmaceutical industry. securPharm code is used to prevent pharmaceutical counterfeiting.
When this feature is enabled, if a GS1 symbol is decoded and includes any aspects of the Application Identifier associated with the securPharm GS1 specifications, the entire GS1 symbol is processed as a securPharm symbol. For this reason, it is expected that under certain circumstances, a GS1 barcodes that is a securPharm symbol may not be processed properly; if the GS1 symbol is not created as per the specification. The output cannot be guaranteed as valid.
Although the GS1-128 type and the GS1 DataBar family are not specifically indicated in the IFA specification, they are supported.
The securPharm output is in XML format and can include the product number, serial number, lot number, expiration and Date of Manufacturing. The XML tags can be arranged in any order. Tags that are not in the barcode are omitted. For example:
<content dfi="value_dfi"> <Daten_1>value_Daten_1</Daten_1> <Daten_2>value_Daten_2</Daten_2> <Daten_n>value_Daten_n</Daten_n> </content>
Where:
value_dfi = IFA or GS1
Daten_1 to Daten_n is the production number, serial number, etc.
Scan a barcode below to enable or disable the ability to process pharmaceutical type barcodes.
* Disable securPharm Decoding
(0)
Enable securPharm Decoding (1)
95
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
securPharm Output Formatting Parameter # 1753 SSI # F8h 06h D9h
NOTE: securPharm output formatting is effective only when securPharm Decoding on page 95 is enabled.
securPharm Output Formatting parameter options represent bit positions. Therefore, any combination of formatting can be used.
When you scan a securPharm Output Formatting barcode, the securPharm output is formatted in a number of ways.
Sample GS1 Format
Product Number: GTIN Data Identifier DI Data Format Identifier: GS1
Data Carrier FNC104150123456782 101A234B5FNC1 1717231
> Scanned Barcode >
<content dfi="GS1">
<gtin>04150123456782</gtin> <lot>1A234B5</lot> <exp>151231</exp> <sn>1234567890123456</sn>
</content>
Sample GS1 Output - Feature Disabled The output has no format: 0104150123456782101A234B517151231211234567890123456
Sample GS1 Output - No Formatting (0) The output is a single line of characters: <content
dfi="GS1"><gtin>04150123456782</gtin><lot>1A234B5</lot><exp>151231</exp><sn>1234567890123456</sn></content>
Sample GS1 Output - Insert Tab (1) The output is a single line of characters with a tab inserted in the XML body: <content dfi="GS1">[tab]<gtin>04150123456782</gtin>[tab]<lot>1A234B5</lot>[tab]<exp>151231</exp>[tab]<sn>12345 67890123456</sn></content>
Sample GS1 Output - Insert New Line (2) The output consists of multiple lines of characters with a new line character at the end of each line. <content dfi="GS1"> <gtin>04150123456782</gtin> <lot>1A234B5</lot> <exp>151231</exp> <sn>1234567890123456</sn> </content>
96
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Sample GS1 Output - Insert Tab and New Line (3) The output consists of multiple lines of characters with tabs and a new line character at the end of each line. <content dfi="GS1"> [tab]<gtin>04150123456782</gtin> [tab]<lot>1A234B5</lot> [tab]<exp>151231</exp> [tab]<sn>1234567890123456</sn> </content>
Sample IFA Format
Product Number: PPNData Identifier DI Data Format Identifier: IFA
Data Carrier Mac069N11123456782Gs 1T1A234B5Gs D151231Gs
> Scanned Barcode >
<content dfi="IFA"> <ppn>111234567842</ppn> <lot>1A234B5</lot> <sn>1234567890123456</sn> </content>
Sample GS1 Output - Feature Disabled The output has no format: [)>069N1112345678421T1A234B5S1234567890123456
Sample GS1 Output - No Formatting (0) The output is a single line of characters: <content dfi="IFA"><ppn>111234567842</ppn><lot>1A234B5</lot><sn>1234567890123456</sn></content>
Sample GS1 Output - Insert Tab (1) The output is a single line of characters with a tab inserted in the XML body: <content dfi="IFA">[tab]<ppn>111234567842</ppn>[tab]<lot>1A234B5</lot>[tab]<sn>1234567890123456</sn></content>
Sample GS1 Output - Insert New Line (2) The output consists of multiple lines of characters with a new line character at the end of each line. <content dfi="IFA"> <ppn>111234567842</ppn> <lot>1A234B5</lot> <sn>1234567890123456</sn> </content>
97
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Sample GS1 Output - Insert Tab and New Line (3) The output consists of multiple lines of characters with tabs and a new line character at the end of each line. <content dfi="IFA"> [tab]<ppn>111234567842</ppn> [tab]<lot>1A234B5</lot> [tab]<sn>1234567890123456</sn> </content>
securPharm Output Formatting Barcodes
Scan a barcode below to format the securPharm output.
* No Formatting
(0)
Insert New Line (2)
Insert Tab (1)
Insert Tab and New Line (3)
98
Imager Preferences
Introduction
You can program the imager to perform various functions, or activate different features. This chapter describes image capture preference features and provides programming barcodes for selecting these features.
NOTE: Only the Symbol Native API (SNAPI) with Imaging interface supports image capture. See USB Device
Type on page 237 to enable this host.
The imager ships with the settings shown in Table 9 on page 100 (also see Parameter Defaults for all defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.
Setting Parameters
To set feature values, scan a single barcode or a short barcode sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the imager powers down.
NOTE: Most computer monitors allow scanning barcodes directly on the screen. When scanning from the
screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the barcode clearly, and bars and/or spaces do not merge.
To return all features to default values, scan the Set Factory Defaults on page 62. Throughout the programming
barcode menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
* Indicates default * Enable Parameter
(1)
Feature/option Option value
99
Imager Preferences
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to disable image capture illumination, scan the Disable Image Capture Illumination barcode under Image Capture Illumination on page 103. The imager issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry. Other parameters require scanning several barcodes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
Image Capture Preferences Parameter Defaults
Table 9 lists defaults for image capture preference parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
· Scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in
memory. To recall default parameter values, see Default Parameters on page 62.
· Configure the scanner using the 123Scan configuration program. See 123Scan and Software Tools.
NOTE: See Parameter Defaults for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default
parameters.
Table 9 Image Capture Preferences Parameter Defaults
Parameter
Parameter Number 1
SSI Number 2
Default
Page Number
Image Capture Preferences
Operational Modes
N/A
N/A
N/A
102
Image Capture Illumination
361
F0h 69h
Enable
103
Image Capture Autoexposure
360
F0h 68h
Enable
103
Fixed Exposure
567
F4h F1h 37h 100
104
Analog Gain
1232
F4h D0h
Analog Gain x 2
105
Digital Gain
1233
F4h D1h
32
105
Gain / Exposure Priority for Snapshot
562
F1h 32h
Autodetect
106
Mode
Snapshot Mode Timeout
323
F0h 43h
0 (30 seconds)
107
Snapshot Aiming Pattern
300
F0h 2Ch
Enable
108
Silence Operational Mode Changes
1293
F8h 05h 0Dh Disable (do not silence) 108
Image Cropping
301
F0h 2Dh
Disable
109
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
100
Imager Preferences
Table 9 Image Capture Preferences Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number 1
SSI Number 2
Default
Crop to Pixel Addresses
315
F4h F0h 3Bh 0 top
316
F4h F0h 3Ch 0 left
317
F4h F0h 3Dh 799 bottom
318
F4h F0h 3Eh 1279 right
Image Size (Number of Pixels)
302
F0h 2Eh
Full
Image Brightness (Target White)
390
F0h 86h
180
JPEG Image Options
299
F0h 2Bh
Quality
JPEG Quality Value
305
F0h 31h
65
JPEG Size Value
561
F1h 31h
160 kB
Image Enhancement
564
F1h 34h
Low (1)
Image File Format Selection
304
F0h 30h
JPEG
Image Rotation
665
F1h 99h
0
Bits per Pixel (BPP)
303
F0h 2Fh
8 BPP
Signature Capture
93
5Dh
Disable
Signature Capture Image File Format
313
Selection
F0h 39h
JPEG
Signature Capture Bits per Pixel (BPP) 314
F0h 3Ah
8 BPP
Signature Capture Width
366
F4h F0h 6Eh 400
Signature Capture Height
367
F4h F0h 6Fh 100
Signature Capture JPEG Quality
421
F0h A5h
65
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page Number 109
111 112 112 113 113 114 115 116 117 118 119
120 121 121 121
101
Imager Preferences
Image Capture Preferences
The parameters in this chapter control image capture characteristics.
Operational Modes
The imager has two modes of operation:
· Decode Mode · Snapshot Mode
Decode Mode
By default, when you press the trigger the imager attempts to locate and decode enabled barcodes within its field of view. The imager remains in this mode until it decodes a barcode or you release the trigger.
Snapshot Mode
Use Snapshot Mode to capture a high-quality image and transmit it to the host. Scan the Snapshot Mode barcode to temporarily enter this mode. While in this mode the imager blinks the green LED at one-second intervals to indicate it is not in standard operating (decode) mode. In Snapshot Mode, the imager turns on its aiming pattern to highlight the area to capture in the image. The next trigger press instructs the imager to capture a high quality image and transmit it to the host. A short time may pass (less than two seconds) between when the trigger is pressed and the image is captured as the imager adjusts to lighting conditions. Hold the imager steady until a single beep indicates that it captured the image. If you do not press the trigger within the Snapshot Mode Timeout period, the imager returns to Decode Mode. Use Snapshot Mode Timeout on page 107 to adjust this timeout period. The default timeout period is 30 seconds. To disable the aiming pattern during Snapshot Mode, see Snapshot Aiming Pattern on page 108.
Snapshot Mode
102
Imager Preferences
Image Capture Illumination Parameter # 361 SSI # F0h 69h
Scan Enable Image Capture Illumination to turn on illumination during every image capture. This usually results in superior images. The effectiveness of illumination decreases as the distance to the target increases. Scan Disable Image Capture Illumination to prevent the imager from using illumination.
* Enable Image Capture Illumination
(1)
Disable Image Capture Illumination (0)
Image Capture Autoexposure Parameter # 360 SSI # F0h 68h
Scan Enable Image Capture Autoexposure to allow the imager to control gain settings and exposure (integration) time to best capture an image for the selected operation mode. Scan Disable Image Capture Autoexposure to manually adjust the gain and exposure time (see the following pages). This option is only recommended for advanced users with difficult image capture situations.
* Enable Image Capture Autoexposure
(1)
Disable Image Capture Autoexposure (0)
103
Imager Preferences
Fixed Exposure Parameter # 567 SSI # F4h F1h 37h
Type: Word Range: 5 to 30,000 This parameter configures the exposure used in manual mode for Snapshot mode. Each integer value represents 100 s of exposure. The default value is 100 which results in an exposure setting of 10 ms. To set the exposure, scan the Fixed Exposure barcode, and then scan four numeric barcodes from Numeric Barcodes representing the value. Leading zeros are required. For example, to set a Fixed Exposure value of 99, scan 0, 0, 9, 9.
Fixed Exposure (4 digits)
104
Imager Preferences
Analog and Digital Gain
If you disable Image Capture Autoexposure you can modify the engine's analog and digital gain using these parameters. Total gain = analog gain x digital gain.
Analog Gain Parameter # 1232 SSI # F4h D0h
Select an option to set an analog gain value.
Analog Gain x 1 (00h)
* Analog Gain x 2 (01h)
Analog Gain x 4 (02h)
Analog Gain x 8 (03h)
Digital Gain Parameter # 1233 SSI # F4h D1h
To set the digital gain, scan the following barcode, then scan two barcodes from Numeric Barcodes to enter a 2-digit value for the digital gain. The default is 32. A value of 32 = x 1 digital gain; i.e., digital gain = 1/32 x digital gain parameter value.
Digital Gain
105
Imager Preferences
Gain/Exposure Priority for Snapshot Mode
Parameter # 562
SSI # F1h 32h
This parameter alters the imager's gain exposure priority when it acquires an image in Snapshot Mode while in autoexposure mode. Scan one of the following barcodes:
· Low Exposure Priority - The imager favors higher gain over exposure to capture an image, resulting in an
image that is less susceptible to motion blur at the expense of noise artifacts. However, for most applications, the amount of noise is acceptable.
· Low Gain Priority - The imager favors longer exposure time rather than higher gain to capture an image,
ensuring the image is less noisy and produces fewer artifacts during post processing activities like image enhancement (sharpening). This mode is recommended for fixed mount / fixed object image capture since the image acquired is susceptible to motion blur.
· Autodetect (default) - The imager automatically selects Gain Priority or Low Exposure Priority mode for
Snapshot Mode. If the imager is in a magnetic reed switch-enabled stand (or it is configured in Blink Mode), it uses Low Gain Priority. Otherwise, it uses the Low Exposure Priority.
Low Gain Priority (0)
* Autodetect
(2)
Low Exposure Priority (1)
106
Imager Preferences
Snapshot Mode Timeout Parameter # 323 SSI # F0h 43h
This parameter sets the amount of time the imager remains in Snapshot Mode. The imager exits Snapshot Mode when you press the trigger, or when the Snapshot Mode Timeout elapses. To set this timeout value, scan the Set Snapshot Mode Timeout barcode, and then scan a barcode from Numeric Barcodes. The default value is 0 which represents 30 seconds; values increment by 30. For example, 0 = 30 seconds, 1 = 60 seconds, 2 = 90 seconds, etc. The maximum timeout value that can be set on the scanner is 9 = 300 seconds. To quickly re-set the default timeout to 30 seconds, scan the 30 Seconds barcode. If you scan No Timeout, the imager remains in Snapshot Mode until you press the trigger.
Set Snapshot Mode Timeout No Timeout
* 30 Seconds
107
Imager Preferences
Snapshot Aiming Pattern Parameter # 300 SSI # F0h 2Ch
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether or not to project the aiming pattern when in Snapshot Mode.
NOTE: If enabled, the aiming pattern frames the image for aiming purposes and does not appear in the
captured image.
* Enable Snapshot Aiming Pattern
(1)
Disable Snapshot Aiming Pattern (0)
Silence Operational Mode Changes Parameter # 1293 SSI # F8h 05h 0Dh
Scan Silence Operational Mode Changes to silence the beeper when switching between operational modes (e.g., from Decode Mode to Snapshot Mode).
Silence Operational Mode Changes (Enable) (1)
* Do Not Silence Operational Mode Changes (Disable)
(0)
108
Imager Preferences
Image Cropping Parameter # 301 SSI # F0h 2Dh
Scan the Enable Image Cropping barcode to crop a captured image to the pixel addresses set in Crop to Pixel Addresses on page 109. Scan Disable Image Cropping to present the full 1280 x 800 pixels.
Enable Image Cropping (1)
Crop to Pixel Addresses
Parameter # 315 SSI # F4h F0h 3Bh (Top)
Parameter # 316 SSI # F4h F0h 3Ch (Left)
Parameter # 317 SSI # F4h F0h 3Dh (Bottom)
Parameter # 318 SSI # F4h F0h 3Eh (Right)
* Disable Image Cropping
(Use Full 1280 x 800 Pixels)
(0)
NOTE: The imager has a cropping resolution of 4 pixels. Setting the cropping area to less than 4 pixels (after
resolution adjustment, see Image Size (Number of Pixels) on page 111) transfers the entire image.
If you enabled Image Cropping, set the pixel addresses from (0,0) to (1279 x 799) to crop to.
Columns are numbered from 0 to 1279, rows from 0 to 799. Specify values for Top, Left, Bottom, and Right, where Top and Bottom correspond to row pixel addresses, and Left and Right correspond to column pixel addresses. For example, for a 4 row x 8 column image in the extreme bottom-right section of the image, set the following values:
Top = 796, Bottom = 799, Left = 1272, Right = 1279
To set the pixel addresses, scan each of the following barcodes, and then scan four numeric barcodes from Numeric Barcodes representing the value. Leading zeros are required. For example, to crop the top pixel address to 3, scan 0, 0, 0, 3. The defaults are:
Top = 0, Bottom = 799, Left = 0, Right = 1279
109
Imager Preferences
Crop to Pixel Address (continued)
Top Pixel Address (0 - 799 Decimal)
Bottom Pixel Address (0 - 799 Decimal)
Left Pixel Address (0 - 1279 Decimal)
Right Pixel Address (0 - 1279 Decimal)
110
Imager Preferences
Image Size (Number of Pixels)
Parameter # 302
SSI # F0h 2Eh
This option alters image resolution before compression. Multiple pixels are combined to one pixel, resulting in a smaller image containing the original content with reduced resolution.
Scan a barcode below to select an image size.
Table 10 Image Size
Resolution Value
Uncropped Image Size
Full
1280 x 800
1/2
640 x 400
1/4
320 x 200
* Full Resolution
(0)
1/4 Resolution (3)
1/2 Resolution (1)
111
Imager Preferences
Image Brightness (Target White) Parameter # 390 SSI # F0h 86h
Type: Byte Range: 1 - 240 This parameter sets the Target White value used in Snapshot mode when using autoexposure. White and black are defined as 240 decimal and 1, respectively. Setting the value to the factory default of 180 sets the white level of the image to ~180. Scan the Image Brightness barcode, and then scan three numeric barcodes from Numeric Barcodes representing the value. Leading zeros are required. For example, to set an Image Brightness value of 99, scan 0, 9, 9.
* 180
Image Brightness (3 digits)
JPEG Image Options Parameter # 299 SSI # F0h 2Bh
Scan one of the following barcodes to optimize JPEG images for either size or quality:
· JPEG Quality Selector - Enter a quality value via the JPEG Quality Value parameter; the imager then
selects the corresponding image size.
· JPEG Size Selector - Enter a size value via the JPEG Size Value parameter; the imager then selects the
best image quality.
* JPEG Quality Selector
(1)
JPEG Size Selector (0)
112
Imager Preferences
JPEG Quality Value Parameter # 305 SSI # F0h 31h
If you selected JPEG Quality Selector, scan the JPEG Quality Value barcode, and then scan three barcodes from Numeric Barcodes corresponding to a value from 5 to 100, where 100 represents the highest quality image. Leading zeros are required. For example, to set an image quality value of 55, scan 0, 5, 5.
JPEG Quality Value (Default: 065)
(5 - 100 Decimal)
JPEG Size Value Parameter # 561 SSI # F1h 31h
Type: Word Range: 5-350 If you selected JPEG Size Selector, scan the JPEG Size Value barcode, and then scan three numeric barcodes from Numeric Barcodes representing the target JPEG file size in kilobytes (KB). Leading zeros are required. For example, to set an image file size value of 99, scan 0, 9, 9.
CAUTION:JPEG compression may take 10 to 15 seconds based on the amount of information in the target
image. Scanning JPEG Quality Selector (default setting) on page 112 produces a compressed image that is consistent in quality and compression time.
113
JPEG Size Value (Default: 160) (3 digits)
Imager Preferences
Image Enhancement Parameter # 564 SSI # F1h 34h
This parameter uses a combination of edge sharpening and contrast enhancement to produce an image that is visually pleasing. Scan one of the following barcodes to select the level of image enhancement:
· Off (0) · Low (1) - Default · Medium (2) · High (3)
Off (0)
Medium (2)
* Low
(1)
High (3)
114
Imager Preferences
Image File Format Selector Parameter # 304 SSI # F0h 30h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select an image format appropriate for the system (BMP, TIFF, or JPEG). The imager stores captured images in the selected format.
BMP File Format (3)
TIFF File Format (04h)
* JPEG File Format
(1)
115
Imager Preferences
Image Rotation Parameter # 665 SSI # F1h 99h
Scan one of the following barcodes to rotate the image 0, 90,180, or 270 degrees.
* Rotate 0o
(0)
Rotate 180o (2)
Rotate 90o (1)
Rotate 270o (3)
116
Imager Preferences
Bits Per Pixel Parameter # 303 SSI # F0h 2Fh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the number of significant bits per pixel (BPP) to use when capturing an image:
· 1 BPP - For a black and white image. · 4 BPP - Assigns 1 of 16 levels of grey to each pixel. · 8 BPP - Assigns 1 of 256 levels of grey to each pixel.
NOTE: The imager ignores these settings for JPEG file formats, which only support 8 BPP.
TIFF file formats only support 4 BPP and 8 BPP. Selecting 1 BPP for TIFF applies the 4 BPP option.
1 BPP (0)
* 8 BPP
(2)
4 BPP (1)
117
Imager Preferences
Signature Capture Parameter # 93 SSI # 5Dh
A signature capture barcode is a special-purpose symbology which delineates a signature capture area in a document with a machine-readable format. The recognition pattern is variable so it can optionally provide an index to various signatures. The region inside the barcode pattern is considered the signature capture area. See Signature Capture for more information.
Output File Format
Decoding a signature capture barcode de-skews the signature image and converts the image to a BMP, JPEG, or TIFF file format. The output data includes the file descriptor followed by the formatted signature image.
Table 11 Output File Format
File Descriptor
Output Format (1 byte)
Signature Type (1 byte)
Signature Image Size (4 bytes)
(BIG Endian)
Signature Image
JPEG - 1
1-8
BMP - 3
TIFF - 4
0x00000400
0x00010203....
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Signature Capture.
Enable Signature Capture (1)
* Disable Signature Capture
(0)
118
Imager Preferences
Signature Capture File Format Selector Parameter # 313 SSI # F0h 39h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a signature file format appropriate for the system (BMP, TIFF, or JPEG). The imager stores captured signatures in the selected format.
BMP Signature Format (3)
TIFF Signature Format (4)
* JPEG Signature Format
(1)
119
Imager Preferences
Signature Capture Bits Per Pixel Parameter # 314 SSI # F0h 3Ah
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the number of significant bits per pixel (BPP) to use when capturing a signature:
· 1 BPP - For a black and white image. · 4 BPP - Assigns 1 of 16 levels of grey to each pixel. · 8 BPP - Assigns 1 of 256 levels of grey to each pixel.
NOTE: The imager ignores these settings for JPEG file formats, which only support 8 BPP.
1 BPP (0)
* 8 BPP
(2)
4 BPP (1)
120
Imager Preferences
Signature Capture Width Parameter # 366 SSI # F4h F0h 6Eh
The aspect ratio of the Signature Capture Width and Signature Capture Height parameters must match that of the signature capture area. For example, a 4 x 1 inch signature capture area requires a 4 to 1 aspect ratio of width to height. To set the width of the signature capture box, scan the Signature Capture Width barcode, and then scan four barcodes from Numeric Barcodes corresponding to a value in the range of 16 to 1280 decimal.
Signature Capture Width (Default: 400) (16 - 1280 Decimal)
Signature Capture Height Parameter # 367 SSI # F4h F0h 6Fh
To set the height of the signature capture box, scan the Signature Capture Height barcode, and then scan three barcodes from Numeric Barcodes corresponding to a value in the range of 16 to 960 decimal.
Signature Capture Height (Default: 100) (16 - 960 Decimal)
Signature Capture JPEG Quality Parameter # 421 SSI # F0h A5h
Scan the JPEG Quality Value barcode, and then scan three barcodes from Numeric Barcodes corresponding to a value from 005 to 100, where 100 represents the highest quality image.
JPEG Quality Value (Default: 065) (5 - 100 Decimal)
121
Imager Preferences 122
Symbologies
Introduction
You can program the scanner to perform various functions, or activate different features. This chapter describes symbology features and provides programming barcodes for selecting these features. The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 12 on page 124 (also see Parameter Defaults for all defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.
Setting Parameters
To set feature values, scan a single barcode or a short barcode sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the scanner powers down.
NOTE: Most computer monitors allow scanning barcodes directly on the screen. When scanning from the
screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the barcode clearly, and bars and/or spaces do not merge.
If not using a USB cable, select a host type (see each host chapter for specific host information) after the power-up beeps sound. This is only necessary upon the first power-up when connected to a new host. To return all features to default values, see Default Parameters on page 62. Throughout the programming barcode
menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
* Indicates default * Enable Parameter
Feature/option
123
Symbologies
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases, scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to transmit barcode data without the UPC-A check digit, scan the Do Not Transmit UPC-A Check Digit barcode under Transmit UPC-A Check Digit on page 142. The scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.
Other parameters require scanning several barcodes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
Symbology Parameter Defaults
Table 12 lists defaults for all symbology parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
· Scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in
memory. To recall the default parameter values, see Default Parameters on page 62.
· Configure the scanner using the 123Scan configuration program. See 123Scan and Software Tools.
NOTE: See Parameter Defaults for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default
parameters.
Table 12 Symbology Parameter Defaults Parameter
Enable/Disable All Code Types
Parameter Number 1
SSI Number 2
Default
1D Symbologies
UPC/EAN/JAN
UPC-A
1
01h
Enable
UPC-E
2
02h
Enable
UPC-E1
12
0Ch
Disable
EAN-8/JAN 8
4
04h
Enable
EAN-13/JAN 13
3
03h
Enable
Bookland EAN
83
53h
Disable
Bookland ISBN Format
576
F1h 40h
ISBN-10
ISSN EAN
617
F1h 69h
Disable
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals
16
10h
Ignore
(2 and 5 digits)
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page Number 131
131 132 132 133 133 134 135 136 137
124
Symbologies
Table 12 Symbology Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number 1
SSI Number 2
Default
User-Programmable Supplementals
Supplemental 1:
579
Supplemental 2:
580
000 F1h 43h F1h 44h
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy 80
50h
10
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental
672
AIM ID
F1h A0h
Combined
Transmit UPC-A Check Digit
40
28h
Enable
Transmit UPC-E Check Digit
41
29h
Enable
Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit
42
2Ah
Enable
UPC-A Preamble
34
22h
System Character
UPC-E Preamble
35
23h
System Character
UPC-E1 Preamble
36
24h
System Character
Convert UPC-E to UPC-A
37
25h
Disable
Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A
38
26h
Disable
EAN/JAN Zero Extend
39
27h
Disable
UCC Coupon Extended Code
85
55h
Disable
Coupon Report
730
F1h DAh
New Coupon
Format
UPC Reduced Quiet Zone
1289
F8h 05h 09h Disable
Code 128
Code 128
8
08h
Enable
Set Length(s) for Code 128
209, 210
D1h, D2h
Any Length
GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128)
14
0Eh
Enable
ISBT 128
84
54h
Enable
ISBT Concatenation
577
F1h 41h
Disable
Check ISBT Table
578
F1h 42h
Enable
ISBT Concatenation Redundancy
223
DFh
10
Code 128 <FNC4>
1254
F8h 04h E6h Honor
Code 128 Security Level
751
F1h EFh
Security Level 1
Code 128 Reduced Quiet Zone
1208
F8h 04h B8h Disable
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page Number 140
140 141
142 142 143 144 145 146 147 147 148 148 149
150
150 151 152 153 153 154 155 155 156 157
125
Symbologies
Table 12 Symbology Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number 1
Code 39
Code 39
0
Trioptic Code 39
13
Convert Code 39 to Code 32
86
(Italian Pharmacy Code)
Code 32 Prefix
231
Set Length(s) for Code 39
18, 19
Code 39 Check Digit Verification
48
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit
43
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion
17
Code 39 Security Level
750
Code 39 Reduced Quiet Zone
1209
Code 93
Code 93
9
Set Length(s) for Code 93
26, 27
Code 11
Code 11
10
Set Lengths for Code 11
28, 29
Code 11 Check Digit Verification
52
Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s)
47
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
6
Set Lengths for I 2 of 5
22, 23
I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification
49
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit
44
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN 13
82
Febraban
1750
SSI Number 2
Default
00h
Enable
0Dh
Disable
56h
Disable
E7h 12h, 13h 30h 2Bh 11h F1h EEh F8h 04h B9h
Disable 1 to 55 Disable Disable Disable Security Level 1 Disable
09h 1Ah, 1Bh
Enable 1 to 55
0Ah 1Ch, 1Dh 34h 2Fh
Disable 4 to 55 Disable Disable
06h 16h, 17h 31h 2Ch 52h F8h 06h D6h
Enable 6 to 55 Disable Disable Disable Disable
I 2 of 5 Security Level
1121
F8h 04h 61h Security Level 1
I 2 of 5 Reduced Quiet Zone
1210
F8h 04h BAh Disable
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page Number
157 158 158
159 159 161 161 162 163 164
164 165
167 167 169 170
170 171 172 173 173 174 175 176
126
Symbologies
Table 12 Symbology Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number 1
SSI Number 2
Default
Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF)
Discrete 2 of 5
5
05h
Disable
Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5
20, 21
14h 15h
1 to 55
Codabar (NW - 7)
Codabar
7
07h
Enable
Set Lengths for Codabar
24, 25
18h, 19h
4 to 55
CLSI Editing
54
36h
Disable
NOTIS Editing
55
37h
Disable
Codabar Security Level
1776
F8h 06h F0h Security Level 1
Codabar Upper or Lower Case Start/
855
Stop Characters Detection
F2h 57h
Upper Case
Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit Verification 1784
F8h 06h F8h Disable
Transmit Codabar Check Digit
704
F1h C0h
Disable
MSI
MSI
11
0Bh
Disable
Set Length(s) for MSI
30, 31
1Eh, 1Fh
4 to 55
MSI Check Digits
50
32h
One MSI Check
Digit
Transmit MSI Check Digit
46
2Eh
Disable
MSI Check Digit Algorithm
51
33h
Mod 10/Mod 10
MSI Reduced Quiet Zone
1392
F8h 05h 70h Disable
Chinese 2 of 5
Chinese 2 of 5
408
F0h 98h
Disable
Matrix 2 of 5
Matrix 2 of 5
618
F1h 6Ah
Disable
Matrix 2 of 5 Lengths
619
F1h 6Bh
4 to 55
620
F1h 6Ch
Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit
622
F1h 6Eh
Disable
Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit
623
F1h 6Fh
Disable
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page Number
176 177
179 179 181 181 182 183
183 184
184 185 187
187 189 189
190
190 191
193 193
127
Symbologies
Table 12 Symbology Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number 1
SSI Number 2
Default
Korean 3 of 5
Korean 3 of 5
581
F1h 45h
Disable
Inverse 1D
Inverse 1D
586
F1h 4Ah
Regular
GS1 DataBar
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly
338
GS1 DataBar-14), GS1 DataBar Truncated,
GS1 DataBar Stacked, GS1 DataBar
Stacked Omnidirectional
F0h 52h
Enable
GS1 DataBar Limited
339
F0h 53h
Enable
GS1 DataBar Expanded, GS1 DataBar
340
Expanded Stacked
F0h 54h
Enable
Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN/JAN
397
F0h 8Dh
Disable
GS1 DataBar Security Level
1706
F8h 06h AAh Level 1
GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check
728
F1h D8h
Level 3
Symbology-Specific Security Features
Redundancy Level
78
4Eh
1
Security Level
77
4Dh
1
1D Quiet Zone Level
1288
F8h 05h 08h 1
Intercharacter Gap Size
381
F0h 7Dh
Normal
Composite Codes
Composite CC-C
341
F0h 55h
Disable
Composite CC-A/B
342
F0h 56h
Disable
Composite TLC-39
371
F0h 73h
Disable
Composite Inverse
1113
F8h 04h 59h Regular Only
UPC Composite Mode
344
F0h 58h
UPC Never Linked
Composite Beep Mode
398
F0h 8Eh
Beep As Each
Code Type is
Decoded
GS1-128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN
427
Composite Codes
F0h ABh
Disable
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page Number
194
194
196
197 197 198 199 200
201 203 204 205
205 206 206 206 208 209
209
128
Symbologies
Table 12 Symbology Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number 1
2D Symbologies
PDF417
15
MicroPDF417
227
Code 128 Emulation
123
Data Matrix
292
SSI Number 2
Default
0Fh E3h 7Bh F0h 24h
Enable Disable Disable Enable
GS1 Data Matrix
1336
F8h 05h 38h Disable
Data Matrix Inverse
588
F1h 4Ch
Inverse Autodetect
Decode Data Matrix Mirror Images
537
F1h 19h
Auto
Maxicode
294
F0h 26h
Disable
QR Code GS1 QR MicroQR Linked QR Mode
293 1343 573 1847
F0h 25h F8h 05h 3Fh F1h 3Dh 737h
Enable Enable Enable Linked QR Only
Aztec
574
F1h 3Eh
Enable
Aztec Inverse
589
F1h 4Dh
Inverse Autodetect
Han Xin
1167
F8h 04h 8Fh Disable
Han Xin Inverse
1168
F8h 04h 90h Regular
Grid Matrix
1718
F8h 06h B6h Disable
Grid Matrix Inverse Grid Matrix Mirror DotCode
1719 1736 1906
F8h 06h B7h F8h 06h C8h F8 07 72h
Regular Only Regular Only Disable
DotCode Inverse
1907
F8 07 73h
Inverse Autodetect
DotCode Mirrored
1908
F8 07 74h
Autodetect
DotCode Prioritize
1937
F8 07 91h
Enable
Macro PDF
Flush Macro PDF Buffer
N/A
N/A
N/A
Abort Macro PDF Entry
N/A
N/A
N/A
Postal Codes
US Postnet
89
59h
Disable
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page Number
210 210 211 212 212 213 214 215 215 216 216 217 218 218 219 219 220 220 221 222 223 224 225
226 226
226
129
Symbologies
Table 12 Symbology Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number 1
SSI Number 2
Default
US Planet
90
5Ah
Disable
Transmit US Postal Check Digit
95
5Fh
Enable
UK Postal
91
5Bh
Disable
Transmit UK Postal Check Digit
96
60h
Enable
Japan Postal
290
F0h 22h
Disable
Australia Post
291
F0h 23h
Disable
Australia Post Format
718
F1h CEh
Autodiscriminate
Netherlands KIX Code
326
F0h 46h
Disable
USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail
592
F1h 50h
Disable
UPU FICS Postal
611
F1h 63h
Disable
Mailmark
1337
F8h 05h 39h Disable
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page Number 227 227 228 228 229 229 230 231 231 232 232
130
Symbologies
Enable/Disable All Code Types
Scan the Disable All Code Types barcode to disable all symbologies. This is useful when enabling only a few code types. Scan Enable All Code Types to enable all symbologies. This is useful if you need to disable only a few code types.
Disable All Code Types
Enable All Code Types
UPC/EAN/JAN
UPC-A Parameter # 1 SSI # 01h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable UPC-A.
* Enable UPC-A
(1)
Disable UPC-A (0)
131
Symbologies
UPC-E Parameter # 2 SSI # 02h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable UPC-E.
* Enable UPC-E
(1)
UPC-E1 Parameter # 12 SSI # 0Ch
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable UPC-E1.
Disable UPC-E (0)
NOTE: UPC-E1 is not a UCC (Uniform Code Council) approved symbology.
Enable UPC-E1 (1)
* Disable UPC-E1
(0)
132
Symbologies
EAN-8/JAN-8 Parameter # 4 SSI # 04h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable EAN-8/JAN-8.
* Enable EAN-8/JAN-8
(1)
Disable EAN-8/JAN-8 (0)
EAN-13/JAN-13 Parameter # 3 SSI # 03h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable EAN-13/JAN-13.
* Enable EAN-13/JAN-13
(1)
Disable EAN-13/JAN-13 (0)
133
Symbologies
Bookland EAN Parameter # 83 SSI # 53h
NOTE: If you enable Bookland EAN, select a Bookland ISBN Format. Also set Decode UPC/EAN/JAN
Supplementals on page 137 to either Decode UPC/EAN/JAN with Supplementals Only, Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN With Supplementals, or Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode. Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Bookland EAN.
Enable Bookland EAN (1)
* Disable Bookland EAN
(0)
134
Symbologies
Bookland ISBN Format Parameter # 576 SSI # F1h 40h
NOTE:
For Bookland EAN to function properly, first enable Bookland EAN using Bookland EAN on page 134, and then set Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals on page 137 to either Decode UPC/EAN/JAN with Supplementals Only, Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN With Supplementals, or Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode.
If you enabled Bookland EAN using Bookland EAN on page 134, select one of the following formats for Bookland data:
· Bookland ISBN-10 - The scanner reports Bookland data starting with 978 in traditional 10-digit format with
the special Bookland check digit for backward-compatibility. Data starting with 979 is not considered Bookland in this mode.
· Bookland ISBN-13 - The scanner reports Bookland data (starting with either 978 or 979) as EAN-13 in
13-digit format to meet the 2007 ISBN-13 protocol.
* Bookland ISBN-10
(0)
Bookland ISBN-13 (1)
135
Symbologies
ISSN EAN Parameter # 617 SSI # F1h 69h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable ISSN EAN.
Enable ISSN EAN (1)
* Disable ISSN EAN
(0)
136
Symbologies
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals Parameter # 16
SSI # 10h
Supplementals are barcodes appended according to specific format conventions (e.g., UPC A+2, UPC E+2, EAN 13+2). The following options are available:
· Decode UPC/EAN/JAN with Supplementals Only - The scanner only decodes UPC/EAN/JAN symbols
with supplemental characters, and ignores symbols without supplementals.
· Ignore UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals - When presented with a UPC/EAN/JAN plus supplemental
symbol, the scanner decodes UPC/EAN/JAN and ignores the supplemental characters.
· Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN with Supplementals - The scanner decodes UPC/EAN/JAN symbols
with supplemental characters immediately. If the symbol does not have a supplemental, the scanner must decode the barcode the number of times set via UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 140 before transmitting its data to confirm that there is no supplemental.
Select one of the following Supplemental Mode options to immediately transmit EAN-13 barcodes starting with that prefix that have supplemental characters. If the symbol does not have a supplemental, the scanner must decode the barcode the number of times set via UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 140 before transmitting the data to confirm that there is no supplemental. The scanner transmits UPC/EAN/JAN barcodes that do not have that prefix immediately.
· Enable 378/379 Supplemental Mode · Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode
NOTE: If you select 978/979 Supplemental Mode and are scanning Bookland EAN barcodes, see
Bookland EAN on page 134 to enable Bookland EAN, and select a format using Bookland ISBN Format on page 135.
· Enable 977 Supplemental Mode · Enable 414/419/434/439 Supplemental Mode · Enable 491 Supplemental Mode · Enable Smart Supplemental Mode - This applies to EAN-13 barcodes starting with any prefix listed
previously.
· Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 - This applies to EAN-13 barcodes starting with a 3-digit
user-defined prefix. Set this using User-Programmable Supplementals on page 140.
· Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 and 2 - This applies to EAN-13 barcodes starting with either
of two 3-digit user-defined prefixes. Set the prefixes using User-Programmable Supplementals on page 140.
· Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 - This applies to EAN-13 barcodes starting with any
prefix listed previously or the prefix set using User-Programmable Supplementals on page 140.
· Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 and 2 - This applies to EAN-13 barcodes starting with
any prefix listed previously or one of the two user-defined prefixes set using User-Programmable Supplementals on page 140.
137
Symbologies
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (continued)
NOTE: To minimize the risk of invalid data transmission, select either to decode or ignore supplemental
characters.
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN With Supplementals Only (1)
* Ignore UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals
(0)
Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN with Supplementals (2)
Enable 378/379 Supplemental Mode (4)
Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode (5)
Enable 977 Supplemental Mode (7)
138
Symbologies
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (continued)
Enable 414/419/434/439 Supplemental Mode (6)
Enable 491 Supplemental Mode (8)
Enable Smart Supplemental Mode (3)
Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 (9)
Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 and 2 (10)
Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 (11)
Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 and 2 (12)
139
Symbologies
User-Programmable Supplementals Supplemental 1: Parameter # 579 SSI # F1h 43h Supplemental 2: Parameter # 580 SSI # F1h 44h
If you selected a Supplemental User-Programmable option from Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals on page 137, scan User-Programmable Supplemental 1, and then scan three barcodes from Numeric Barcodes to set the 3-digit prefix. To set a second 3-digit prefix, scan User-Programmable Supplemental 2, and then scan three barcodes from Numeric Barcodes. The default is 000 (zeroes).
User-Programmable Supplemental 1
User-Programmable Supplemental 2
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy Parameter # 80 SSI # 50h
If you selected Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals, this option adjusts the number of times to decode a symbol without supplementals before transmission. The range is from two to thirty times. Five or above is recommended when decoding a mix of UPC/EAN/JAN symbols with and without supplementals. The default is 10. Scan the barcode below to set a decode redundancy value. Next, scan two numeric barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. To correct an error or change a selection, scan Cancel on page 431.
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy
140
Symbologies
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental AIM ID Format Parameter # 672 SSI # F1h A0h
If Transmit Code ID Character on page 88 is set to AIM Code ID Character, scan one of the following barcodes to select an output format when reporting UPC/EAN/JAN barcodes with supplementals:
· Separate - Transmit UPC/EAN/JAN with supplementals with separate AIM IDs but one transmission, i.e.,
]E<0 or 4><data>]E<1 or 2>[supplemental data]
· Combined Transmit UPC/EAN/JAN with supplementals with one AIM ID and one transmission, i.e.,
]E3<data+supplemental data>
· Separate Transmissions - Transmit UPC/EAN/JAN with supplementals with separate AIM IDs and separate
transmissions, i.e., ]E<0 or 4><data> ]E<1 or 2>[supplemental data]
Separate (0)
Separate Transmissions (2)
* Combined
(1)
141
Symbologies
Transmit UPC-A Check Digit Parameter # 40 SSI # 28h
The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan one of the following barcodes to transmit the barcode data with or without the UPC-A check digit. It is always verified to guarantee the integrity of the data.
* Transmit UPC-A Check Digit
(1)
Do Not Transmit UPC-A Check Digit (0)
Transmit UPC-E Check Digit Parameter # 41 SSI # 29h
The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan one of the following barcodes to transmit the barcode data with or without the UPC-E check digit. It is always verified to guarantee the integrity of the data.
* Transmit UPC-E Check Digit
(1)
Do Not Transmit UPC-E Check Digit (0)
142
Symbologies
Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit Parameter # 42 SSI # 2Ah
The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan one of the following barcodes to transmit the barcode data with or without the UPC-E1 check digit. It is always verified to guarantee the integrity of the data.
* Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit
(1)
Do Not Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit (0)
143
Symbologies
UPC-A Preamble Parameter # 34 SSI # 22h
Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol, and include Country Code and System Character. Select the appropriate option for transmitting a UPC-A preamble to match the host system:
· Transmit System Character only · Transmit System Character and Country Code ("0" for USA) · Transmit no preamble.
No Preamble (<DATA>) (0)
* System Character
(<SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(1)
System Character & Country Code (< COUNTRY CODE> <SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(2)
144
Symbologies
UPC-E Preamble Parameter # 35 SSI # 23h
Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol, and include Country Code and System Character. Select the appropriate option for transmitting a UPC-E preamble to match the host system:
· Transmit System Character only · Transmit System Character and Country Code ("0" for USA) · Transmit no preamble.
No Preamble (<DATA>) (0)
* System Character
(<SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(1)
System Character & Country Code (< COUNTRY CODE> <SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(2)
145
Symbologies
UPC-E1 Preamble Parameter # 36 SSI # 24h
Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol, and include Country Code and System Character. Select the appropriate option for transmitting a UPC-E1 preamble to match the host system:
· Transmit System Character only · Transmit System Character and Country Code ("0" for USA) · Transmit no preamble.
No Preamble (<DATA>) (0)
* System Character (<SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(1)
System Character & Country Code (< COUNTRY CODE> <SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(2)
146
Symbologies
Convert UPC-E to UPC-A Parameter # 37 SSI # 25h
Enable this to convert UPC-E (zero suppressed) decoded data to UPC-A format before transmission. After conversion, the data follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A programming selections (e.g., Preamble, Check Digit). Disable this to transmit UPC-E decoded data as UPC-E data, without conversion.
Convert UPC-E to UPC-A (Enable) (1)
* Do Not Convert UPC-E to UPC-A (Disable)
(0)
Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A Parameter # 38 SSI # 26h
Scan Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A (Enable) to convert UPC-E1 decoded data to UPC-A format before transmission. After conversion, the data follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A programming selections (e.g., Preamble, Check Digit). Scan Do Not Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A (Disable) to transmit UPC-E1 decoded data as UPC-E1 data, without conversion.
Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A (Enable) (1)
* Do Not Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A (Disable)
(0)
147
Symbologies
EAN/JAN Zero Extend Parameter # 39 SSI # 27h
Scan Enable EAN/JAN Zero Extend to add five leading zeros to decoded EAN-8 symbols to make them compatible in length to EAN-13 symbols. Scan Disable EAN/JAN Zero Extend to transmit EAN-8 symbols as is.
Enable EAN/JAN Zero Extend (1)
* Disable EAN/JAN Zero Extend
(0)
UCC Coupon Extended Code Parameter # 85 SSI # 55h
Scan Enable UCC Coupon Extended Code to decode UPC-A barcodes starting with digit `5', EAN-13 barcodes starting with digit `99', and UPC-A/GS1-128 coupon codes. UPC-A, EAN-13, and GS1-128 must be enabled to use this feature.
NOTE: See UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 140 to control autodiscrimination of the
GS1-128 portion (right half) of a coupon code.
Enable UCC Coupon Extended Code (1)
* Disable UCC Coupon Extended Code
(0)
148
Symbologies
Coupon Report Parameter # 730 SSI # F1h DAh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the type of coupon format to support.
· Old Coupon Format - Support UPC-A/GS1-128 and EAN-13/GS1-128. · New Coupon Format - An interim format to support UPC-A/GS1-DataBar and EAN-13/GS1-DataBar. · Autodiscriminate Format - Support both Old Coupon Format and New Coupon Format.
Old Coupon Format (0)
Autodiscriminate Coupon Format (2)
* New Coupon Format
(1)
149
Symbologies
UPC Reduced Quiet Zone Parameter # 1289 SSI # F8h 05h 09h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable decoding UPC barcodes with reduced quiet zones (the margins on either side of the barcode). If you select Enable, select a 1D Quiet Zone Level on page 204.
Enable UPC Reduced Quiet Zone (1)
* Disable UPC Reduced Quiet Zone
(0)
Code 128
Parameter # 8 SSI # 08h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Code 128.
* Enable Code 128
(1)
Disable Code 128 (0)
150
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Code 128 L1 = Parameter # 209 SSI # D1h L2 = Parameter # 210 SSI # D2h
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Code 128 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. The default Any Length.
NOTE: When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a length option:
· One Discrete Length - Decode only Code 128 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length
using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only Code 128 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 128 - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 431.
· Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only Code 128 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select
lengths using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only Code 128 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan Code 128 - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 431.
· Length Within Range - Decode Code 128 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using
the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode Code 128 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, scan Code 128 - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 431.
· Any Length - Decode Code 128 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner's
capability.
151
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Code 128 (continued)
Code 128 - One Discrete Length
Code 128 - Two Discrete Lengths
Code 128 - Length Within Range
* Code 128 - Any Length
GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128) Parameter # 14 SSI # 0Eh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable GS1-128.
* Enable GS1-128
(1)
Disable GS1-128 (0)
152
Symbologies
ISBT 128 Parameter # 84 SSI # 54h
ISBT 128 is a variant of Code 128 used in the blood bank industry. Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable ISBT 128.
* Enable ISBT 128
(1)
Disable ISBT 128 (0)
ISBT Concatenation Parameter # 577 SSI # F1h 41h
Select an option for concatenating pairs of ISBT code types:
· Enable ISBT Concatenation - There must be two ISBT codes in order for the scanner to decode and
perform concatenation. The scanner does not decode single ISBT symbols.
· Disable ISBT Concatenation - The scanner does not concatenate pairs of ISBT codes it
encounters. This is the default.
· Autodiscriminate ISBT Concatenation - The scanner decodes and concatenates pairs of ISBT codes
immediately. If only a single ISBT symbol is present, the scanner must decode the symbol the number of times set via ISBT Concatenation Redundancy on page 155 before transmitting its data to confirm that there is no additional ISBT symbol.
NOTE: When enabling ISBT Concatenation or Autodiscriminate ISBT Concatenation set Code 128 security
level to Level 2.
153
Symbologies
ISBT Concatenation (continued)
Enable ISBT Concatenation (1)
* Disable ISBT Concatenation
(0)
Autodiscriminate ISBT Concatenation (2)
Check ISBT Table Parameter # 578
SSI # F1h 42h
The ISBT specification includes a table that lists several types of ISBT barcodes that are commonly used in pairs. If you set ISBT Concatenation to Enable, enable Check ISBT Table to concatenate only those pairs found in this table. Other types of ISBT codes are not concatenated.
* Enable Check ISBT Table
(1)
Disable Check ISBT Table (0)
154
Symbologies
ISBT Concatenation Redundancy Parameter # 223 SSI # DFh
If you set ISBT Concatenation to Autodiscriminate, use this parameter to set the number of times the scanner must decode an ISBT symbol before determining that there is no additional symbol. Scan the following barcode, and then scan barcodes in Numeric Barcodes to set a value between 2 and 20. Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. To correct an error or change a selection, scan Cancel on page 431. The default is 10.
ISBT Concatenation Redundancy
Code 128 <FNC4> Parameter # 1254 SSI # F8h 04h E6h
This feature applies to Code 128 barcodes with an embedded <FNC4> character. Select Ignore Code 128 <FNC4> to strip the <FNC4> character from the decode data. The remaining characters are sent to the host unchanged. When disabled, the <FNC4> character is processed normally as per Code 128 standard.
* Honor Code 128 <FNC4>
(0)
Ignore Code 128 <FNC4> (1)
155
Symbologies
Code 128 Security Level
Parameter # 751
SSI # F1h EFh
Code 128 barcodes are vulnerable to misdecodes, particularly when Code 128 Lengths is set to Any Length. The scanner offers four levels of decode security for Code 128 barcodes. There is an inverse relationship between security and scanner aggressiveness. Increasing the level of security can reduce scanning aggressiveness, so select only the level of security necessary.
· Code 128 Security Level 0 - The scanner operates in its most aggressive state, while providing sufficient
security in decoding most in-spec barcodes.
· Code 128 Security Level 1 - This option eliminates most misdecodes while maintaining reasonable
aggressiveness. This is the default.
· Code 128 Security Level 2 - This option applies greater barcode security requirements if Security Level
1 fails to eliminate misdecodes.
· Code 128 Security Level 3 - If you selected Security Level 2, and misdecodes still occur, select this
security level to apply the highest safety requirements.
NOTE: Selecting this option is an extreme measure against mis-decoding severely out-of-spec barcodes,
and significantly impairs the decoding ability of the scanner. If this level of security is required, try to improve the quality of the barcodes.
Code 128 Security Level 0 (0)
Code 128 Security Level 2 (2)
* Code 128 Security Level 1
(1)
Code 128 Security Level 3 (3)
156
Symbologies
Code 128 Reduced Quiet Zone Parameter # 1208 SSI # F8h 04h B8h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable decoding Code 128 barcodes with reduced quiet zones (the margins on either side of the barcode). If you select Enable, select a 1D Quiet Zone Level on page 204.
Enable Code 128 Reduced Quiet Zone (1)
* Disable Code 128 Reduced Quiet Zone
(0)
Code 39
Parameter # 0 SSI # 00h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Code 39.
* Enable Code 39
(1)
Disable Code 39 (0)
157
Symbologies
Trioptic Code 39 Parameter # 13 SSI # 0Dh
Trioptic Code 39 is a variant of Code 39 used in the marking of computer tape cartridges. Trioptic Code 39 symbols always contain six characters. Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Trioptic Code 39.
NOTE: You cannot enable Trioptic Code 39 and Code 39 Full ASCII simultaneously.
Enable Trioptic Code 39 (1)
* Disable Trioptic Code 39
(0)
Convert Code 39 to Code 32 Parameter # 86 SSI # 56h
Code 32 is a variant of Code 39 used by the Italian pharmaceutical industry. Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable converting Code 39 to Code 32.
NOTE: Code 39 (on page 157) must be enabled for this parameter to function.
Enable Convert Code 39 to Code 32 (1)
* Disable Convert Code 39 to Code 32
(0)
158
Symbologies
Code 32 Prefix Parameter # 231 SSI # E7h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable adding the prefix character "A" to all Code 32 barcodes.
NOTE: Convert Code 39 to Code 32 (on page 158) must be enabled for this parameter to function.
Enable Code 32 Prefix (1)
* Disable Code 32 Prefix
(0)
Set Lengths for Code 39 L1 = Parameter # 18 SSI # 12h L2 = Parameter # 19 SSI # 13h
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Code 128 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. If Code 39 Full ASCII is enabled, Length Within Range or Any Length are the preferred options. The default is Length Within Range: 1 to 55.
NOTE: When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
159
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Code 39 (continued)
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a length option:
· One Discrete Length - Decode only Code 39 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length
using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only Code 39 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 39 - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 431.
· Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only Code 39 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select
lengths using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only Code 39 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan Code 39 - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 431.
· Length Within Range - Decode Code 39 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using
the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode Code 39 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, scan Code 39 - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 431.
· Any Length - Decode Code 39 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner's
capability.
Code 39 - One Discrete Length * Code 39 - Length Within Range
Code 39 - Two Discrete Lengths Code 39 - Any Length
160
Symbologies
Code 39 Check Digit Verification Parameter # 48 SSI # 30h
Scan Enable Code 39 Check Digit to check the integrity of all Code 39 symbols to verify that the data complies with specified check digit algorithm. Only Code 39 symbols which include a modulo 43 check digit are decoded. Enable this feature if the Code 39 symbols contain a Modulo 43 check digit.
Enable Code 39 Check Digit (1)
* Disable Code 39 Check Digit
(0)
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit Parameter # 43 SSI # 2Bh
Scan one of the following barcodes to transmit Code 39 data with or without the check digit.
NOTE: Code 39 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter to function.
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit (Enable) (1)
* Do Not Transmit Code 39 Check Digit (Disable)
(0)
161
Symbologies
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Parameter # 17 SSI # 11h
Code 39 Full ASCII is a variant of Code 39 which pairs characters to encode the full ASCII character set. Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Code 39 Full ASCII.
NOTE: You cannot enable Trioptic Code 39 and Code 39 Full ASCII simultaneously.
Code 39 Full ASCII to Full ASCII Correlation is host-dependent, and is therefore described in the ASCII character set table for the appropriate interface. See Table 33 on page 450.
Enable Code 39 Full ASCII (1)
* Disable Code 39 Full ASCII
(0)
162
Symbologies
Code 39 Security Level
Parameter # 750
SSI # F1h EEh
The scanner offers four levels of decode security for Code 39 barcodes. There is an inverse relationship between security and scanner aggressiveness. Increasing the level of security can reduce scanning aggressiveness, so select only the level of security necessary.
· Code 39 Security Level 0: The scanner operates in its most aggressive state, while providing sufficient
security in decoding most in-spec barcodes.
· Code 39 Security Level 1: This default setting eliminates most misdecodes. · Code 39 Security Level 2: This option applies greater barcode security requirements if Security Level 1
fails to eliminate misdecodes.
· Code 39 Level 3: If you selected Security Level 2, and misdecodes still occur, select this security level to
apply the highest safety requirements.
NOTE: Selecting this option is an extreme measure against mis-decoding severely out-of-spec barcodes,
and significantly impairs the decoding ability of the scanner. If this level of security is required, try to improve the quality of the barcodes.
Code 39 Security Level 0 (0)
* Code 39 Security Level 1
(1)
Code 39 Security Level 2 (2)
Code 39 Security Level 3 (3)
163
Symbologies
Code 39 Reduced Quiet Zone Parameter # 1209 SSI # F8h 04h B9h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable decoding Code 39 barcodes with reduced quiet zones (the margins on either side of the barcode). If you select Enable, select a 1D Quiet Zone Level on page 204.
Enable Code 39 Reduced Quiet Zone (1)
* Disable Code 39 Reduced Quiet Zone
(0)
Code 93
Parameter # 9 SSI # 09h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Code 93.
* Enable Code 93
(1)
Disable Code 93 (0)
164
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Code 93 L1 = Parameter # 26 SSI # 1Ah L2 = Parameter # 27 SSI # 1Bh
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Code 93 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. The default is Length Within Range: 1 to 55.
NOTE: When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a length option:
· One Discrete Length - Decode only Code 93 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length
using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only Code 93 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 93 - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 431.
· Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only Code 93 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select
lengths using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only Code 93 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan Code 93 - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 431.
· Length Within Range - Decode Code 93 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using
the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode Code 93 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, scan Code 93 - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 431.
· Any Length - Decode Code 93 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner's
capability.
165
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Code 93 (continued)
Code 93 - One Discrete Length * Code 93 - Length Within Range
Code 93 - Two Discrete Lengths Code 93 - Any Length
166
Symbologies
Code 11
Parameter # 10 SSI # 0Ah
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Code 11
Enable Code 11 (1)
* Disable Code 11
(0)
Set Lengths for Code 11 L1 = Parameter # 28 SSI # 1Ch L2 = Parameter # 29 SSI # 1Dh
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Code 11 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. The default is Length Within Range: 4 to 55.
NOTE: When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a length option:
· One Discrete Length - Decode only Code 11 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length
using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only Code 11 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 11 - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 431.
· Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only Code 11 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select
lengths using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only Code 11 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan Code 11 - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 431.
· Length Within Range - Decode Code 11 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using
the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode Code 11 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, scan Code 11 - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 431.
· Any Length - Decode Code 11 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner's
capability.
167
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Code 11 (continued)
Code 11 - One Discrete Length * Code 11 - Length Within Range
Code 11 - Two Discrete Lengths Code 11 - Any Length
168
Symbologies
Code 11 Check Digit Verification Parameter # 52 SSI # 34h
This feature allows the scanner to check the integrity of all Code 11 symbols to verify that the data complies with the specified check digit algorithm. Scan one of the following barcodes to specify the number of check digits encoded in the Code 11 symbols, or to disable this feature.
* Disable
(0)
Two Check Digits (2)
One Check Digit (1)
169
Symbologies
Transmit Code 11 Check Digits Parameter # 47 SSI # 2Fh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether or not to transmit the Code 11 check digit(s).
NOTE: Code 11 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter to function.
Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) (Enable) (1)
* Do Not Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) (Disable)
(0)
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
Parameter # 6 SSI # 06h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Interleaved 2 of 5.
* Enable Interleaved 2 of 5
(1)
Disable Interleaved 2 of 5 (0)
170
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5
L1 = Parameter # 22 SSI # 16h
L2 = Parameter # 23 SSI # 17h
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for I 2 of 5 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. The range for Interleaved 2 of 5 lengths is 0 - 80. The default is Length Within Range: 6 to 55.
NOTE: When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a length option:
· One Discrete Length - Decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using
the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters, scan I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 431.
· Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select lengths
using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan I 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 431.
· Length Within Range - Decode I 2 of 5 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using the
barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode I 2 of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, scan I 2 of 5 - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 431.
· Any Length - Decode I 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner's
capability.
NOTE:
Due to the construction of the I 2 of 5 symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the code to transmit as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the barcode. To prevent this, select specific lengths (I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, Two Discrete Lengths) for I 2 of 5 applications, or increase the I 2 of 5 Security Level on page 175.
171
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 (continued)
I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length
I 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths
* I 2 of 5 - Length Within Range
I 2 of 5 - Any Length
I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification Parameter # 49 SSI # 31h
Scan one of the following barcodes to check the integrity of all I 2 of 5 symbols to verify the data complies with either the specified Uniform Symbology Specification (USS), or the Optical Product Code Council (OPCC) check digit algorithm.
* Disable
(0)
USS Check Digit (1)
OPCC Check Digit (2)
172
Symbologies
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit Parameter # 44 SSI # 2Ch
Scan one of the following barcodes to transmit I 2 of 5 data with or without the check digit.
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit (Enable) (1)
* Do Not Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit (Disable)
(0)
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 Parameter # 82 SSI # 52h
Scan Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 (Enable) to convert 14-character I 2 of 5 codes to EAN-13, and transmit to the host as EAN-13. To accomplish this, the I 2 of 5 code must be enabled, and the code must have a leading zero and a valid EAN-13 check digit.
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 (Enable) (1)
* Do Not Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 (Disable)
(0)
173
Symbologies
Febraban Parameter # 1750 SSI # F8h 06h D6h
Febraban is an I 2 of 5 barcode of length 44 that requires special check characters to be inserted in the transmitted data stream. When enabled, the I 2 of 5 internal check digit calculation and transmission is disabled. When disabled, all I 2 of 5 functionality works as usual.
Recommendations for Length Setting
I 2 of 5 Length 1: Larger of the fixed length and the FEBRABAN length (==44). I 2 of 5 Length 2: Smaller of the fixed length and the FEBRABAN length (==44).
Enable Febraban (1)
* Disable Febraban
(0)
174
Symbologies
I 2 of 5 Security Level
Parameter # 1121
SSI # F8h 04h 61h
Interleaved 2 of 5 barcodes are vulnerable to misdecodes, particularly when I 2 of 5 Lengths is set to Any Length. The scanner offers four levels of decode security for Interleaved 2 of 5 barcodes. There is an inverse relationship between security and scanner aggressiveness. Increasing the level of security can reduce scanning aggressiveness, so select only the level of security necessary.
· I 2 of 5 Security Level 0: The scanner operates in its most aggressive state, while providing sufficient
security in decoding most in-spec barcodes.
· I 2 of 5 Security Level 1: A barcode must be successfully read twice, and satisfy certain safety
requirements before being decoded. This default setting eliminates most misdecodes.
· I 2 of 5 Security Level 2: This option applies greater barcode security requirements if Security Level 1
fails to eliminate misdecodes.
· I 2 of 5 Security Level 3: If you selected Security Level 2, and misdecodes still occur, select this security
level. The highest safety requirements are applied. A barcode must be successfully read three times before being decoded.
NOTE: Selecting this option is an extreme measure against mis-decoding severely out-of-spec barcodes,
and significantly impairs the decoding ability of the scanner. If this level of security is required, try to improve the quality of the barcodes.
I 2 of 5 Security Level 0 (0)
I 2 of 5 Security Level 2 (2)
* I 2 of 5 Security Level 1
(1)
I 2 of 5 Security Level 3 (3)
175
Symbologies
I 2 of 5 Reduced Quiet Zone Parameter # 1210 SSI # F8h 04h BAh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable decoding I 2 of 5 barcodes with reduced quiet zones (the margins on either side of the barcode). If you select Enable, select a 1D Quiet Zone Level on page 204.
Enable I 2 of 5 Reduced Quiet Zone (1)
* Disable I 2 of 5 Reduced Quiet Zone
(0)
Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF)
Parameter # 5 SSI # 05h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Discrete 2 of 5.
Enable Discrete 2 of 5 (1)
* Disable Discrete 2 of 5
(0)
176
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 L1 = Parameter # 20 SSI # 14h L2 = Parameter # 21 SSI # 15h
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for D 2 of 5 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. The default is Length Within Range: 1 to 55.
NOTE: When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a length option:
· One Discrete Length - Decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using
the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters, scan D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 431.
· Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select lengths
using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan D 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 431.
· Length Within Range - Decode D 2 of 5 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using
the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode D 2 of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, scan D 2 of 5 - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 431.
· Any Length - Decode D 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner's
capability.
177
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 (continued)
NOTE: Due to the construction of the D 2 of 5 symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the
code to transmit as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the barcode. To prevent this, select specific lengths (D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, Two Discrete Lengths) for D 2 of 5 applications.
D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length * D 2 of 5 - Length Within Range
D 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths D 2 of 5 - Any Length
178
Symbologies
Codabar (NW - 7)
Parameter # 7 SSI # 07h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Codabar.
* Enable Codabar
(1)
Disable Codabar (0)
Set Lengths for Codabar L1 = Parameter # 24 SSI # 18h L2 = Parameter # 25 SSI # 19h
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Codabar to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range.The default is Length Within Range: 4 to 55.
NOTE: When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a length option:
· One Discrete Length - Decode only Codabar symbols containing a selected length. Select the length
using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only Codabar symbols with 14 characters, scan Codabar - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 431.
· Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only Codabar symbols containing either of two lengths. Select lengths
using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only Codabar symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan Codabar - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 431.
· Length Within Range - Decode Codabar symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using
the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode Codabar symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, scan Codabar - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 431.
· Any Length - Decode Codabar symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner's
capability.
179
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Codabar (continued)
Codabar - One Discrete Length * Codabar - Length Within Range
Codabar - Two Discrete Lengths Codabar - Any Length
180
Symbologies
CLSI Editing Parameter # 54 SSI # 36h
Scan Enable CLSI Editing to strip the start and stop characters and insert a space after the first, fifth, and tenth characters of a 14-character Codabar symbol if the host system requires this data format.
NOTE: Symbol length does not include start and stop characters.
Enable CLSI Editing (1)
* Disable CLSI Editing
(0)
NOTIS Editing Parameter # 55 SSI # 37h
Scan Enable NOTIS Editing to strip the start and stop characters from a decoded Codabar symbol if the host system requires this data format.
Enable NOTIS Editing (1)
* Disable NOTIS Editing
(0)
181
Symbologies
Codabar Security Level
Parameter # 1776
SSI # F8h 06h F0h
The scanner offers four levels of decode security for Codabar barcodes. There is an inverse relationship between security and scanner aggressiveness. Increasing the level of security can reduce scanning aggressiveness, so select only the level of security necessary.
· Codabar Security Level 0: This setting allows the scanner to operate in its most aggressive state, while
providing sufficient security in decoding most in-spec barcodes.
· Codabar Security Level 1: This default setting eliminates most misdecodes. · Codabar Security Level 2: Select this option with greater barcode security requirements if Security
Level 1 fails to eliminate misdecodes.
· Codabar Security Level 3: If you selected Security Level 2, and misdecodes still occur, select this
security level to apply the highest safety requirements.
NOTE: Selecting this option is an extreme measure against mis-decoding severely out-of-spec barcodes,
and significantly impairs the decoding ability of the scanner. If this level of security is required, try to improve the quality of the barcodes.
Codabar Security Level 0 (0)
* Codabar Security Level 1
(1)
Codabar Security Level 2 (2)
Codabar Security Level 3 (3)
182
Symbologies
Codabar Upper or Lower Case Start/Stop Characters Parameter # 855 SSI # F2h 57h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether to transmit upper case or lower case Codabar start/stop characters.
Lower Case (1)
* Upper Case
(0)
Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit Verification Parameter # 1784 SSI # F8h 06h F8h
Enable this feature to check the Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit to verify that the data complies with the specified check digit algorithm.
Enable Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit (1)
* Disable Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit
(0)
183
Symbologies
Transmit Codabar Check Digit Parameter # 704 SSI # F1h C0h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether or not to transmit the Codabar check digit(s).
NOTE: Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter to function.
Enable Codabar Check Digit Transmission (1)
* Disable Codabar Check Digit Transmission
(0)
MSI
Parameter # 11 SSI # 0Bh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable MSI.
Enable MSI (1)
* Disable MSI
(0)
184
Symbologies
Set Lengths for MSI L1 = Parameter # 30 SSI # 1Eh L2 = Parameter # 31 SSI # 1Fh
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for MSI to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. The default is Length Within Range: 4 to 55.
NOTE: When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a length option:
· One Discrete Length - Decode only MSI symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the
barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only MSI symbols with 14 characters, scan MSI One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 431.
· Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only MSI symbols containing either of two lengths. Select lengths
using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only MSI symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan MSI - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 431.
· Length Within Range - Decode MSI symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using the
barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode MSI symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, scan MSI - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 431.
· Any Length - Decode MSI symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner's capability.
185
Symbologies
Set Lengths for MSI (continued)
NOTE: Due to the construction of the MSI symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the
code to transmit as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the barcode. To prevent this, select specific lengths (MSI - One Discrete Length, Two Discrete Lengths) for MSI applications.
MSI - One Discrete Length * MSI - Length Within Range
MSI - Two Discrete Lengths MSI - Any Length
186
Symbologies
MSI Check Digits Parameter # 50 SSI # 32h
With MSI symbols, one check digit is mandatory and always verified by the reader. The second check digit is optional. If the MSI codes include two check digits, scan the Two MSI Check Digits barcode to enable verification of the second check digit. See MSI Check Digit Algorithm on page 189 to select second digit algorithms.
No MSI Check Digit (0)
* One MSI Check Digit
(1)
Two MSI Check Digits (2)
Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) Parameter # 46 SSI # 2Eh
Scan one of the following barcodes to transmit MSI data with or without the check digit.
187
Symbologies
Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) (Enable) (1)
* Do Not Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) (Disable)
(0)
188
Symbologies
MSI Check Digit Algorithm Parameter # 51 SSI # 33h
Two algorithms are available for verifying the second MSI check digit. Scan one of the following barcodes to select the algorithm used to encode the check digit.
MOD 11/MOD 10 (0)
* MOD 10/MOD 10
(1)
MSI Reduced Quiet Zone Parameter # 1392 SSI # F8h 05h 70h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable decoding MSI barcodes with reduced quiet zones. If you select Enable, select a 1D Quiet Zone Level on page 204.
* Disable MSI Reduced Quiet Zone
(0)
Enable MSI Reduced Quiet Zone (1)
189
Symbologies
Chinese 2 of 5
Parameter # 408 SSI # F0h 98h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Chinese 2 of 5.
Enable Chinese 2 of 5 (1)
* Disable Chinese 2 of 5
(0)
Matrix 2 of 5
Parameter # 618 SSI # F1h 6Ah
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Matrix 2 of 5.
Enable Matrix 2 of 5 (1)
* Disable Matrix 2 of 5
(0)
190
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Matrix 2 of 5 L1 = Parameter # 619 SSI # F1h 6Bh L2 = Parameter # 620 SSI # F1h 6Ch
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Matrix 2 of 5 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. The default is Length Within Range: 4 to 55.
NOTE: When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a length option:
· One Discrete Length - Decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length
using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters, scan Matrix 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 431.
· Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select
lengths using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan Matrix 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 431.
· Length Within Range - Decode Matrix 2 of 5 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths
using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, scan Matrix 2 of 5 - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 431.
· Any Length - Decode Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner's
capability.
191
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Matrix 2 of 5 (continued)
Matrix 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length * Matrix 2 of 5 - Length Within Range
Matrix 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths Matrix 2 of 5 - Any Length
192
Symbologies
Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit Parameter # 622 SSI # F1h 6Eh
The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan one of the following barcodes to determine whether to include the Matrix 2 of 5 check digit with the barcode data.
Enable Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit (1)
* Disable Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit
(0)
Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit Parameter # 623 SSI # F1h 6Fh
Scan one of the following barcodes to transmit Matrix 2 of 5 data with or without the check digit.
Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit (1)
* Do Not Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit
(0)
193
Symbologies
Korean 3 of 5
Parameter # 581 SSI # F1h 45h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Korean 3 of 5.
NOTE: The length for Korean 3 of 5 is fixed at 6.
Enable Korean 3 of 5 (1)
* Disable Korean 3 of 5
(0)
Inverse 1D Parameter # 586 SSI # F1h 4Ah
NOTE: The Inverse 1D setting may impact Composite or Inverse Composite decoding. See Composite Inverse
on page 206. Scan one of the following barcodes to set the 1D inverse decoder setting:
· Regular Only - The scanner decodes regular 1D barcodes only. · Inverse Only - The scanner decodes inverse 1D barcodes only. · Inverse Autodetect - The scanner decodes both regular and inverse 1D barcodes.
194
Inverse 1D (continued)
Symbologies
* Regular
(0)
Inverse Autodetect (2)
Inverse Only (1)
195
Symbologies
GS1 DataBar
The variants of GS1 DataBar are GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional, GS1 DataBar Truncated, GS1 DataBar Stacked, GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional, DataBar Expanded, GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked and DataBar Limited. The limited and expanded versions have stacked variants. Scan the appropriate barcodes to enable or disable each variant of GS1 DataBar.
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly GS1 DataBar-14), GS1 DataBar Truncated, GS1 DataBar Stacked, GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional Parameter # 338 SSI # F0h 52h
NOTE: When GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional is enabled the variants are also enabled.
* Enable GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional
(1)
Disable GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (0)
196
GS1 DataBar Limited Parameter # 339 SSI # F0h 53h
Symbologies
* Enable GS1 DataBar Limited
(1)
Disable GS1 DataBar Limited (0)
GS1 DataBar Expanded, GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked Parameter # 340 SSI # F0h 54h
NOTE: When GS1 DataBar Expanded is enabled GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked is also enabled.
* Enable GS1 DataBar Expanded
(1)
Disable GS1 DataBar Expanded (0)
197
Symbologies
Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN/JAN Parameter # 397 SSI # F0h, 8Dh
This parameter only applies to GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional and GS1 DataBar Limited symbols not decoded as part of a Composite symbol. Scan Enable Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN/JAN to strip the leading '010' from DataBar-14 and DataBar Limited symbols encoding a single zero as the first digit, and report the barcode as EAN-13. For barcodes beginning with between two and five zeros, this strips the leading '0100' and reports the barcode as UPC-A. The UPC-A Preamble option that transmits the system character and country code applies to converted barcodes. Note that neither the system character nor the check digit can be stripped.
Enable Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN/JAN (1)
* Disable Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN/JAN
(0)
198
Symbologies
GS1 DataBar Security Level Parameter # 1706
SSI # F8h 06h AAh
The scanner offers four levels of decode security for GS1 DataBar (GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional, GS1 DataBar Limited, GS1 DataBar Expanded) barcodes.
· Security Level 0 - The scanner operates in its most aggressive state, while providing sufficient security
decoding most in-spec barcodes.
· Security Level 1 - This setting eliminates most misdecodes while maintaining reasonable aggressiveness. · Security Level 2 - Select this option with greater barcode security requirements if Security Level 1 fails to
eliminate misdecodes.
· Security Level 3 - If you selected Security Level 2 and misdecodes still occur, select this security level to
apply the highest safety requirements.
GS1 DataBar Security Level 0 (0)
GS1 DataBar Security Level 2 (2)
* GS1 DataBar Security Level 1
(1)
GS1 DataBar Security Level 3 (3)
199
Symbologies
GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check Parameter # 728 SSI # F1h D8h
The scanner offers four levels of decode security for GS1 DataBar Limited barcodes. There is an inverse relationship between the level of margin check and scanner aggressiveness. Increasing the level of margin check can reduce scanning aggressiveness, so select only the level of margin check necessary.
· Margin Check Level 1 No clear margin required. This complies with the original GS1 standard, yet can
result in erroneous decoding of a DataBar Limited barcode when scanning some UPC symbols that start with digits 9 and 7.
· Margin Check Level 2 Automatic risk detection. This level of margin check can result in erroneous
decoding of DataBar Limited barcodes when scanning some UPC symbols. If a misdecode is detected, the scanner operates in Level 3 or Level 1.
· Margin Check Level 3 Margin check level reflects the newly proposed GS1 standard that requires a five
times trailing clear margin.
· Margin Check Level 4 Security level extends beyond the standard required by GS1. This level of margin
check requires a five times leading and trailing clear margin.
GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check Level 1 (1)
GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check Level 2 (2)
* GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check Level 3
(3)
GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check Level 4 (4)
200
Symbologies
Symbology-Specific Security Features
Redundancy Level Parameter # 78 SSI # 4Eh
The scanner offers four levels of decode redundancy. Select higher redundancy levels for decreasing levels of barcode quality. As redundancy levels increase, the scanner's aggressiveness decreases. Scan one of the following barcodes to select the redundancy level appropriate for the barcode quality:
· Redundancy Level 1 - The scanner must read the following code types twice before decoding: · Codabar (8 characters or less) · MSI (4 characters or less) · D 2 of 5 (8 characters or less) · I 2 of 5 (8 characters or less)
· Redundancy Level 2 - The scanner must read all code types twice before decoding. · Redundancy Level 3 - The scanner must read code types other than the following twice before decoding,
but must read the following codes three times:
· Codabar (8 characters or less) · MSI (4 characters or less) · D 2 of 5 (8 characters or less) · I 2 of 5 (8 characters or less) · Redundancy Level 4 - The scanner must read all code types three times before decoding.
201
Symbologies
Redundancy Level (continued)
* Redundancy Level 1
(1)
Redundancy Level 3 (3)
Redundancy Level 2 (2)
Redundancy Level 4 (4)
202
Symbologies
Security Level Parameter # 77
SSI # 4Dh
The scanner offers four levels of decode security for delta barcodes, which include the Code 128 family, UPC/EAN/JAN, and Code 93. Select increasing levels of security for decreasing levels of barcode quality. There is an inverse relationship between security and scanner aggressiveness, so choose only that level of security necessary for the application.
· Security Level 0 - The scanner operates in its most aggressive state, while providing sufficient security
decoding most in-spec barcodes.
· Security Level 1 - This default setting eliminates most misdecodes. · Security Level 2 - Select this option if Security Level 1 fails to eliminate misdecodes. · Security Level 3 - If you selected Security Level 2 and misdecodes still occur, select this security level.
NOTE: Selecting this option is an extreme measure against mis-decoding severely out-of-spec barcodes,
and significantly impairs the decoding ability of the scanner. If this level of security is required, try to improve the quality of the barcodes.
Security Level 0 (0)
Security Level 2 (2)
* Security Level 1
(1)
Security Level 3 (3)
203
Symbologies
1D Quiet Zone Level Parameter # 1288
SSI # F8h 05h 08h
This feature sets the level of aggressiveness when decoding barcodes with a reduced quiet zone (the margin on either side of a barcode), and applies to symbologies enabled by a Reduced Quiet Zone parameter. Because higher levels increase the decoding time and risk of misdecodes, Zebra strongly recommends enabling only the symbologies which require higher quiet zone levels, and leaving Reduced Quiet Zone disabled for all other symbologies. Options are:
· 1D Quiet Zone Level 0 - The scanner performs normally in terms of quiet zone. · 1D Quiet Zone Level 1 - The scanner performs more aggressively in terms of quiet zone. · 1D Quiet Zone Level 2 - The scanner only requires a quiet zone at the end of barcode for decoding. · 1D Quiet Zone Level 3 - The scanner decodes anything in terms of quiet zone or end of barcode.
1D Quiet Zone Level 0 (0)
1D Quiet Zone Level 2 (2)
* 1D Quiet Zone Level 1
(1)
1D Quiet Zone Level 3 (3)
204
Symbologies
Intercharacter Gap Size Parameter # 381 SSI # F0h, 7Dh
The Code 39 and Codabar symbologies have an intercharacter gap that is ly quite small. Due to various barcode printing technologies, this gap can grow larger than the maximum size allowed, preventing the scanner from decoding the symbol. If this problem occurs, scan the Large Intercharacter Gaps parameter to tolerate these out-of-specification barcodes.
* Normal Intercharacter Gaps
(6)
Large Intercharacter Gaps (10)
Composite
Composite CC-C Parameter # 341 SSI # F0h 55h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Composite barcodes of type CC-C.
Enable CC-C (1)
* Disable CC-C
(0)
205
Symbologies
Composite CC-A/B Parameter # 342 SSI # F0h 56h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Composite barcodes of type CC-A/B.
Enable CC-A/B (1)
* Disable CC-A/B
(0)
Composite TLC-39 Parameter # 371 SSI # F0h 73h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Composite barcodes of type TLC-39.
Enable TLC39 (1)
* Disable TLC39
(0)
Composite Inverse Parameter # 1113 SSI # F8h 04h 59h
Select an option to set Composite for either regular decode or inverse decode. This mode only supports Composite Inverse that includes DataBar combined with CCAB, and does not support other 1D/2D combinations. For this parameter to function, first enable Composite CC-A/B on page 206.
206
Symbologies
· Regular Only - The scanner decodes regular Composite barcodes only. Before selecting this, set Inverse
1D on page 194 to Regular Only or Inverse Autodetect.
· Inverse Only - The scanner decodes inverse Composite barcodes only. Before selecting this, set Inverse
1D on page 194 to Inverse Only or Inverse Autodetect.
* Regular Only
(0) Inverse Only (1)
207
Symbologies
UPC Composite Mode Parameter # 344 SSI # F0h 58h
Select an option for linking UPC symbols with a 2D symbol during transmission as if they were one symbol:
· UPC Never Linked - Transmit UPC barcodes regardless of whether a 2D symbol is detected. · UPC Always Linked - Transmit UPC barcodes and the 2D portion. If 2D is not present, do not transmit the
barcode.
· Autodiscriminate UPC Composites - The scanner determines if there is a 2D portion, then transmits the
UPC, as well as the 2D portion if present.
* UPC Never Linked
(0)
UPC Always Linked (1)
Autodiscriminate UPC Composites (2)
208
Symbologies
Composite Beep Mode Parameter # 398 SSI # F0h, 8Eh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the number of decode beeps that sound upon decoding a Composite barcode.
Single Beep After Both are Decoded (0)
* Beep as Each Code Type is Decoded
(1)
Double Beep After Both are Decoded (2)
GS1-128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN Composite Codes Parameter # 427 SSI # F0h, ABh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable this mode.
Enable GS1-128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN Composite Codes (1)
* Disable GS1-128 Emulation Mode for
UCC/EAN Composite Codes
(0)
209
Symbologies
2D Symbologies
PDF417 Parameter # 15 SSI # 0Fh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable PDF417.
* Enable PDF417
(1)
Disable PDF417 (0)
MicroPDF417 Parameter # 227 SSI # E3h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable MicroPDF417.
Enable MicroPDF417 (1)
* Disable MicroPDF417
(0)
210
Symbologies
Code 128 Emulation Parameter # 123 SSI # 7Bh
Enable this parameter to transmit data from certain MicroPDF417 symbols as Code 128. You must enable AIM Code ID Character (1) on page 88 for this parameter to work.
NOTE: Linked MicroPDF codewords 906, 907, 912, 914, and 915 are not supported. Use GS1 Composites
instead. Enable Code 128 Emulation to transmit these MicroPDF417 symbols with one of the following prefixes:
]C1 if the first codeword is 903-905 ]C2 if the first codeword is 908 or 909 ]C0 if the first codeword is 910 or 911 Disable Code 128 Emulation to transmit these MicroPDF417 symbols with one of the following prefixes: ]L3 if the first codeword is 903-905 ]L4 if the first codeword is 908 or 909 ]L5 if the first codeword is 910 or 911 Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Code 128 Emulation.
Enable Code 128 Emulation (1)
* Disable Code 128 Emulation
(0)
211
Symbologies
Data Matrix Parameter # 292 SSI # F0h, 24h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Data Matrix.
* Enable Data Matrix
(1)
Disable Data Matrix (0)
GS1 Data Matrix Parameter # 1336 SSI # F8h 05h 38h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable GS1 Data Matrix.
Enable GS1 Data Matrix (1)
* Disable GS1 Data Matrix
(0)
212
Symbologies
Data Matrix Inverse Parameter # 588 SSI # F1h 4Ch
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the Data Matrix inverse decoder setting:
· Regular Only - The scanner decodes regular Data Matrix barcodes only. · Inverse Only - The scanner decodes inverse Data Matrix barcodes only. · Inverse Autodetect - The scanner decodes both regular and inverse Data Matrix barcodes.
Regular Only (0)
* Inverse Autodetect (2)
Inverse Only (1)
213
Symbologies
Decode Data Matrix Mirror Images Parameter # 537 SSI # F1h 19h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select an option for decoding mirror image Data Matrix barcodes:
· Never - Do not decode Data Matrix barcodes that are mirror images. · Always - Decode only Data Matrix barcodes that are mirror images. · Auto - Decode both mirrored and unmirrored Data Matrix barcodes.
Never (0)
* Auto
(2)
Always (1)
214
Symbologies
Maxicode Parameter # 294 SSI # F0h, 26h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Maxicode.
Enable Maxicode (1)
* Disable Maxicode
(0)
QR Code Parameter # 293 SSI # F0h, 25h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable QR Code.
NOTE: Inverse QR barcodes decode if QR Code is enabled.
* Enable QR Code
(1)
Disable QR Code (0)
215
Symbologies
GS1 QR Parameter # 1343 SSI # F8h 05h 3Fh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable GS1 QR.
* Enable GS1 QR
(1)
MicroQR Parameter # 573 SSI # F1h 3Dh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable MicroQR.
Disable GS1 QR (0)
* Enable MicroQR
(1)
Disable MicroQR (0)
216
Symbologies
Linked QR Mode Parameter # 1847 SSI # 737h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a linked QR mode.
· Linked QR Only - Does not decode individual QRs from a set of linked QR codes. · Individual QR With Headers - Decodes individual QRs from a set of linked QR codes and keeps the
header information and data.
· Individual QR No Headers - Decodes individual QRs from a set of linked QR codes and just transmits
data without header information.
* Linked QR Only
(0)
Individual QR With Headers (1)
Individual QR No Headers (2)
217
Symbologies
Aztec Parameter # 574 SSI # F1h 3Eh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Aztec.
NOTE: Enabling Aztec also enables Linked Aztec.
* Enable Aztec
(1)
Disable Aztec (0)
Aztec Inverse Parameter # 589 SSI # F1h 4Dh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the Aztec inverse decoder setting:
· Regular Only - The scanner decodes regular Aztec barcodes only. · Inverse Only - The scanner decodes inverse Aztec barcodes only. · Inverse Autodetect - The scanner decodes both regular and inverse Aztec barcodes.
Regular Only (0)
Inverse Only (1)
* Inverse Autodetect (2)
218
Symbologies
Han Xin Parameter # 1167 SSI # F8h 04h 8Fh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Han Xin.
Enable Han Xin (1)
* Disable Han Xin
(0)
Han Xin Inverse Parameter # 1168 SSI # F8h 04h 90h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a Han Xin inverse decoder setting:
· Regular Only - The scanner decodes Han Xin barcodes with normal reflectance only. · Inverse Only - The scanner decodes Han Xin barcodes with inverse reflectance only. · Inverse Autodetect - The scanner decodes both regular and inverse Han Xin barcodes.
* Regular Only (0)
Inverse Autodetect (2)
Inverse Only (1)
219
Symbologies
Grid Matrix Parameter # 1718 SSI # F8h 06h B6h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Grid Matrix.
Enable (1)
* Disable
(0)
Grid Matrix Inverse Parameter # 1719 SSI # F8h 06h B7h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a Grid Matrix inverse decoder setting:
· Regular Only - The scanner decodes regular Grid Matrix barcodes only. · Inverse Only - The scanner decodes inverse Grid Matrix barcodes only. · Autodiscriminate - The scanner decodes both regular and inverse Grid Matrix barcodes.
* Regular Only
(0)
Autodiscriminate (2)
220
Inverse Only (1)
Symbologies
Grid Matrix Mirror Parameter # 1736 SSI # F8h 06h C8h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a Grid Matrix mirror decoder setting:
· Regular Only - The scanner decodes regular Grid Matrix barcodes only. · Mirrored Only - The scanner decodes mirrored Grid Matrix barcodes only. · Auto-discriminate - The scanner decodes both regular and mirrored Grid Matrix barcodes.
* Regular Only
(0)
Autodiscriminate (2)
Mirrored Only (1)
221
Symbologies
DotCode Parameter # 1906 SSI # F8 07 72h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable DotCode.
* Disable DotCode (0)
Enable DotCode (1)
222
Symbologies
DotCode Inverse Parameter # 1907 SSI # F8 07 73h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a DotCode Inverse decoder setting. Setting options are:
· Regular Only - Decoder decodes DotCode barcodes with normal reflectance only. · Inverse Only - Decoder decodes DotCode barcodes with inverse reflectance only. · Inverse Autodetect - Decoder decodes both regular and inverse DotCode barcodes.
Regular (0)
* Inverse Autodetect (2)
Inverse Only (1)
223
Symbologies
DotCode Mirrored Parameter # 1908 SSI # F8 07 74h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a DotCode Mirror decoder setting:
· Non-Mirrored Only - Digital scanner decodes non-mirrored DotCode barcodes only. · Mirrored Only - Digital scanner decodes mirrored DotCode barcodes only. · Autodetect - Digital scanner decodes both mirrored and non-mirrored DotCode barcodes.
Never (0)
* Autodetect (2)
Always (1)
224
Symbologies
DotCode Prioritize Parameter # 1937 SSI # F8 07 91h
Enable DotCode Prioritize to give priority to DotCode decoding as compared to other symbologies.
Disable (0)
* Enable (1)
Macro PDF Features
Macro PDF is a special feature for concatenating multiple PDF symbols into one file. The scanner can decode symbols encoded with this feature, and can store more than 64 Kb of decoded data from up to 50 MacroPDF symbols.
CAUTION:When printing, keep each Macro PDF sequence separate, as each sequence has unique identifiers.
Do not mix barcodes from several Macro PDF sequences, even if they encode the same data. When scanning a Macro PDF sequence, scan the entire sequence without interruption. When scanning a mixed sequence, two long low beeps (low / low) indicate an inconsistent file ID or inconsistent symbology error.
225
Symbologies
Flush Macro Buffer
Scan the following barcode to flush the buffer of all decoded Macro PDF data stored to that point, transmit it to the host device, and abort from Macro PDF mode.
Flush Macro PDF Buffer
Abort Macro PDF Entry
Scan the following barcode to clear all currently-stored Macro PDF data in the buffer without transmission and abort from Macro PDF mode.
Abort Macro PDF Entry
Postal Codes
US Postnet Parameter # 89 SSI # 59h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable US Postnet.
Enable US Postnet (1)
* Disable US Postnet
(0)
226
Symbologies
US Planet Parameter # 90 SSI # 5Ah
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable US Planet.
Enable US Planet (1)
* Disable US Planet
(0)
Transmit US Postal Check Digit Parameter # 95 SSI # 5Fh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether to transmit US Postal data, which includes both US Postnet and US Planet, with or without the check digit.
* Transmit US Postal Check Digit
(1)
Do Not Transmit US Postal Check Digit (0)
227
Symbologies
UK Postal Parameter # 91 SSI # 5Bh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable UK Postal.
Enable UK Postal (1)
* Disable UK Postal
(0)
Transmit UK Postal Check Digit Parameter # 96 SSI # 60h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether to transmit UK Postal data with or without the check digit.
* Transmit UK Postal
Check Digit
(1)
Do Not Transmit UK Postal Check Digit (0)
228
Symbologies
Japan Postal Parameter # 290 SSI # F0h, 22h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Japan Postal.
Enable Japan Postal (1)
* Disable Japan Postal
(0)
Australia Post Parameter # 291 SSI # F0h, 23h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Australia Post.
Enable Australia Post (1)
* Disable Australia Post
(0)
229
Symbologies
Australia Post Format Parameter # 718 SSI # F1h, CEh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a format for Australia Post:
· Autodiscriminate (or Smart mode) - Decode the Customer Information Field using the N and C Encoding
Tables.
NOTE: This option increases the risk of misdecodes because the encoded data format does not specify
the Encoding Table used for encoding.
· Raw Format - Output raw bar patterns as a series of numbers 0 through 3. · Alphanumeric Encoding - Decode the Customer Information Field using the C Encoding Table. · Numeric Encoding - Decode the Customer Information Field using the N Encoding Table.
For more information on Australia Post Encoding Tables, refer to the Australia Post Customer Barcoding Technical Specifications available at auspost.com.au.
* Autodiscriminate
(0)
Alphanumeric Encoding (2)
Raw Format (1)
Numeric Encoding (3)
230
Symbologies
Netherlands KIX Code Parameter # 326 SSI # F0h, 46h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Netherlands KIX Code.
Enable Netherlands KIX Code (1)
* Disable Netherlands KIX Code
(0)
USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail Parameter # 592 SSI # F1h 50h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail.
Enable USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail (1)
* Disable USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail
(0)
231
Symbologies
UPU FICS Postal Parameter # 611 SSI # F1h 63h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable UPU FICS Postal.
Enable UPU FICS Postal (1)
* Disable UPU FICS Postal
(0)
Mailmark Parameter # 1337 SSI # F8h 05h 39h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Mailmark.
* Disable Mailmark (0)
Enable Mailmark (1)
232
USB Interface
Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up the scanner with a USB host. The scanner connects directly to a USB host, or a powered USB hub, which powers it. No additional power supply is required. The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 13 on page 235 (also see Parameter Defaults for all defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.
Setting Parameters
To set feature values, scan a single barcode or a short barcode sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the scanner powers down.
NOTE: Most computer monitors allow scanning barcodes directly on the screen. When scanning from the
screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the barcode clearly, and bars and/or spaces do not merge.
To return all features to default values, scan Set Factory Defaults on page 62. Throughout the programming
barcode menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
* Indicates default * Enable Parameter
Feature/option
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to set the USB keystroke delay to medium, scan the Medium Delay (20 msec) barcode under USB Keystroke Delay on page 239. The scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry. Other parameters require scanning several barcodes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
233
USB Interface
Connecting a USB Interface
Figure 19 USB Connection
Interface Cable
USB Connector
NOTE: When connecting via USB use the shielded connector cable (e.g., p/n CBA-U21-S07ZBR). Refer to
Solution Builder for guidance about cables. For information about cables and cable compatibility, go to the Zebra Partner Portal at: https://partnerportal.zebra.com/PartnerPortal/product_services/downloads_z/barcode_scanners/Univer sal-Cable-Guide-Bar-Code-Scanners.xlsx. The scanner connects to USB-capable hosts including:
· TGCS (IBM) terminals · Apple TM desktop and notebooks · Other network computers that support more than one keyboard.
The following operating systems support the scanner through USB:
· Windows® XP, 7, 8, 10 · MacOS 8.5 - MacOS 10.6 · IBM 4690 OS · Linux.
The scanner also interfaces with other USB hosts that support USB Human Interface Devices (HID). To set up the scanner: 1. Connect the modular connector of the USB interface cable to the cable interface port on the scanner. See
Inserting the Interface Cable on page 31.
NOTE: Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 19 are examples
only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the scanner are the same.
234
USB Interface
2. Plug the series A connector in the USB host or hub, or plug the PowerPlus connector in an available port of the IBM SurePOS terminal.
3. The scanner automatically detects the host and uses the default USB device type. If the default (*) does not meet your requirements, select another USB device type by scanning the appropriate barcode from USB Device Type on page 237.
4. On first installation when using Windows, the software may prompt to select or install the Human Interface Device driver. To install this driver, provided by Windows, click Next at all choices and click Finished on the last choice. The scanner powers up during this installation.
5. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter.
If problems occur with the system, see Troubleshooting on page 51.
USB Parameter Defaults
Table 13 lists defaults for USB host parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
· Scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in
memory. To recall default parameter values, see Default Parameters on page 62.
· Configure the scanner using the 123Scan configuration program. See 123Scan and Software Tools.
NOTE: See Parameter Defaults for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default
parameters.
Table 13 USB Interface Parameter Defaults Parameter
USB Host Parameters USB Device Type Symbol Native API (SNAPI) Status Handshaking USB Keystroke Delay USB Caps Lock Override Barcodes with Unknown Characters
USB Convert Unknown to Code 39 USB Fast HID USB Polling Interval Keypad Emulation Quick Keypad Emulation Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero USB FN1 Substitution Function Key Mapping
Default
Page Number
USB Keyboard HID
237
Enable
239
No Delay
239
Disable
240
Send Barcodes with Unknown
240
Characters
Disable
241
Enable
241
3 msec
242
Enable
244
Enable
244
Enable
245
Disable
245
Disable
246
235
USB Interface
Table 13 USB Interface Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Default
Simulated Caps Lock
Disable
Convert Case
None
USB Static CDC
Enable
CDC Beep on <BEL>
Enable
TGCS (IBM) USB Beep Directive
Ignore
TGCS (IBM) USB Barcode Configuration Directive
Ignore
TGCS (IBM) USB Specification Version
Version 2.2
USB CDC Host Variant
Standard CDC
Page Number 246 247 248 248 248 249 249 250
236
USB Interface
USB Host Parameters
USB Device Type
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the USB device type. To select a country keyboard type for the USB Keyboard HID host, see Country Codes.
NOTES: · When changing USB Device Types, the scanner resets and issues the standard startup beep
sequences.
· When connecting two scanners to a host, IBM does not allow selecting two of the same device type. If
you require two connections, select IBM Table-top USB for one scanner and IBM Hand-held USB for the second scanner.
· Select IBM Hand-held USB to disable data transmission when an IBM register issues a Scan Disable
command. Aim, illumination, and decoding is still permitted. Select IBM OPOS (IBM Hand-held USB with Full Scan Disable) to completely shut off the scanner when an IBM register issues a Scan Disable command, including aim, illumination, decoding, and data transmission.
· To select the Toshiba TEC device type, refer to the Toshiba TEC Programmer's Guide.
* USB Keyboard HID
IBM Hand-held USB
IBM Table-top USB
IBM OPOS (IBM Hand-held USB with Full Scan Disable)
237
USB Interface
USB Device Type (continued)
NOTES: · Before selecting USB CDC Host on page 238 or SSI over USB CDC on page 238, install the appropriate
USB CDC Driver on the host to ensure the scanner does not stall during power up (due to a failure to enumerate USB). Go to zebra.com/support, Support & Downloads > Barcode Scanners > USB CDC Driver, select the appropriate Windows platform, and download the appropriate CDC Driver (64 bit or 32 bit). To recover a stalled scanner: Install the USB CDC Driver or After power-up, hold the trigger for 10 seconds, which allows the scanner to power up using an alternate USB configuration. Upon power-up, scan another USB Device Type.
· Select USB HID POS to communicate over a USB cable with Universal Windows Platform (UWP)
applications running on Windows 10 devices.
SSI over USB CDC
USB CDC Host
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) with Imaging Interface
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) without Imaging Interface
USB HID POS (for Windows 10 devices only)
238
USB Interface
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) Status Handshaking
After selecting a SNAPI interface as the USB device type, scan one of the following barcodes to select whether to enable or disable status handshaking.
* Enable SNAPI Status Handshaking
Disable SNAPI Status Handshaking
USB Keystroke Delay
Scan one of the following barcodes to set the delay, in milliseconds, between emulated keystrokes. Select a longer delay for hosts that require slower data transmission.
* No Delay
Medium Delay (20 msec)
Long Delay (40 msec)
239
USB Interface
USB Caps Lock Override
This option applies only to the USB Keyboard HID device. Scan Override Caps Lock Key to preserve the case of the data regardless of the state of the Caps Lock key. This setting is always enabled for the Japanese Windows (ASCII) keyboard type and can not be disabled.
Override Caps Lock Key (Enable)
* Do Not Override Caps Lock Key
(Disable)
Barcodes with Unknown Characters
This option applies only to the USB Keyboard HID and IBM devices. Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. Scan Send Barcodes With Unknown Characters to send all barcode data except for unknown characters. The scanner issues no error beeps. Scan Do Not Send Barcodes With Unknown Characters for IBM devices to prevent sending barcodes containing at least one unknown character to the host, or for USB Keyboard HID devices to send the barcode characters up to the unknown character. The scanner issues an error beep.
* Send Barcodes with Unknown Characters
Do Not Send Barcodes with Unknown Characters
240
USB Interface
USB Convert Unknown to Code 39
This option applies only to the IBM hand-held, IBM table-top, and OPOS devices. Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable converting unknown barcode type data to Code 39.
Enable Convert Unknown to Code 39
* Disable Convert Unknown to Code 39
USB Fast HID
Scan Enable USB Fast HID to transmit USB HID data at a faster rate.
NOTE: Disable USB Fast HID if there are problems with transmission.
* Enable USB Fast HID
Disable USB Fast HID
241
USB Interface
USB Polling Interval
Scan one of the following barcodes to set the polling interval, which is the rate at which data transmits between the scanner and host computer. A lower number indicates a faster data rate.
NOTE: When changing the USB polling interval, the scanner restarts and issues a power-up beep sequence.
IMPORTANT: Ensure the host supports the selected data rate.
1 msec
* 3 msec
5 msec
2 msec 4 msec
242
USB Interface
USB Polling Interval (continued)
6 msec 8 msec
7 msec 9 msec
243
USB Interface
Keypad Emulation
Scan Enable Keypad Emulation to send all characters as ASCII sequences over the numeric keypad. For example, ASCII A transmits as "ALT make" 0 6 5 "ALT Break".
NOTE: If your keyboard type is not listed in the country code list (see Country Codes), disable Quick Keypad
Emulation and enable Keypad Emulation below.
* Enable Keypad Emulation
Disable Keypad Emulation
Quick Keypad Emulation
This option applies only to the USB Keyboard HID device when Keypad Emulation is enabled. Scan Enable Quick Keypad Emulation for a quicker method of emulation using the numeric keypad where ASCII sequences are only sent for ASCII characters not found on the keyboard.
* Enable Quick Keypad Emulation
Disable Quick Keypad Emulation
244
USB Interface
Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero
Scan Enable Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero to send character sequences sent over the numeric keypad as ISO characters which have a leading zero. For example, ASCII A transmits as "ALT MAKE" 0 0 6 5 "ALT BREAK".
* Enable Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero
Disable Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero
USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution
This option applies only to the USB Keyboard HID device. Scan Enable USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution to replace any FN1 character in a GS1 128 barcode with a user-selected Key Category and value. See FN1 Substitution Values on page 92 to set the Key Category and Key Value.
Enable USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution
* Disable USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution
245
USB Interface
Function Key Mapping
ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as a control-key sequence (see Table 33 on page 450). Scan Enable Function Key Mapping to send the keys in bold in place of the standard key mapping. Table entries that do not have a bold equivalent remain the same regardless of whether you enable this parameter.
Enable Function Key Mapping
* Disable Function Key Mapping
Simulated Caps Lock
Scan Enable Simulated Caps Lock to invert upper and lower case characters on the barcode as if the Caps Lock state is enabled on the keyboard. This inversion occurs regardless of the keyboard's Caps Lock state.
NOTES: - Simulated Caps Lock applies to ASCII characters only.
- Do not enable this parameter if any of the following parameters are enabled: USB Caps Lock Override on page 240 Convert All to Upper Case on page 247 Convert All to Lower Case on page 247
Enable Simulated Caps Lock
* Disable Simulated Caps Lock
246
USB Interface
Convert Case
Scan one of the following barcodes to convert all barcode data to the selected case.
NOTE: Convert Case applies to ASCII characters only.
* No Case Conversion
Convert All to Lower Case
Convert All to Upper Case
247
USB Interface
USB Static CDC
When disabled, each device connected consumes another COM port (first device = COM1, second device = COM2, third device = COM3, etc.) When enabled, each device connects to the same COM port.
* Enable USB Static CDC
Disable USB Static CDC
CDC Beep on <BEL>
If you enable this parameter, the scanner issues a beep when it detects a <BEL> character in USB CDC communications. <BEL> indicates an illegal entry or other important event.
* Enable CDC Beep on <BEL>
Disable CDC Beep on <BEL>
248
USB Interface
TGCS (IBM) USB Beep Directive
The host can send a beep configuration request to the scanner. Scan Ignore Beep Directive to prevent the scanner from processing the host request. All directives are still acknowledged to the USB host as if they were processed.
Honor Beep Directive
* Ignore Beep Directive TGCS (IBM) USB Barcode Configuration Directive
The host can enable and disable code types. Scan Ignore Barcode Configuration Directive to prevent the scanner from processing the host request. All directives are still acknowledged to the USB host as if they were processed.
Honor Barcode Configuration Directive
* Ignore Barcode Configuration Directive
TGCS (IBM) USB Specification Version
Select IBM Specification Level Version 0 (Original) to send the following code types as Unknown:
· Data Matrix · GS1 Data Matrix · QR Code · GS1 QR · MicroQR Code · Aztec
249
USB Interface
Select IBM Specification Level Version 2.2 to send the code types with the appropriate IBM identifiers.
IBM Specification Level Version 0 (Original)
* IBM Specification Level Version 2.2
USB CDC Host Variant
Parameter # 1713 (SSI # F8 06 B1)
The USB Airline/Airport(CUTE/CUSS/CUPS) CDC Host Variant feature is similar to the RS232 host variant(CUTE). It is now supported over USB CDC host mode. The scanner transmits data in Airline/Airport(CUTE/CUSS/CUPS) data format <Prefix><Data><Suffix>.
The USB Airline/Airport(CUTE/CUSS/CUPS) feature supports 2 CDC Host Variants. One for each ISV (Independent Software Vendor) spec: STIA and ARINC. The default USB CDC Host Variant is Standard CDC host mode.
Table 14 USB CDC Host Variant Parameter Values
CDC Host Variant CDC Standard (default) CDC SITA CDC TravelSky CDC ARINC
N06B100 N06B101 N06B102 N06B103
Parameter Value
Parameter Scanning Lockout
If the scanner is configured as USB CDC Host Variant (other than CDC Standard), it will disable all parameter barcodes scanning. To unlock, scan * Enable Parameter Barcode Scanning (1) on page 63.
Parameter Default
Enabling of any of the USB CDC Host Variant (other than CDC Standard) requires coercion of other parameters. The scanner updates the following parameters (Table2) to the specified default values based on the USB CDC Host Variant selected.
Table 15 Parameter Defaults for Airport Device Types
Parameter
SITA Defaults
IATA 2 of 5 (D 2 of 5) Parameter Scanning IATA 2 of 5 (D 2 of 5) Lengths
Enabled Disabled 6 to 55
I 2 of 5
Enabled
ARINC Defaults Enabled Disabled 6 to 55 Enabled
Travel Sky Defaults Enabled Disabled 6 to 56 Enabled
250
USB Interface
Parameter I 2 of 5 Lengths Micro PDF PDF417 Code 39 Code 128 Triggered Same Symbol Timeout Transmit Code ID
SITA Defaults 4 to 56 Enabled N/R N/R N/R Enabled Disabled
ARINC Defaults 4 to 56 N/R Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled
Travel Sky Defaults 4 to 56 Enabled N/R N/R N/R Enabled Disabled
Transmitting Data Formatting
· SITA Format - The USB SITA feature transmits data in SITA format: <STX><ID><DATA><CR><ETX>
Where: <STX> - 0X02 <ID> - Custom Code ID (see Table 16) <DATA> - Barcode decode data <CR> - 0x0d <ETX> - 0x03
Table 16 SITA Code ID
Code Type I 2 of 5 D 2 of 5, IATA Code 39 (all variants) Data Matrix Code 128 (all variants) PDF (all variants) QR Code (all variants) Aztec Code (all variants) UPCA, EAN13, (all supplemental variants) All others
Code ID Character 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A
None
· ARINC Format - The USB SITA feature transmits data in ARINC format:
<STX><DID><DOC><BID><DATA><ETX><CRC> Where:
<STX> - 0X02 <DID> - 0xB1 (DTYP and DNUM) <DOC> - 0x03 (Document Identifier) <BID> - Barcode Identifier (see Table 17) <DATA> - Barcode Decode Data <ETX> - 0x03 <CRC> - CRC-16
Table 17 ARINC Barcode Identifier
I 2 of 5 D 2 of 5 Code 39
Code Type
ASCII Value 1 2 3
251
USB Interface
Code Type
ASCII Value
Code 128
5
Code 39 with Check Digit*
8
D 2 of 5 with Check Digit*
9
I 2 of 5 with Check Digit*
0
2D Data Matix
4
2D QR
7
2D PDF
6
EAN 13 with Check Digit*
A
2D Aztec
8
All others
None
Note: Not supported on scanner; specified in ARINC spec.; No distinguish of Check Digits without AIM Code ID Transmit.
· TravelSky Format - The USB SITA feature transmits data in TravelSky format: <ID><DATA>
Where: <ID> - Custom Code ID (same as Table 16 on page 251) <DATA> - Barcode Decode Data
Select a USB CDC Host Variant.
Standard CDC TRVSKEY
252
SITA ARINC
USB Interface
ASCII Character Sets
See ASCII Character Sets for the following information:
· ASCII Character Set, Table 33 on page 450 · ALT Key Character Set, Table 34 on page 455 · GUI Key Character Set, Table 35 on page 456 · PF Key Character Set, Table 36 on page 457 · F Key Character Set, Table 37 on page 458 · Numeric Key Character Set, Table 38 on page 458 · Extended Key Character Set, Table 39 on page 459
253
SSI Interface
Introduction
This chapter describes the system requirements of the Simple Serial Interface (SSI), which provides a communications link between Zebra decoders (e.g., scan engines, slot scanners, hand-held scanners, two-dimensional scanners, Hands-free scanners, and RF base stations) and a serial host. It provides the means for the host to control the decoder or scanner.
Communication
All communication between the scanner and host occurs over the hardware interface lines using the SSI protocol. Refer to the Simple Serial Interface Programmer's Guide, p/n 72E-40451-xx, for more information on SSI. The host and the scanner exchange messages in packets. A packet is a collection of bytes framed by the proper SSI protocol formatting bytes. The maximum number of bytes per packet that the SSI protocol allows for any transaction is 257 (255 bytes + 2 byte checksum). Depending on the configuration, the scanner can send decode data as ASCII data (unpacketed), or as part of a larger message (packeted). SSI performs the following functions for the host device:
· Maintains a bi-directional interface with the scanner · Allows the host to send commands that control the scanner · Passes data from the scanner to a host device in SSI packet format or straight decode message.
The SSI environment consists of a scanner, a serial cable which attaches to the host device, and if required, a power supply. SSI transmits all decode data including special formatting (e.g., AIM ID). Parameter settings can control the format of the transmitted data. The scanner can also send parameter information, product identification information, or event codes to the host. All commands sent between the scanner and host must use the format described in the SSI Message Formats section. SSI Transactions on page 256 describes the required sequence of messages in specific cases.
254
SSI Interface
SSI Commands
Table 18 lists all the SSI opcodes the scanner supports. The host transmits opcodes designated type H. The scanner (decoder) transmits type D opcodes, and either can transmit Host/Decoder (H/D) types.
Table 18 SSI Commands Name
AIM_OFF AIM_ON BEEP CAPABILITIES_REPLY
CAPABILITIES_REQUEST CMD_ACK CMD_NAK DECODE_DATA EVENT LED_OFF LED_ON PARAM_DEFAULTS PARAM_REQUEST PARAM_SEND REPLY_REVISION
REQUEST_REVISION SCAN_DISABLE SCAN_ENABLE SLEEP START_DECODE STOP_DECODE WAKEUP
Type Opcode
Description
H
0xC4 Deactivate aim pattern.
H
0xC5 Activate aim pattern.
H
0xE6
Sound the beeper.
D
0xD4 Reply to CAPABILITIES_REQUEST; contains a list of the
capabilities and commands the decoder supports.
H
0xD3 Request capabilities report from the decoder.
H/D 0xD0 Positive acknowledgment of received packet.
H/D 0xD1 Negative acknowledgment of received packet.
D
0xF3
Decode data in SSI packet format.
D
0xF6
Event indicated by associated event code.
H
0xE8
De-activate LED output.
H
0xE7
Activate LED output.
H
0xC8 Set parameter default values.
H
0xC7 Request values of certain parameters.
H/D 0xC6 Send parameter values.
D
0xA4
Reply to REQUEST_REVISION, contains the decoder's
software/hardware configuration.
H
0xA3
Request the decoder's configuration.
H
0xEA Prevent the operator from scanning barcodes.
H
0xE9
Permit barcode scanning.
H
0xEB Request to place the decoder into low power.
H
0xE4
Tell the decoder to attempt to decode a barcode.
H
0xE5
Tell the decoder to abort a decode attempt.
H
N/A
Wake the decoder from low power mode.
For details of the SSI protocol, refer to the Simple Serial Interface Programmer's Guide.
255
SSI Interface
SSI Transactions
General Data Transactions
ACK/NAK Handshaking
If you enable ACK/NAK handshaking (the default), all packeted messages must have a CMD_ACK or CMD_NAK response, unless the command description states otherwise. Zebra recommends leaving this handshaking enabled to provide feedback to the host. Raw decode data and WAKEUP do not use ACK/NAK handshaking since they are not packeted data. Following is an example of a problem which can occur if you disable ACK/NAK handshaking:
· The host sends a PARAM_SEND message to the scanner to change the baud rate from 9600 to 19200. · The scanner cannot interpret the message. · The scanner does not implement the change the host requested. · The host assumes that the parameter change occurred and acts accordingly. · Communication is lost because the change did not occur on both sides.
If you enable ACK/NAK handshaking, the following occurs:
· The host sends a PARAM_SEND message. · The scanner cannot interpret the message. · The scanner CMD_NAKs the message. · The host resends the message. · The scanner receives the message successfully, responds with CMD_ACK, and implements parameter
changes.
256
SSI Interface
Decoded Data Transmission
The Decode Data Packet Format parameter controls how decode data is sent to the host. Set this parameter to send the data in a DECODE_DATA packet. Clear this parameter to transmit the data as raw ASCII data.
NOTE: When transmitting decode data as raw ASCII data, ACK/NAK handshaking does not apply regardless of
the state of the ACK/NAK handshaking parameter.
ACK/NAK Enabled and Packeted Data
The scanner sends a DECODE_DATA message after a successful decode. The scanner waits for a programmable timeout for a CMD_ACK response. If it does not receive the response, the scanner tries to send two more times before issuing a host transmission error. If the scanner receives a CMD_NAK from the host, it may attempt a retry depending on the cause field of the CMD_NAK message.
Decoder
Data is captured by decoder
(1) DECODE_DATA
(2) CMD_ACK message sent
Host
ACK/NAK Enabled and Unpacketed ASCII Data
Even if ACK/NAK handshaking is enabled, no handshaking occurs because handshaking applies only to packeted data. In this example the packeted_decode parameter is disabled.
Decoder
Data is captured by decoder
ASCII data
Host
257
SSI Interface
ACK/NAK Disabled and Packeted DECODE_DATA
In this example ACK/NAK does not occur even though packeted_decode is enabled because the ACK/NAK handshaking parameter is disabled.
Decoder
Data is captured by decoder
(1) DECODE_DATA
message sent
Host
ACK/NAK Disabled and Unpacketed ASCII Data
The decoder sends captured data to the host.
Decoder
Data is captured by decoder
(1) ASCII data sent
Host
Communication Summary
RTS/CTS Lines
All communication must use RTS/CTS handshaking as described in the Simple Serial Interface Programmer's Guide, p/n 72E-40451-xx. If bypassing hardware handshaking, the host must send the WAKEUP command before all other communication or the first byte of a message can be lost during the scanner wakeup sequence. Zebra recommends not bypassing RTS/CTS hardware handshaking.
ACK/NAK Option
ACK/NAK handshaking is enabled by default and Zebra recommends leaving it enabled. Disabling this can cause communication problems, as handshaking is the only acknowledgment that a message was received correctly. ACK/NAK is not used with unpacketed decode data regardless of whether it is enabled.
Number of Data Bits
All communication with the scanner must use 8-bit data.
258
SSI Interface
Serial Response Timeout
The Host Serial Response Timeout parameter determines how long to wait for a handshaking response before trying again or aborting further attempts. Set the same value for both the host and scanner.
NOTE: You can temporarily change the Host Serial Response Timeout when the host takes longer to process
an ACK or longer data string. Zebra does not recommend frequent permanent changes due to limited write cycles of non-volatile memory.
Retries
The host resends data twice after the initial send if the scanner does not respond with an ACK or NAK (if ACK/NAK handshaking is enabled), or response data (e.g., PARAM_SEND, REPLY_REVISION). If the scanner replies with a NAK RESEND, the host resends the data. All resent messages must have the resend bit set in the Status byte. The scanner resends data two times after the initial send if the host fails to reply with an ACK or NAK (if ACK/NAK handshaking is enabled).
Baud Rate, Stop Bits, Parity, Response Timeout, ACK/NAK Handshaking
If you use PARAM_SEND to change these serial parameters, the ACK response to the PARAM_SEND uses the previous values for these parameters. The new values then take effect for the next transaction.
Errors
The scanner issues a communication error when:
· The CTS line is asserted when the scanner tries to transmit, and is still asserted on each of two successive
retries
· The scanner does not receive an ACK or NAK after initial transmit and two resends.
SSI Communication Notes
· When not using hardware handshaking, space messages sufficiently apart. The host must not
communicate with the scanner if the scanner is transmitting.
· When using hardware handshaking, frame each message properly with handshaking signals. Do not try to
send two commands within the same handshaking frame.
· There is a permanent/temporary bit in the PARAM_SEND message. Removing power from the scanner
discards temporary changes. Permanent changes are written to non-volatile memory. Frequent changes shorten the life of the non-volatile memory.
259
SSI Interface
Using Time Delay to Low Power Mode with SSI
Time Delay to Low Power Mode on page 71 provides options to select a general time delay. To program a more specific delay value, use an SSI command according to Table 19.
Table 19 Values for Selecting Time Delay to Low Power
Value
Timeout
Value
Timeout
Value
0x00
15 Min
0x10
1 Sec
0x20
0x01
30 Min
0x11
1 Sec
0x21
0x02
60 Min
0x12
2 Sec
0x22
0x03
90 Min
0x13
3 Sec
0x23
N/A
N/A
0x14
4 Sec
0x24
N/A
N/A
0x15
5 Sec
0x25
N/A
N/A
0x16
6 Sec
0x26
N/A
N/A
0x17
7 Sec
0x27
N/A
N/A
0x18
8 Sec
0x28
N/A
N/A
0x19
9 Sec
0x29
N/A
N/A
0x1A
10 Sec
0x2A
N/A
N/A
0x1B
15 Sec
0x2B
N/A
N/A
0x1C
20 Sec
0x2C
N/A
N/A
0x1D
30 Sec
0x2D
N/A
N/A
0x1E
45 Sec
0x2E
N/A
N/A
0x1F
60 Sec
0x2F
Timeout 1 Min 1 Min 2 Min 3 Min 4 Min 5 Min 6 Min 7 Min 8 Min 9 Min 10 Min 15 Min 20 Min 30 Min 45 Min 60 Min
Value 0x30 0x31 0x32 0x33 0x34 0x35 0x36 0x37 0x38 0x39 0x3A 0x3B 0x3C 0x3D 0x3E 0x3F
Timeout 1 Hour 1 Hour 2 Hours 3 Hours 4 Hours 5 Hours 6 Hours 7 Hours 8 Hours 9 Hours 10 Hours 15 Hours 20 Hours 30 Hours 45 Hours 60 Hours
CAUTION:With hardware handshaking disabled, the scanner wakes from low power mode upon receiving a
character. However, the scanner does not process this character or any others it receives during the 10 ms period following wakeup. Wait at least 10 ms after wakeup to send valid characters.
260
SSI Interface
Encapsulation of RSM Commands/Responses over SSI
The SSI protocol allows the host to send a command that is variable in length up to 255 bytes. Although there is a provision in the protocol to multi-packet commands from the host, the scanner does not support this. The host must fragment packets using the provisions in the RSM protocol.
Command Structure
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
0
Length (not including the checksum)
1
SSI_MGMT_COMMAND (0x80)
2
Message Source (4 - Host)
3
Reserved (0)
Reserved (0)
4
Payload data (see the following example)
...
Length -1
Length
2's complement checksum (MSB)
Length +1 2's complement checksum (LSB)
2 Reserved (0)
1
0
Cont'd packet Retransmit
The expected positive response is SSI_MGMT_COMMAND which can be a multi-packet response. Devices that do not support this command respond with the standard SSI_NAK.
Response Structure
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
0
Length (not including the checksum)
1
SSI_MGMT_COMMAND (0x80)
2
Message Source (0 - Decoder)
3
Reserved (0)
Reserved (0)
4
Payload data (see the following example)
...
Length -1
Length
2's complement checksum (MSB)
Length +1 2's complement checksum (LSB)
2 Reserved (0)
1
0
Cont'd packet Retransmit
261
SSI Interface
Example Transaction
The following example illustrates how to retrieve diagnostic information (Diagnostic Testing and Reporting (Attribute #10061) decimal) from the scanner using encapsulation of RSM commands over SSI. Before sending an RSM command, the host must send the RSM Get Packet Size command to query the packet size supported by the device.
Command from Host to Query Packet Size Supported by Device
0A 80 04 00 00 06 20 00 FF FF FD 4E Where:
· 0A 80 04 00 is encapsulation of RSM commands over SSI command header · 00 06 20 00 FF FF is RSM Get Packet Size command · FD 4E is SSI command checksum
Response from Device with Packet Size Information
0C 80 00 00 00 08 20 00 00 F0 00 F0 FD 6C Where:
· 0C 80 00 00 is encapsulation of RSM command over SSI command header · 00 08 20 00 00 F0 00 F0 is RSM Get Packet Size response · FD 6C is SSI response checksum
Command from Host to Retrieve Diagnostic Information
0C 80 04 00 00 08 02 00 27 4D 42 00 FE B0 Where:
· 0C 80 04 00 is encapsulation of RSM commands over SSI command header · 00 08 02 00 27 4D 42 00 is attribute Get command requesting attribute 10061 decimal · FE B0 is SSI command checksum
Response from Device with Diagnostic Information
21 80 00 00 00 1D 02 00 27 4D 41 01 42 00 0E 00 00 00 00 01 03 02 03 03 03 04 03 05 03 06 03 FF FF FC 15 Where:
· 21 80 00 00 00 1D 02 00 27 4D 41 01 42 00 0E 00 00 is encapsulation of RSM responses over SSI
command header
· 00 00 01 03 02 03 03 03 04 03 05 03 06 03 is attribute Get response which includes diagnostic report
value
· FF FF is attribute Get response, packet termination · FC 15 is SSI response checksum
262
SSI Interface
Setting Parameters
This section describes how to set up the scanner with an SSI host. When using SSI, program the scanner via barcode menu or SSI hosts commands. The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 20 on page 264 (also see Parameter Defaults for all defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary. To set feature values, scan a single barcode or a short barcode sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the scanner powers down.
NOTE: Most computer monitors allow scanning barcodes directly on the screen. When scanning from the
screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the barcode clearly, and bars and/or spaces do not merge.
To return all features to default values, scan Set Factory Defaults on page 62. Throughout the programming
barcode menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
* Indicates default
*Enable Parameter
(1)
Feature/option Option value
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to set the baud rate to 19,200, scan the Baud Rate 19,200 barcode under Baud Rate on page 265. The scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry. Other parameters require scanning several barcodes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
263
SSI Interface
Simple Serial Interface Parameter Defaults
Table 18 lists defaults for SSI host parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
· Scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in
memory. To recall default parameter values, see Default Parameters on page 62.
· Download data through the device's serial port using SSI. Hexadecimal parameter numbers appear in this
chapter below the parameter title, and option values appear in parenthesis beneath the accompanying barcodes. Refer to the Simple Serial Interface (SSI) Programmer's Guide for detailed instructions for changing parameters using this method.
NOTE: SSI interprets Prefix, Suffix1, and Suffix2 values listed in ASCII Character Set on page 450 differently
than other interfaces. SSI does not recognize key categories, only the 3-digit decimal value. The default value of 7013 is interpreted as CR only.
NOTE: See Parameter Defaults for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default
parameters.
Table 20 SSI Interface Default Table
Parameter
Parameter Number
SSI Host Parameters
Select SSI Host
N/A
Baud Rate
156
Parity
158
Check Parity
151
Stop Bits
157
Software Handshaking
159
Host RTS Line State
154
Decode Data Packet Format
238
Host Serial Response Timeout
155
Host Character Timeout
239
Multipacket Option
334
Interpacket Delay
335
Event Reporting
Decode Event
256
Boot Up Event
258
Parameter Event
259
SSI Number
Default
N/A 9Ch 9Eh 97h 9Dh 9Fh 9Ah EEh 9Bh EFh F0h 4Eh F0h 4Fh
N/A 9600 None Disable 1 ACK/NAK Low Send Raw Decode Data Low - 2 Seconds Low - 200 msec Multipacket Option 1 Minimum - 0 msec
F0h 00h F0h 02h F0h 03h
Disable Disable Disable
Page Number
265 265 267 268 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275
276 277 278
264
SSI Interface
SSI Host Parameters
Select SSI Host
To select SSI as the host interface, scan the following barcode.
SSI Host
Baud Rate Parameter # 156 SSI # 9Ch
Baud rate is the number of bits of data transmitted per second. Scan one of the following barcodes to set the scanner's baud rate to match the baud rate setting of the host device. Otherwise, data may not reach the host device or may reach it in distorted form.
* Baud Rate 9600 (6)
Baud Rate 38,400 (8)
Baud Rate 19,200 (7)
Baud Rate 57,600 (10)
265
Baud Rate (continued)
SSI Interface
Baud Rate 115,200 (11)
Baud Rate 230,400 (13)
Baud Rate 460,800 (14)
Baud Rate 921,600 (15)
266
SSI Interface
Parity Parameter # 158 SSI # 9Eh
A parity check bit is the most significant bit of each ASCII coded character. Scan one of the following barcodes to select the parity type according to host device requirements:
· Odd - This sets the parity bit value to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that the coded character contains an
odd number of 1 bits.
· Even - This sets the parity bit value to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that the coded character contains
an even number of 1 bits.
· None - No parity bit is required.
Odd (2)
* None (0)
Even (1)
267
SSI Interface
Check Parity Parameter # 151 SSI # 97h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether to check the parity of received characters. See Parity to select the type of parity.
* Do Not Check Parity (0)
Check Parity (1)
Stop Bits Parameter # 157 SSI # 9Dh
The stop bit(s) at the end of each transmitted character marks the end of transmission of one character and prepares the receiving device for the next character in the serial data stream. Scan one of the following barcodes to set the number of stop bits (one or two) based on the number the receiving host can accommodate.
* 1 Stop Bit (1)
2 Stop Bits (2)
268
SSI Interface
Software Handshaking Parameter # 159 SSI # 9Fh
This parameter offers control of data transmission in addition to the control hardware handshaking offers. Hardware handshaking is always enabled; you cannot disable it. Options:
· Disable ACK/NAK Handshaking - The scanner neither generates nor expects ACK/NAK handshaking
packets.
· Enable ACK/NAK Handshaking - After transmitting data, the scanner expects either an ACK or NAK
response from the host. The scanner also ACKs or NAKs messages from the host.
The scanner waits up to the programmable Host Serial Response Timeout to receive an ACK or NAK. If the scanner does not get a response in this time, it resends its data up to two times before discarding the data and declaring a transmission error.
Disable ACK/NAK (0)
* Enable ACK/NAK (1)
269
SSI Interface
Host RTS Line State Parameter # 154 SSI # 9Ah
Scan one of the following barcodes to set the expected idle state of the Serial Host RTS line. The SSI interface is used with host applications which also implement the SSI protocol. However, you can use the scanner in a "scan-and-transmit" mode to communicate with any standard serial communication software on a host PC (see Decode Data Packet Format on page 271). If transmission errors occur in this mode, the host PC may be asserting hardware handshaking lines which interfere with the SSI protocol. Scan the High barcode to address this problem.
* Low (0)
High (1)
270
SSI Interface
Decode Data Packet Format Parameter # 238 SSI # EEh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether to transmit decoded data in raw format (unpacketed), or with the packet format defined by the serial protocol. Selecting the raw format disables ACK/NAK handshaking for decode data.
* Send Raw Decode Data (0)
Send Packeted Decode Data (1)
271
SSI Interface
Host Serial Response Timeout Parameter # 155 SSI # 9Bh
Scan one of the following barcodes to specify how long the scanner waits for an ACK or NAK before resending. Also, if the scanner wants to send, and the host has already been granted permission to send, the scanner waits for the designated timeout before declaring an error.
NOTE: Other values are available via SSI commands.
* Low - 2 Seconds (20)
High - 7.5 Seconds (75)
Medium - 5 Seconds (50)
Maximum - 9.9 Seconds (99)
272
SSI Interface
Host Character Timeout Parameter # 239 SSI # EFh
Scan one of the following barcodes to specify the maximum time the scanner waits between characters transmitted by the host before discarding the received data and declaring an error.
NOTE: Other values are available via SSI commands.
* Low - 200 msec (20)
High - 750 msec (75)
Medium - 500 msec (50)
Maximum - 990 msec (99)
273
SSI Interface
Multipacket Option Parameter # 334 SSI # F0h 4Eh
Scan one of the following barcodes to control ACK/NAK handshaking for multi-packet transmissions:
· Multi-Packet Option 1 - The host sends an ACK/NAK for each data packet during a multi-packet
transmission.
· Multi-Packet Option 2 - The scanner sends data packets continuously, with no ACK/NAK handshaking to
pace the transmission. The host, if overrun, can use hardware handshaking to temporarily delay scanner transmissions. At the end of transmission, the scanner waits for a CMD_ACK or CMD_NAK.
· Multi-Packet Option 3 - This is the same as option 2 with the addition of a programmable interpacket
delay. See Interpacket Delay on page 275 to set this delay.
* Multipacket Option 1 (0)
Multipacket Option 3 (2)
Multipacket Option 2 (1)
274
SSI Interface
Interpacket Delay Parameter # 335 SSI # F0h 4Fh
Scan one of the following barcodes to specify the interpacket delay if you selected Multipacket Option 3.
NOTE: Other values are available via SSI commands.
* Minimum - 0 msec
(0)
Medium - 50 msec (50)
Maximum - 99 msec (99)
275
Low - 25 msec (25)
High - 75 msec (75)
SSI Interface
Event Reporting
The host can request the scanner to provide certain information (events) relative to scanner behavior. Scan the following barcodes to enable or disable the events listed in Table 21 and on the following pages.
Table 21 Event Codes
Event Class
Event
Decode Event
Non-parameter decode
Boot Up Event
System power-up
Parameter Event
Parameter entry error
Parameter stored
Defaults set (and parameter event is enabled by default)
Number expected
Code Reported 0x01 0x03 0x07 0x08 0x0A 0x0F
Decode Event Parameter # 256
SSI # F0h 00h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Decode Event.
· Enable Decode Event - The scanner generates a message to the host upon a successful barcode
decode.
· Disable Decode Event - No notification is sent.
Enable Decode Event (1)
* Disable Decode Event (0)
276
SSI Interface
Boot Up Event Parameter # 258 SSI # F0h 02h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Boot Up Event:
· Enable Boot Up Event - The scanner generates a message to the host whenever power is applied. · Disable Boot Up Event - No notification is sent.
Enable Boot Up Event (1)
* Disable Boot Up Event (0)
277
SSI Interface
Parameter Event Parameter # 259 SSI # F0h 03h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Parameter Event:
· Enable Parameter Event - The scanner generates a message to the host when one of the events
specified in Table 21 on page 276 occurs.
· Disable Parameter Event - No notification is sent.
Enable Parameter Event (1)
* Disable Parameter Event (0)
278
RS-232 Interface
Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up the scanner with an RS-232 host. The scanner uses the RS-232 interface to connect to point-of-sale devices, host computers, or other devices with an available RS-232 port (e.g., com port). The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 22 on page 281 (also see Parameter Defaults for all defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary. If your host does not appear in Table 23, refer to the documentation for the host device to set communication parameters to match the host.
NOTE: The scanner uses TTL RS-232 signal levels, which interface with most system architectures. For system
architectures requiring RS-232C signal levels, Zebra offers different cables providing TTL-to-RS-232C conversion. Contact support for more information.
Setting Parameters
To set feature values, scan a single barcode or a short barcode sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the scanner powers down.
NOTE: Most computer monitors allow scanning barcodes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen,
be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the barcode clearly, and bars and/or spaces do not merge.
To return all features to default values, scan Set Factory Defaults on page 62. Throughout the programming
barcode menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
* Indicates default * Enable Parameter
Feature/option
279
RS-232 Interface
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to set the baud rate to 19,200, scan the Baud Rate 19,200 barcode under Baud Rate on page 286. The scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry. Other parameters require scanning several barcodes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
Connecting an RS-232 Interface
Connect the scanner directly to the host computer. Figure 20 RS-232 Connection
Serial Port Connector to Host
Interface Cable
Power Supply Cable
1. Attach the modular connector of the RS-232 interface cable to the cable interface port on the scanner. See Inserting the Interface Cable on page 31.
NOTE: Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors can be different than those
illustrated in Figure 1, but the steps to connect the scanner are the same.
2. Connect the other end of the RS-232 interface cable to the serial port on the host. 3. If required, connect the power supply to the serial connector end of the RS-232 interface cable. Plug the power
supply into an appropriate outlet. 4. The scanner automatically detects the host interface type and uses the default setting. If the default (*) does
not meet your requirements, select another RS-232 host type by scanning the appropriate barcode from RS-232 Host Types on page 284. 5. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter.
If problems occur with the system, see Troubleshooting on page 51.
280
RS-232 Interface
RS-232 Parameter Defaults
Table 22 lists defaults for RS-232 host parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
· Scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in
memory. To recall default parameter values, see Default Parameters on page 62.
· Configure the scanner using the 123Scan configuration program. See 123Scan and Software Tools.
NOTE: See Parameter Defaults for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 22 RS-232 Interface Parameter Defaults
Parameter
RS-232 Host Parameters RS-232 Host Types Baud Rate Parity Stop Bits Data Bits Check Receive Errors Hardware Handshaking Software Handshaking Host Serial Response Timeout RTS Line State Beep on <BEL> Intercharacter Delay Nixdorf Beep/LED Options Barcodes with Unknown Characters
Default
Page Number
Standard
284
9600
286
None
287
1 Stop Bit
287
8-bit
288
Enable
288
None
289
None
291
2 Seconds
293
Low RTS
294
Disable
294
0 msec
295
Normal Operation
296
Send Barcode With Unknown 296 Characters
281
RS-232 Interface
RS-232 Host Parameters
Various RS-232 hosts use their own parameter default settings. Selecting standard, ICL, Fujitsu, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode A, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode B, OPOS/JPOS, Olivetti, Omron, or Common Use Terminal Equipment (CUTE-LP/LG barcode readers) sets the defaults listed in Table 23.
Table 23 Terminal Specific RS-232
Wincor-
Wincor-
Parameter
ICL
Fujitsu Nixdorf Nixdorf Mode Olivetti
Omron
CUTE
Mode A B/OPOS/JPOS
Transmit
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Code ID
Yes
Yes
Yes
Data
Data/
Transmission Suffix
Format
Data/ Suffix
Data/ Suffix
Data/ Suffix
Prefix/Data/ Data/
Suffix
Suffix
Prefix/ Data/ Suffix
Suffix
CR (1013) CR (1013) CR (1013) CR (1013)
ETX (1002) CR (1013)
CR (1013) ETX (1003)
Baud Rate 9600
9600
9600
9600
9600
9600
9600
Parity
Even
None
Odd
Odd
Even
None
None
Hardware
RTS/CTS None
Handshaking Option 3
RTS/CTS RTS/CTS Option 3 Option 3
None
None
None
Software
None
Handshaking
None
None
None
ACK/NAK None
None
Serial Response Timeout
9.9 Sec. 2 Sec.
None
None
9.9 Sec.
9.9 Sec. 9.9 Sec.
Stop Bit
One
One
One
One
Select
One
One
One
ASCII Format 8-Bit
8-Bit
8-Bit
8-Bit
7-Bit
8-Bit
8-Bit
Beep On <BEL>
Disable Disable Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
In the Wincor-Nixdorf Mode A/B, if CTS is low, scanning is disabled. When CTS is high, scanning is enabled.
If you scan Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode A/B without connecting the scanner to the proper host, it may appear unable to scan. If this happens, scan a different RS-232 host type within 5 seconds of cycling power to the scanner.
The CUTE host disables all parameter scanning, including Set Defaults. If you inadvertently select CUTE, scan * Enable Parameter Barcode Scanning (1) on page 63, then change the host selection.
282
RS-232 Interface
Table 23 Terminal Specific RS-232 (Continued)
Wincor-
Wincor-
Parameter
ICL
Fujitsu Nixdorf Nixdorf Mode Olivetti
Omron
CUTE
Mode A B/OPOS/JPOS
RTS Line
High
Low
Low
State
Low = No data Low to send
High
High
Prefix
None
None
None
None
STX (1003) None
STX (1002)
In the Wincor-Nixdorf Mode A/B, if CTS is low, scanning is disabled. When CTS is high, scanning is enabled.
If you scan Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode A/B without connecting the scanner to the proper host, it may appear unable to scan. If this happens, scan a different RS-232 host type within 5 seconds of cycling power to the scanner.
The CUTE host disables all parameter scanning, including Set Defaults. If you inadvertently select CUTE, scan * Enable Parameter Barcode Scanning (1) on page 63, then change the host selection.
Selecting ICL, Fujitsu, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode A, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode B, OPOS/JPOS, Olivetti, Omron, or CUTE-LP/LG barcode readers transmits the code ID characters listed in Table 24. These code ID characters are not programmable and are separate from the Transmit Code ID feature. Do not enable the Transmit Code ID feature for these terminals.
Table 24 Terminal Specific Code ID Characters
Code Type
Wincor-
ICL
Fujitsu Nixdorf
Mode A
UPC-A
A
A
A
UPC-E
E
E
C
EAN-8/JAN-8
FF
FF
B
EAN-13/JAN-13 F
F
A
Code 39
C <len> None
M
Code 39 Full ASCII None
None
M
Codabar
N <len> None
N
Code 128
L <len> None
K
I 2 of 5
I <len> None
I
Code 93
None
None
L
D 2 of 5
H <len> None
H
GS1-128
L <len> None
P
MSI
None
None
O
Bookland EAN
F
F
A
Trioptic
None
None
None
Code 11
None
None
None
Wincor-Nixdorf Mode B/
OPOS/JPOS A C B A M M N K I L H P O A None None
Olivetti
A C B A M <len> None N <len> K <len> I <len> L <len> H <len> P <len> O <len> A None None
Omron
A E FF F C <len> None N <len> L <len> I <len> None H <len> L <len> None F None None
CUTE
A None None A 3 3 None 5 1 None 2 5 None None None None
283
RS-232 Interface
Table 24 Terminal Specific Code ID Characters (Continued)
Code Type
Wincor- Wincor-Nixdorf
ICL
Fujitsu Nixdorf
Mode B/
Mode A
OPOS/JPOS
IATA
H<len> None
H
H
Code 32
None
None
None
None
GS1 DataBar
None
None
E
E
Variants
PDF417
None
None
Q
Q
Data Matrix
None
None
R
R
GS1 Data Matrix None
None
W
W
QR Codes
None
None
U
U
GS1 QR
None
None
X
X
Aztec/Aztec Rune None
None
V
V
Maxicode
None
None
T
T
MicroPDF
None
None
S
S
Olivetti
H<len> None None
None None None None None None None None
Omron
H<len> None None
None None None None None None None None
CUTE
2 None None
6 4 None 7 None 8 None 6
RS-232 Host Types
To select an RS-232 host interface, scan one of the following barcodes.
NOTE: For a list of supported scanner functionality by communication protocol, see Communication Protocol
Functionality.
* Standard RS-2321
Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode A
284
ICL RS-232
RS-232 Interface
RS-232 Host Types (continued)
Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode B
Olivetti ORS4500
OPOS/JPOS
Omron
Fujitsu RS-232
CUTE2 1Scanning Standard RS-232 activates the RS-232 driver, but does not change port settings (e.g., parity, data bits, handshaking). Selecting another RS-232 host type barcode changes these settings. 2The CUTE host disables all parameter scanning, including Set Defaults. If you inadvertently select CUTE, scan * Enable Parameter Barcode Scanning (1) on page 63, and then change the host selection.
285
RS-232 Interface
Baud Rate
Baud rate is the number of bits of data transmitted per second. Scan one of the following barcodes to set the scanner's baud rate to match the baud rate setting of the host device. Otherwise, data may not reach the host device or may reach it in distorted form.
Baud Rate 4800 Baud Rate 19,200 Baud Rate 57,600
* Baud Rate 9600
Baud Rate 38,400 Baud Rate 115,200
286
RS-232 Interface
Parity
A parity check bit is the most significant bit of each ASCII coded character. Scan one of the following barcodes to select the parity type according to host device requirements:
· Odd - This sets the parity bit value to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that the coded character contains an
odd number of 1 bits.
· Even - This sets the parity bit value to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that the coded character contains
an even number of 1 bits.
· None - No parity bit is required.
Odd
Even
* None
Stop Bits
The stop bit(s) at the end of each transmitted character marks the end of transmission of one character and prepares the receiving device for the next character in the serial data stream. Scan one of the following barcodes to set the number of stop bits (one or two) based on the number the receiving host can accommodate.
* 1 Stop Bit
2 Stop Bits
287
RS-232 Interface
Data Bits
This parameter allows the scanner to interface with devices requiring a 7-bit or 8-bit ASCII protocol. 7-bit
* 8-bit Check Receive Errors
Scan one of the following barcodes to set whether to check the parity, framing, and overrun of received characters. The parity value of received characters is verified against the value set for Parity on page 287.
* Check For Received Errors
Do Not Check For Received Errors
288
RS-232 Interface
Hardware Handshaking
The data interface consists of an RS-232 port designed to operate either with or without the hardware handshaking lines Request to Send (RTS) and Clear to Send (CTS). If hardware handshaking and software handshaking are both enabled, hardware handshaking takes precedence.
NOTE: The DTR signal is jumpered to the active state.
Options:
· None - This disables hardware handshaking and transmits scan data as it becomes available. · Standard RTS/CTS - This sets standard RTS/CTS hardware handshaking and transmits scanned data
according to the following sequence: a. The scanner reads the CTS line for activity:
· If the CTS line is de-asserted, the scanner asserts the RTS line and waits up to Host Serial Response
Timeout on page 293 for the host to assert CTS, and then transmits data when asserted. If, after the timeout, the CTS line is not asserted, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data.
· If CTS is asserted, the scanner waits up to Host Serial Response Timeout for the host to de-assert
CTS. If after this timeout the CTS line is still asserted, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the scanned data. b. The scanner de-asserts RTS after sending the last character of data. c. The host negates CTS. The scanner checks for a de-asserted CTS upon the next data transmission. During data transmission, if CTS is deasserted for more than 50 ms between characters, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data. The data must be re-scanned.
· RTS/CTS Option 1 - The scanner asserts RTS before transmitting and ignores the state of CTS. The
scanner de-asserts RTS when transmission completes.
· RTS/CTS Option 2 - RTS is always high or low (user-programmed logic level). However, the scanner
waits for the host to assert CTS before transmitting data. If CTS is not asserted within the Host Serial Response Timeout, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data. During data transmission, if CTS is deasserted for more than 50 ms between characters, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data.
· RTS/CTS Option 3 - This transmits scanned data according to the following sequence:
d. The scanner asserts RTS before data transmission, regardless of the state of CTS. e. The scanner waits up to the Host Serial Response Timeout for the host to assert CTS, and then transmits
data when asserted. If, after the timeout, the CTS line is not asserted, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data. f. The scanner de-asserts RTS after sending the last character of data. g. The host negates CTS. The scanner checks for a de-asserted CTS upon the next data transmission. During data transmission, if CTS is deasserted for more than 50 ms between characters, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data. The data must be re-scanned.
289
RS-232 Interface
Hardware Handshaking (continued) * None
Standard RTS/CTS RTS/CTS Option 1
RTS/CTS Option 2 RTS/CTS Option 3
290
RS-232 Interface
Software Handshaking
This parameter offers control of data transmission in addition to, or instead of, that offered by hardware handshaking. If software handshaking and hardware handshaking are both enabled, hardware handshaking takes precedence. Options:
· None - This transmits data immediately. The scanner expects no response from the host. · ACK/NAK - After transmitting data, the scanner waits for an ACK or NAK response from the host. If it
receives a NAK, the scanner transmits the data again and waits for an ACK or NAK. After three unsuccessful attempts to send data after receiving NAKs, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data. The scanner waits up to the programmable Host Serial Response Timeout to receive an ACK or NAK. If the scanner does not get a response in this time, it sounds a transmit error and discards the data. There are no reattempts.
· ENQ - The scanner waits for an ENQ character from the host before transmitting data. If it does not receive
an ENQ within the Host Serial Response Timeout, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data. The host must transmit an ENQ character at least every Host Serial Response Timeout to prevent transmission errors.
· ACK/NAK with ENQ - This combines the two previous options. An additional ENQ is not required to
re-transmit data due to a NAK from the host.
· XON/XOFF - An XOFF character stops data transmission until the scanner receives an XON character.
There are two situations for XON/XOFF:
· The scanner receives an XOFF before it has data to send. When the scanner has data, it waits up to
the Host Serial Response Timeout for an XON character before transmitting. If it does not receive the XON within this time, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data.
· The scanner receives an XOFF during data transmission and stops transmission after sending the
current byte. When the scanner receives an XON character, it sends the rest of the data. The scanner waits indefinitely for the XON.
291
RS-232 Interface
Software Handshaking (continued)
* None
ENQ XON/XOFF
ACK/NAK ACK/NAK with ENQ
292
RS-232 Interface
Host Serial Response Timeout
Scan one of the following barcodes to specify how long the scanner waits for an ACK, NAK, or CTS before determining that a transmission error occurred. This only applies when in one of the ACK/NAK software handshaking modes, or RTS/CTS hardware handshaking mode.
* Minimum: 2 Seconds
Low: 2.5 Seconds
Medium: 5 Seconds
High: 7.5 Seconds
Maximum: 9.9 Seconds
293
RS-232 Interface
RTS Line State
Scan one of the following barcodes to set the idle state of the serial host RTS line to Low RTS or High RTS.
* Host: Low RTS
Host: High RTS
Beep on <BEL>
Scan one of the following barcodes to set whether the scanner issues a beep when it detects a <BEL> character on the RS-232 serial line. <BEL> indicates an illegal entry or other important event.
Beep On <BEL> Character (Enable)
* Do Not Beep On <BEL> Character
(Disable)
294
RS-232 Interface
Intercharacter Delay
Scan one of the following barcodes to specify the intercharacter delay inserted between character transmissions.
* Minimum: 0 msec
Low: 25 msec Medium: 50 msec
High: 75 msec Maximum: 99 msec
295
RS-232 Interface
Nixdorf Beep/LED Options
If you selected Nixdorf Mode B, scan one of the following barcodes to indicate when the scanner beeps and turns on its LED after a decode.
* Normal Operation
(Beep/LED Immediately After Decode)
Beep/LED After Transmission
Beep/LED After CTS Pulse
Barcodes with Unknown Characters
Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. Scan Send Barcodes With Unknown Characters to send all barcode data except for unknown characters. The scanner issues no error beeps. Scan Do Not Send Barcodes With Unknown Characters to send barcode data up to the first unknown character. The scanner issues an error beep.
* Send Barcodes With Unknown Characters
Do Not Send Barcodes With Unknown Characters
296
RS-232 Interface
ASCII Character Sets
See ASCII Character Set, Table 33 on page 450, for prefix/suffix values
297
IBM Interface
Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up the scanner with an IBM 468X/469X host. The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 25 on page 300 (also see Parameter Defaults for all defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.
Setting Parameters
To set feature values, scan a single barcode or a short barcode sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the scanner powers down.
NOTE: Most computer monitors allow scanning barcodes directly on the screen. When scanning from the
screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the barcode clearly, and bars and/or spaces do not merge.
To return all features to default values, scan Set Factory Defaults on page 62. Throughout the programming
barcode menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
* Indicates default * Enable Parameter
Feature/option
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to select the Port 9B address, scan the Hand-held Scanner Emulation (Port 9B) barcode under Port Address on page 301. The scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry. Other parameters require scanning several barcodes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
298
IBM Interface
Connecting an IBM 468X/469X Host
Connect the scanner directly to the host computer. Figure 21 IBM Connection
Interface Cable
Host Port Connector
1. Attach the modular connector of the IBM 46XX interface cable to the cable interface port on the scanner. See Inserting the Interface Cable on page 31.
NOTE: Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors can be different than those
illustrated in Figure 21, but the steps to connect the scanner are the same. 2. Connect the other end of the IBM 46XX interface cable to the appropriate port on the host (ly Port 9). 3. The scanner automatically detects the host interface type, but there is no default setting. Scan the appropriate
barcode from Port Address on page 301 to select the port address. 4. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter.
NOTE: The only required configuration is the port address. The IBM system ly controls other scanner
parameters. If problems occur with the system, see Troubleshooting on page 51.
299
IBM Interface
IBM Parameter Defaults
Table 25 lists defaults for IBM host parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
· Scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in
memory. To recall default parameter values, see Default Parameters on page 62.
· Configure the scanner using the 123Scan configuration program. See 123Scan and Software Tools.
NOTE: See Parameter Defaults for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 25 IBM 468X/469X Interface Parameter Defaults
Parameter
IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters Port Address Convert Unknown to Code 39 RS-485 Beep Directive RS-485 Barcode Configuration Directive IBM-485 Specification Version
Default
None Disable Ignore Ignore Original Specification
Page Number
301 302 302 303 303
300
IBM Interface
IBM Host Parameters
Port Address
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the IBM 468X/469X port.
NOTE: Scanning a Port Address barcode enables the RS-485 interface on the scanner. NOTE: For a list of supported scanner functionality by communication protocol, see Communication Protocol
Functionality.
* None
Hand-held Scanner Emulation (Port 9B)
Non-IBM Scanner Emulation (Port 5B)
Table-top Scanner Emulation (Port 17)
301
IBM Interface
Convert Unknown to Code 39
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable converting unknown barcode type data to Code 39.
Enable Convert Unknown to Code 39
* Disable Convert Unknown to Code 39 RS-485 Beep Directive
The IBM RS-485 host can send a beep configuration request to the scanner. Scan Ignore Beep Directive to prevent the scanner from processing the host request. All directives are still acknowledged to the host as if they were processed.
Honor Beep Directive
* Ignore Beep Directive
302
IBM Interface
RS-485 Barcode Configuration Directive
The IBM RS-485 host can enable and disable code types. Scan Ignore Barcode Configuration Directive to prevent the scanner from processing the host request. All directives are still acknowledged to the IBM RS-485 host as if they were processed.
Honor Barcode Configuration Directive
* Ignore Barcode Configuration Directive
IBM-485 Specification Version
Parameter # 1729 (SSI # F8h 06h C1h)
The IBM interface specification version selected defines how code types are reported over the IBM interface. When you scan Original Specification, only Symbologies that were historically supported on each individual port are reported as known. When you scan Version 2.0, all Symbologies covered in the newer IBM specification are reported as known with their respective code types.
* Original Specification
(0)
Version 2.0 (1)
303
Keyboard Wedge Interface
Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up a keyboard wedge interface with the scanner. The scanner connects between the keyboard and host computer and translates barcode data into keystrokes, which the host accepts as if they originated from the keyboard. This mode adds barcode reading functionality to a system designed for manual keyboard input. Keyboard keystrokes are simply passed through. The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 26 on page 306 (also see Parameter Defaults for all defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.
Setting Parameters
To set feature values, scan a single barcode or a short barcode sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the scanner powers down.
NOTE: Most computer monitors allow scanning barcodes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen,
be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the barcode clearly, and bars and/or spaces do not merge.
To return all features to default values, scan a barcode in Default Parameters on page 62. Throughout the
programming barcode menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
* Indicates default * Enable Parameter
Feature/option
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases, scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to select a medium keystroke delay, scan the Medium Delay (20 msec) barcode under Keystroke Delay on page 308. The scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry. Other parameters require scanning several barcodes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
304
Keyboard Wedge Interface
Connecting a Keyboard Wedge Interface
Figure 22 Keyboard Wedge Connection
Male DIN Connector
Power Supply (if necessary)
Keyboard Connector Male DIN Connector
NOTE: Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors can be different than those illustrated
in Figure 22, but the steps to connect the scanner are the same.
1. Turn off the host and unplug the keyboard connector. 2. Attach the modular connector of the Y-cable to the cable interface port on the scanner. See Inserting the
Interface Cable on page 31. 3. Connect the round male DIN host connector of the Y-cable to the keyboard port on the host device. 4. Connect the round female DIN keyboard connector of the Y-cable to the keyboard connector. 5. If required, attach the optional power supply to the connector in the middle of the Y-cable. 6. Ensure that all connections are secure. 7. Turn on the host system. 8. The scanner automatically detects the host interface type and uses the default setting. If the default (*) does
not meet your requirements, scan IBM PC/AT & IBM PC Compatibles on page 307. 9. To modify other parameter options, scan the appropriate barcodes in this guide.
If problems occur with the system, see Troubleshooting on page 51.
305
Keyboard Wedge Interface
Keyboard Wedge Parameter Defaults
Table 26 lists defaults for keyboard wedge host parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
· Scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in
memory. To recall default parameter values, see Default Parameters on page 62.
· Configure the scanner using the 123Scan configuration program. See 123Scan and Software Tools.
NOTE: See Parameter Defaults for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 26 Keyboard Wedge Interface Parameter Defaults
Parameter
Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters Keyboard Wedge Host Type Barcodes with Unknown Characters
Keystroke Delay Intra-keystroke Delay Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation Quick Keypad Emulation Simulated Caps Lock Caps Lock Override Convert Case Function Key Mapping FN1 Substitution Send Make and Break
Default
Page Number
IBM AT Notebook
307
Send Barcodes with Unknown 307 Characters
No Delay
308
Disable
308
Enable
309
Enable
309
Disable
310
Disable
311
Do Not Convert
311
Disable
312
Disable
312
Send Make and Break Scan 313 Codes
306
Keyboard Wedge Interface
Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters
Keyboard Wedge Host Types
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the keyboard wedge host.
NOTE: For a list of supported scanner functionality by communication protocol, see Communication Protocol
Functionality.
IBM PC/AT & IBM PC Compatibles
* IBM AT Notebook
Barcodes with Unknown Characters
Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. Scan Send Barcodes With Unknown Characters to send all barcode data except for unknown characters. The scanner issues no error beeps. Scan Do Not Send Barcodes With Unknown Characters to send barcode data up to the first unknown character. The scanner issues an error beep.
*Send Barcodes with Unknown Characters
Do Not Send Barcodes with Unknown Characters
307
Keyboard Wedge Interface
Keystroke Delay
This is the delay in milliseconds between emulated keystrokes. Scan one of the following barcodes to increase the delay when hosts require a slower data transmission.
* No Delay
Medium Delay (20 msec)
Long Delay (40 msec)
Intra-keystroke Delay
Scan Enable Intra-keystroke Delay to insert an additional delay between each emulated key press and release. This also sets Keystroke Delay to a minimum of 5 msec.
Enable Intra-keystroke Delay
* Disable Intra-keystroke Delay
308
Keyboard Wedge Interface
Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation
This allows emulation of most other country keyboard types not listed in Country Codes in a Microsoft® operating system environment.
NOTE: If your keyboard type is not listed in the country code list (see Country Codes), disable Quick Keypad
Emulation on page 309 and ensure Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation on page 309 is enabled.
* Enable Alternate Numeric Keypad
Disable Alternate Numeric Keypad
Quick Keypad Emulation
This enables faster keypad emulation where character value sequences are only sent for characters not found on the keyboard.
NOTE: This option applies only when Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation is enabled.
* Enable Quick Keypad Emulation
Disable Quick Keypad Emulation
309
Keyboard Wedge Interface
Simulated Caps Lock
Scan Enable Caps Lock to invert upper and lower case characters on the barcode as if the Caps Lock state is enabled on the keyboard. This inversion occurs regardless of the keyboard's Caps Lock state. Note that this only applies to alpha characters.
NOTES: - Simulated Caps Lock applies to ASCII characters only.
- Do not enable this parameter if either of the following parameters are enabled: Convert to Upper Case on page 311 Convert to Lower Case on page 311
Enable Caps Lock
* Disable Caps Lock
310
Keyboard Wedge Interface
Caps Lock Override
Scan Enable Caps Lock Override for AT or AT Notebook hosts to preserve the case of the data regardless of the state of the Caps Lock key. Therefore, an `A' in the barcode transmits as an `A' regardless of the setting of the keyboard's Caps Lock key.
NOTE: If both Simulated Caps Lock and Caps Lock Override are enabled, Caps Lock Override takes
precedence.
Enable Caps Lock Override
* Disable Caps Lock Override Convert Case
Scan one of the following barcodes to convert all barcode data to the selected case.
NOTE: Convert Case applies to ASCII characters only.
Convert to Upper Case
* Do Not Convert
Convert to Lower Case
311
Keyboard Wedge Interface
Function Key Mapping
ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as control key sequences (see Table 33 on page 450). Scan Enable Function Key Mapping to send the keys in bold in place of the standard key mapping. Table entries that do not have a bold entry remain the same whether or not you enable this parameter.
Enable Function Key Mapping
* Disable Function Key Mapping FN1 Substitution
Scan Enable FN1 Substitution to replace FN1 characters in an EAN128 barcode with a user-selected keystroke (see FN1 Substitution Values on page 92).
Enable FN1 Substitution
* Disable FN1 Substitution
312
Keyboard Wedge Interface
Send Make and Break
Scan Send Make and Break Scan Codes to prevent sending the scan codes for releasing a key.
NOTE: Windows-based systems must use Send Make and Break Scan Codes.
* Send Make and Break Scan Codes
Send Make Scan Code Only
Keyboard Map
The following keyboard map is a reference for prefix/suffix keystroke parameters. To program the prefix/suffix values, see Prefix/Suffix Values on page 89.
Figure 23 IBM PS2 Type Keyboard
7014
5001 5002 5003 5004
5005 5006 5007 5008
5009 5010 5011 5012
7006 7010 7007 7001
7009
7008 7013
7011 7012 7003 7002 7004 7005
7015 7017 7016 7018
313
Keyboard Wedge Interface
ASCII Character Sets
See ASCII Character Sets for the following information:
· ASCII Character Set, Table 33 on page 450 · ALT Key Character Set, Table 34 on page 455 · GUI Key Character Set, Table 35 on page 456 · PF Key Character Set, Table 36 on page 457 · F Key Character Set, Table 37 on page 458 · Numeric Key Character Set, Table 38 on page 458 · Extended Key Character Set, Table 39 on page 459
314
OCR Programming
Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up the scanner for OCR programming. The scanner can read 6 to 60 point OCR typeface. It supports font types OCR-A, OCR-B, MICR E13B, and US Currency Serial Number. OCR is not as secure as a barcode. To decrease OCR misdecodes and speed OCR reading, set an accurate OCR template and character subset, and use a check digit. All OCR fonts are disabled by default. Enabling OCR could slow barcode decoding. You can enable OCR-A and OCR-B at the same time, but not other combined font types.
Setting Parameters
To set feature values, scan a single barcode or a short barcode sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the imager powers down.
NOTE: Most computer monitors allow scanning barcodes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen,
be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the barcode clearly, and bars and/or spaces do not merge.
To return all features to default values, scan the Set Factory Defaults on page 62. Throughout the programming
barcode menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
* Indicates default * Enable Parameter
(1)
Feature/option Option value
315
OCR Programming
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to enable OCR-B, scan the Enable OCR-B barcode under OCR-B on page 319. The scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry. Other parameters require scanning several barcodes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
OCR Parameter Defaults
Table 27 lists the defaults for OCR parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
· Scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in
memory. To recall default parameter values, see Default Parameters on page 62.
· Configure the scanner using the 123Scan configuration program. See 123Scan and Software Tools.
NOTE: See Parameter Defaults for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default
parameters.
Table 27 OCR Programming Default Table
Parameter
Parameter Number
OCR Programming Parameters
OCR-A
680
OCR-A Variant
684
OCR-B
681
OCR-B Variant
685
MICR E13B
682
US Currency Serial Number
683
OCR Orientation
687
OCR Lines
691
OCR Minimum Characters
689
OCR Maximum Characters
690
OCR Subset
686
OCR Quiet Zone
695
SSI Number
Default
Page Number
F1h A8h F1h ACh F1h A9h F1h ADh F1h AAh F1h ABh F1h AFh F1h B3h F1h B1h F1h B2h F1h AEh
F1h B7h
Disable
317
OCR-A Full ASCII 318
Disable
319
OCR-B Full ASCII 320
Disable
324
Disable
325
0o
325
1
327
3
327
100
328
Selected font
328
variant
50
329
316
OCR Programming
Table 27 OCR Programming Default Table (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number
SSI Number
OCR Template
547
F1h 23h
OCR Check Digit Modulus
688
F1h B0h
OCR Check Digit Multiplier
700
F1h BCh
OCR Check Digit Validation
694
F1h B6h
Inverse OCR
856
F2h 58h
OCR Redundancy
1770
F8h 06h EAh
Default
99999999 1 121212121212 None Regular Level 1
Page Number
329 339 339 340 346 347
OCR Programming Parameters
OCR-A Parameter # 680 SSI # F1h A8h
NOTE: OCR is not as secure as a barcode. To decrease OCR misdecodes and speed OCR reading, set an
accurate OCR template and character subset, and use a check digit. See OCR Subset on page 328 and OCR Template on page 329. Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable OCR-A.
Enable OCR-A (1)
* Disable OCR-A (0)
317
OCR Programming
OCR-A Variant Parameter # 684 SSI # F1 ACh
NOTE: Enable OCR-A before setting this parameter. If disabling OCR-A, set the variant to its default
(OCR-A Full ASCII).
The font variant sets a processing algorithm and default character subset for the given font. To choose a variant, scan one of the following barcodes. Select the most appropriate font variant to optimize performance and accuracy. OCR-A supports the following variants:
· OCR-A Full ASCII
!"#$()*+,-./0123456789<>ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ\^
· OCR-A Reserved 1
$*+-./0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
· OCR-A Reserved 2
$*+-./0123456789<>ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
· OCR-A Banking
-0123456789<>
Special banking characters output as the following representative characters: outputs as f outputs as c outputs as h
*OCR-A Full ASCII (0)
OCR-A Reserved 1 (1)
318
OCR Programming
OCR-A Variant (continued)
OCR-A Reserved 2 (2)
OCR-B Parameter # 681 SSI # F1h A9h
OCR-A Banking (3)
NOTE: OCR is not as secure as a barcode. To decrease OCR misdecodes and speed OCR reading, set an
accurate OCR template and character subset, and use a check digit. See OCR Subset on page 328 and OCR Template on page 329.
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable OCR-B.
Enable OCR-B (1)
* Disable OCR-B (0)
319
OCR Programming
OCR-B Variant Parameter # 685 SSI # F1h ADh
NOTE: Enable OCR-B before setting this parameter. If disabling OCR-B, set the variant to its default
(OCR-B Full ASCII). OCR-B has the following variants. Select the most appropriate font variant to optimize performance and accuracy.
· OCR-B Full ASCII
!#$%()*+,-./0123456789<>ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ^|Ñ
· OCR-B Banking
#+-0123456789<>JNP|
· OCR-B Limited
+,-./0123456789<>ACENPSTVX
· OCR-B ISBN 10-Digit Book Numbers
-0123456789>BCEINPSXz
· OCR-B ISBN 10 or 13-Digit Book Numbers
-0123456789>BCEINPSXz
· OCR-B Travel Document Version 1 (TD1) 3-Line ID Cards
-0123456789<ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
· OCR-B Travel Document Version 2 (TD2) 2-Line ID Cards
-0123456789<ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
· OCR-B Travel Document 2 or 3-Line ID Cards Auto-Detect
!#$%()*+,-./0123456789<>ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ^|Ñ
· OCR-B Passport
-0123456789<ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÑ
· OCR-B Visa Type A
-0123456789<ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
· OCR-B Visa Type B
-0123456789<ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÑ
· OCR-B ICAO Travel Documents
This allows reading either TD1, TD2, Passport, Visa Type A, or Visa Type B without switching between these options. It automatically recognizes the travel document read. Scanning any ISBN Book Number automatically applies the appropriate ISBN checksum.
320
OCR Programming
To choose a variant, scan one of the barcodes below. Selecting the following OCR-B variants automatically sets the appropriate OCR Lines on page 327. These five variants invoke extensive special algorithms and checking for that particular document type:
Variant
OCR Lines Setting
Passport
2
TD1 ID Cards
3
TD2 ID Cards
2
Visa Type A
2
Visa Type B
2
NOTE: When setting one of the variants above with both OCR-A and OCR-B enabled, the scanner reads the
specified travel document but does not read OCR-A. When the OCR-B variant is set back to the default (OCR-B Full ASCII), the scanner reads OCR-A.
* OCR-B Full ASCII (0)
OCR-B Limited (2)
OCR-B Banking (1)
OCR-B ISBN 10-Digit Book Numbers (6)
321
OCR Programming
OCR-B Variant (continued)
OCR-B ISBN 10 or 13-Digit Book Numbers (7)
OCR-B Travel Document Version 1 (TD1) 3 Line ID Cards (3)
OCR-B Travel Document Version 2 (TD2) 2-Line ID Cards (8)
Travel Document 2 or 3-Line ID Cards Auto-Detect (20)
OCR-B Passport (4)
322
OCR Programming
OCR-B Variant (continued)
OCR-B Visa Type B (10)
OCR-B Visa Type A (9)
OCR-B ICAO Travel Documents (11)
323
OCR Programming
MICR E13B Parameter # 682 SSI # F1h AAh
NOTE: OCR is not as secure as a barcode. To decrease OCR misdecodes and speed OCR reading, set an
accurate OCR template and character subset, and use a check digit. See OCR Subset on page 328 and OCR Template on page 329. Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable MICR E13B. MICR E 13B uses the following characters:
TOAD characters (Transit, On Us, Amount, and Dash) output as the following representative characters: outputs as t outputs as a outputs as o outputs as d
Enable MICR E13B (1)
* Disable MICR E13B (0)
324
OCR Programming
US Currency Serial Number Parameter # 683 SSI # F1h ABh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable US Currency Serial Number.
NOTE: OCR is not as secure as a barcode. To decrease OCR misdecodes and speed OCR reading, set an
accurate OCR template and character subset, and use a check digit. See OCR Subset on page 328 and OCR Template on page 329.
Enable US Currency (1)
* Disable US Currency (0)
OCR Orientation Parameter # 687 SSI # F1h AFh
Select one of five options to specify the orientation of the OCR to read:
· 0o to the imaging engine (default) · 270o clockwise (or 90o counterclockwise) to the imaging engine · 180o (upside down) to the imaging engine · 90o clockwise to the imaging engine · Omnidirectional
Setting an incorrect orientation can cause misdecodes.
325
OCR Programming
OCR Orientation (continued)
* OCR Orientation 0o (0)
OCR Orientation 180o Clockwise (2)
OCR Orientation Omnidirectional (4)
OCR Orientation 270o Clockwise (1)
OCR Orientation 90o Clockwise (3)
326
OCR Programming
OCR Lines Parameter # 691 SSI # F1h B3h
To select the number of OCR lines to decode, scan one of the following barcodes. Selecting Visas, TD1, or TD2 ID cards automatically sets the appropriate OCR Lines. Also see OCR-B Variant on page 320.
* OCR 1 Line (1)
OCR 2 Lines (2)
OCR 3 Lines (3)
OCR Minimum Characters Parameter # 689 SSI # F1h B1h
To select the minimum number of OCR characters (not including spaces) per line to decode, scan the following barcode, then scan a three-digit number between 003 and 100 using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes representing the number of OCR characters to decode. Strings of OCR characters less than the minimum are ignored. The default is 003.
OCR Minimum Characters
327
OCR Programming
OCR Maximum Characters Parameter # 690 SSI # F1h B2h
To select the maximum number of OCR characters (including spaces) per line to decode, scan the following barcode, then scan a three-digit number between 003 and 100 using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes representing the number of OCR characters to decode. Strings of OCR characters greater than the maximum are ignored. The default is 100.
OCR Maximum Characters
OCR Subset Parameter # 686 SSI # F1h AEh
Create an OCR subset to define a custom group of characters in place of a preset font variant. For example, if scanning only numbers and the letters A, B, and C, create a subset of just these characters to speed decoding. This applies a designated OCR Subset across all enabled OCR fonts. To set or modify the OCR font subset: 1. Enable the appropriate OCR font(s). 2. Scan the OCR Subset barcode. 3. Scan numbers and letters to form the OCR Subset from Alphanumeric Barcodes. 4. Scan End of Message on page 329.
OCR Subset To cancel an OCR subset, for OCR-A or OCR-B, scan OCR-A variant Full ASCII, or OCR-B variant Full ASCII. For MICR E13B or US Currency Serial Number, create a subset which includes all allowed characters in that character set, or scan an option from the Default Parameters on page 62 and re-program the scanner.
328
OCR Programming
OCR Quiet Zone Parameter # 695 SSI # F1h B7h
This option sets the OCR quiet zone. The scanner stops scanning a field when it detects a sufficiently wide blank space. The width of this space is defined by the End of Field option. Used with parsers that tolerate slanted characters, the End of Field count is approximately a count of 8 for a character width. For example, if set to 15, then two character widths are an end of line indicator for the parser. Larger end of field numbers require bigger quiet zones at each end of text line. To set a quiet zone, scan the following barcode, then scan a two-digit number using the numeric keypad in Numeric Barcodes. The range of the quiet zone is 20 - 99 and the default is 50, indicating a six character width quiet zone.
OCR Quiet Zone
OCR Template Parameter # 547 SSI # F1h 23h
This option creates a template for precisely matching scanned OCR characters to a desired input format. Carefully constructing an OCR template eliminates scanning errors. To set or modify the OCR decode template, scan the OCR Template barcode, and then scan barcodes on the following pages that correspond to numbers and letters to form the template expression. Then scan End of Message. The default is 99999999 which accepts OCR strings containing any character.
End of Message
OCR Template
329
OCR Programming
Required Digit (9)
Only a numeric character is accepted in this position.
Template 99999
Valid data 12987
Valid data 30517
Invalid data 123AB
9
Required Alpha (A)
Only an alpha character is accepted in this position.
Template AAAAA
Valid data ABCDE
Valid data UVWXY
Invalid data 12FGH
A
Require and Suppress (0)
Any character in this position, including space or reject, is suppressed from the output.
Template 990AA
Incoming data 12QAB
Output 12AB
Optional Alphanumeric (1)
An alphanumeric character is accepted in this position if present. Optional characters are not allowed as the first character(s) in a field of like characters.
Template 99991
Valid data 1234A
Valid data 12345
Invalid data 1234<
1
330
OCR Programming
Optional Alpha (2)
An alpha character is accepted in this position if present. Optional characters are not allowed as the first character(s) in a field of like characters.
Template AAAA2
Valid data ABCDE
Valid data WXYZ
Invalid data ABCD6
2
Alpha or Digit (3)
An alphanumeric character is required in this position to validate the incoming data.
Template 33333
Valid data 12ABC
Valid data WXY34
Invalid data 12AB<
3
Any Including Space & Reject (4)
Any character is accepted in this position, including space and reject. An underscore (_) represents rejects in the output. This is a good selection for troubleshooting.
Template 99499
Valid data 12$34
Valid data 34 98
4
331
OCR Programming
Any except Space & Reject (5)
Any character is accepted in this position, except a space or reject.
Template 55999
Valid data A.123
Valid data *Z456
Invalid data A BCD
5
Optional Digit (7)
A numeric character is accepted if present. Optional characters are not allowed as the first character(s) in a field of like characters.
Template 99977
Valid data 12345
Valid data 789
Invalid data 789AB
7
Digit or Fill (8)
Any numeric or fill character is accepted in this position.
Template 88899
Valid data 12345
Valid data >>789
Valid data <<789
8
332
OCR Programming
Alpha or Fill (F)
Any alpha or fill character is accepted in this position.
Template AAAFF
Valid data ABCXY
Valid data LMN>>
Valid data ABC<5
F
Optional Space ( )
A space is accepted if present. Optional characters are not allowed as the first character(s) in a field of like characters.
Template 99 99
Valid data 12 34
Valid data 1234
Invalid data 67891
Space
Optional Small Special (.)
A special character is accepted if present. Optional characters are not allowed as the first character(s) in a field of like characters. Small special characters are - , and .
Template AA.99
Valid data MN.35
Valid data XY98
Invalid data XYZ12
.
Other Template Operators
These template operators assist in capturing, delimiting, and formatting scanned OCR data. Literal String (" and +) Use either of these delimiting characters surrounding characters from the alphanumeric keyboard in Alphanumeric Barcodes to define a literal string within a template that must be present in scanned OCR data. There are two
333
OCR Programming
characters used to delimit required literal strings; if one of the delimiter characters is present in the desired literal string, use the other delimiter.
Template "35+BC"
Valid data 35+BC
Invalid data AB+22
"
+
New Line (E)
To create a template of multiple lines, add E between the template of each single line.
Template 999EAAAA
Valid data 321 BCAD
Valid data 987 ZXYW
Invalid data XYZW 12
E
String Extract (C) This operator combined with others defines a string of characters to extract from the scanned data. The string extract is structured as follows:
CbPe
Where:
· C is the string extract operator · b is the string begin delimiter · P is the category (one or more numeric or alpha characters) describing the string representation · e is the string end delimiter
334
OCR Programming
Values for b and e can be any scannable character. They are included in the output stream.
Template
Incoming data
Output
C>A>
XQ3>ABCDE>
>ABCDE>
->ATHRUZ>123 1ABCZXYZ
>ATHRUZ> No Output
C
Ignore to End of Field (D)
This operator causes all characters after a template to be ignored. Use this as the last character in a template expression. Examples for the template 999D:
Template 999D
Incoming data 123-PED 357298 193
Output 123 357 193
D
Skip Until (P1) This operator skips over characters until a specific character type or a literal string is detected. It can be used in two ways:
P1ct Where:
· P1 is the Skip Until operator · c is the type of character that triggers the start of output · t is one or more template characters
P1"s"t Where:
· P1 is the Skip Until operator · "s" is one or more literal string characters (see Literal String (" and +) on page 333) that trigger the start of
output
· t is one or more template characters
335
OCR Programming
The trigger character or literal string is included in output from a Skip Until operator, and the first character in the template should accommodate this trigger.
Template
Incoming data
Output
P1"PN"AA9999
123PN9876
PN9876
PN1234
PN1234
X-PN3592
PN3592
P
1
Skip Until Not (P0) This operator skips over characters until a specific character type or a literal string is not matched in the output stream. It can be used in two ways:
P0ct Where:
· P0 is the Skip Until Not operator · c is the type of character that triggers the start of output · t is one or more template characters
P0"s"t Where:
· P0 is the Skip Until Not operator · "s" is one or more literal string characters (see Literal String (" and +) on page 333) that trigger the start
of output
· t is one or more template characters
336
OCR Programming
The trigger character or literal string is not included in output from a Skip Until Not operator.
Template
Incoming data
Output
P0A9999
BPN3456
3456
PN1234 5341
1234 No output
Template P0"PN"9999
Incoming data PN3456 5341
PNPN7654
Output 3456 No output 7654
P
0
Repeat Previous (R)
This operator allows a template character to repeat one or more times, allowing the capture of variable-length scanned data. The following examples capture two required alpha characters followed by one or more required digits:
Template AA9R
Incoming data AB3
PN12345 32RM52700
Output AB3
PN12345 No output
R
337
OCR Programming
Scroll Until Match (S)
This operator steps through scanned data one character at a time until the data matches the template.
Template S99999
Incoming data AB3
PN12345 32RM52700
Output No Output
12345 52700
S
Multiple Templates
This feature sets up multiple templates for OCR decoding. To do this, follow the procedure described in OCR Template on page 329 (scan the OCR Template barcode, and then barcodes corresponding to numbers and letters to form the template expression, and then End of Message) for each template in the multiple template string, using a capital letter X as a separator between templates. For example, set the OCR Template as 99999XAAAAA to decode OCR strings of either 12345 or ABCDE.
Template Examples
Following are sample templates with descriptions of valid data for each definition. Field Definition Description "M"99977 M followed by three digits and two optional digits. "X"997777"X" X followed by two digits, four optional digits, and an X. 9959775599 Two digits followed by any character, a digit, two optional digits, any two characters, and two digits. A55"-"999"-"99 A letter followed by two characters, a dash, three digits, a dash, and two digits. 33A"."99 Two alphanumeric characters followed by a letter, a period, and two digits. 999992991Five digits followed by an optional alpha, two digits, and an optional alphanumeric. "PN98" Literal field - PN98
338
OCR Programming
OCR Check Digit Modulus Parameter # 688 SSI # F1h B0h
The check digit is the last digit (in the right-most position) in an OCR string and improves the accuracy of the collected data. This option sets OCR module check digit calculation. The calculation is performed on incoming data to determine this check digit, based on the numeric weight of the alpha and numeric characters. See OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 339. If the incoming data does not match the check digit, the data is considered corrupt.
The selected check digit option does not take effect until you set OCR Check Digit Validation on page 340.
To choose the Check Digit Modulus, such as 10 for Modulus 10, scan the following barcode, and then scan a three-digit number from 001 to 099 representing the check digit using the numeric keypad in Numeric Barcodes. The default is 1.
OCR Check Digit
OCR Check Digit Multiplier
Parameter # 700
SSI # F1h BCh
This option sets OCR check digit multipliers for character positions. For check digit validation, each character in scanned data has an assigned weight to use in calculating the check digit. The scanner OCR ships with the following weight equivalents:
0 = 0 1 = 1 2 = 2 3 = 3 4 = 4 5 = 5 6 = 6
A = 10 B = 11 C = 12 D = 13 E = 14 F = 15 G = 16
K = 20 L = 21 M = 22 N = 23 O = 24 P = 25 Q = 26
U = 30 V = 31 W = 32 X = 33 Y = 34 Z = 35 Space = 0
7 = 7 8 = 8 9 = 9
H = 17 I = 18 J = 19
R = 27 S = 28 T = 29
All other characters are equivalent to one (1).
You can define the multiplier string if it is different from the default.
121212121212 (default)
123456789A (for ISBN, Product Add Right to Left. See OCR Check Digit Validation on page 340)
339
OCR Programming
For example: ISBN Multiplier Product Product add
0 2011 83994 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 18 0 7 6 40 12 27 18 4 0 + 18 + 0 + 7 + 6 + 40 + 12 + 27 + 18 + 4 = 132
ISBN uses Modulus 11 for the check digit. In this case, 132 is divisible by 11, so it passes the check digit.
To set the check digit multiplier, scan the following barcode, and then scan numbers and letters to form the multiplier string from Alphanumeric Barcodes. Then scan End of Message on page 329.
OCR Check Digit Multiplier
OCR Check Digit Validation Parameter # 694 SSI # F1h B6h
Use the following options to protect against scanning errors by applying a check digit validation scheme.
None
No check digit validation, indicating no check digit is applied. This is the default.
* No Check Digit (0)
340
OCR Programming
Product Add Left to Right
Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value (see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 339). Each digit representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the multiplier, and the sum of these products is computed. The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is zero.
Example:
Scanned data numeric value is 132456 (check digit is 6)
Check digit multiplier string is 123456
Digit
1 324
5
6
Multiplier
1 234
5
6
Product
1 6 6 16 25 36
Product add 1+ 6+ 6+ 16+ 25+ 36= 90
The Check Digit Modulus is 10. It passes because 90 is divisible by 10 (the remainder is zero).
Product Add Left to Right (3)
Product Add Right to Left
Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value (see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 339). The check digit multiplier is reversed in order. Each value representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the reversed multiplier, resulting in a product for each character in the scanned data. The sum of these products is computed. The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is zero.
Example:
Scanned data numeric value is 132459 (check digit is 9)
Check digit multiplier string is 123456
Digit
1 324
5
9
Multiplier
6 543
2
1
Product
6 15 8 12 10 9
Product add 6+ 15+ 8+ 12+ 10+ 9= 60
341
OCR Programming
The Check Digit Modulus is 10. It passes because 60 is divisible by 10 (the remainder is 0).
Product Add Right to Left (1)
Digit Add Left to Right
Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value (see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 339). Each value representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the multiplier, resulting in a product for each character in the scanned data. The sum of each individual digit in all of the products is then calculated. The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is zero.
Example:
Scanned data numeric value is 132456 (check digit is 6)
Check digit multiplier string is 123456
Digit 1 3 2 4 5 6
Multiplier
1 234
5
6
Product 1 6 6 16 25 36
Digit add 1+ 6+ 6+ 1+6+ 2+5+ 3+6= 36
The Check Digit Modulus is 12. It passes because 36 is divisible by 12 (the remainder is 0).
Digit Add Left to Right (4)
342
OCR Programming
Digit Add Right to Left
Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value (see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 339). The check digit multiplier is reversed in order. Each value representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the reversed multiplier, resulting in a product for each character in the scanned data. The sum of each individual digit in all of the products is then calculated. The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is zero.
Example:
Scanned data numeric value is 132456 (check digit is 6)
Check digit multiplier string is 123456
Digit
1 324
5
6
Multiplier
6 543
2
1
Product
6 15 8 12 10 6
Digit add
6+ 1+5+ 8+ 1+2+ 1+0+ 6= 30
The Check Digit Modulus is 10. It passes because 30 is divisible by 10 (the remainder is 0).
Digit Add Right to Left (2)
Product Add Right to Left Simple Remainder
Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value (see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 339). The check digit multiplier is reversed in order. Each value representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the reversed multiplier, resulting in a product for each character in the scanned data. The sum of these products except for the check digit's product is computed. The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is equal to the check digit's product.
Example:
Scanned data numeric value is 122456 (check digit is 6)
Check digit multiplier string is 123456
Digit
1 224
5
6
Multiplier
6 543
2
1
Product
6 10 8 12 10
6
Product add 6+ 10+ 8+ 12+ 10= 46 6
343
OCR Programming
The Check Digit Modulus is 10. It passes because 46 divided by 10 leaves a remainder of 6.
Product Add Right to Left Simple Remainder (5)
Digit Add Right To Left Simple Remainder
Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value (see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 339). The check digit multiplier is reversed in order. Each value representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the reversed multiplier, resulting in a product for each character in the scanned data. The sum of each individual digit in all of the products except for the check digit's product is then calculated. The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is equal to the check digit's product.
Example:
Scanned data numeric value is 122459 (check digit is 6)
Check digit multiplier string is 123456
Digit
1 224
5
9
Multiplier
6 543
2
1
Product
6 10 8 12 10
9
Digit add
6+ 1+0+ 8+ 1+2+ 1+0= 19 9
The Check Digit Modulus is 10. It passes because 19 divided by 10 leaves a remainder of 9.
Digit Add Right to Left Simple Remainder (6)
344
OCR Programming
Health Industry - HIBCC43
This is the health industry module 43 check digit standard. The check digit is the modulus 43 sum of all the character values in a given message, and is printed as the last character in a given message.
Example:
Supplier Labeling Data Structure: + A 1 2 3 B J C 5 D 6 E 7 1
Sum of values: 41+10+1+2+3+11+19+12+5+13+6+14+7+1 = 145
Divide 145 by 43. The quotient is 3 with a remainder of 16. The check digit is the character corresponding to the value of the remainder (see Table 28), which in this example is 16, or G. The complete Supplier Labeling Data Structure, including the check digit, therefore is:
A 1 2 3 B J C 5 D 6 E 7 1 G
Table 28 Table of Numeric Value Assignments for Computing HIBC LIC Data Format Check Digit
0 = 0
9 = 9
I = 18
R = 27
- = 36
1 = 1
A = 10
J = 19
S = 28
. = 37
2 = 2
B = 11
K = 20
T = 29
Space = 38
3 = 3
C = 12
L = 21
U =30
$ = 39
4 = 4
D = 13
M = 22
V = 31
/ = 40
5 = 5
E = 14
N = 23
W = 32
+ = 41
6 = 6
F = 15
O = 24
X = 33
% = 42
7 = 7
G = 16
P = 25
Y = 34
8 = 8
H = 17
Q = 26
Z = 35
Health Industry - HIBCC43 (9)
345
OCR Programming
Inverse OCR Parameter # 856 SSI # F2h 58h
Inverse OCR is white or light words on a black or dark background. Select an option for decoding inverse OCR:
· Regular Only - Decode regular OCR (black on white) strings only. · Inverse Only - Decode inverse OCR (white on black) strings only. · Autodiscriminate - Decode both regular and inverse OCR strings.
* Regular Only (0)
Autodiscriminate (2)
Inverse Only (1)
346
OCR Programming
OCR Redundancy
Parameter # 1770
SSI # F8h 06h EAh
This option adjusts the number of times to decode an OCR text string before transmission. There are three levels of OCR decode redundancy. There is an inverse relationship between the redundancy level and OCR decoding aggressiveness. Increasing the level of the redundancy can reduce OCR scanning aggressiveness, so select only the level of redundancy necessary.
· OCR Redundancy Level 1: This default setting allows the scanner to operate in its most aggressive state
while providing sufficient accuracy in decoding most in-spec OCR text strings.
· OCR Redundancy Level 2: This setting eliminates most misdecodes while maintaining reasonable
aggressiveness.
· OCR Redundancy Level 3: Select this option with greater redundancy requirements if OCR Redundancy
Level 2 fails to eliminate misdecodes.
* OCR Redundancy Level 1
(1)
OCR Redundancy Level 3 (3)
OCR Redundancy Level 2 (2)
347
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
Introduction
Intelligent Document Capture (IDC) is Zebra advanced image processing firmware for select imager based scanners. This chapter describes the IDC functionality, provides parameter barcodes to control IDC features, and includes a quick start procedure.
The IDC Process
Intelligent Document Capture: 1. Verifies a barcode is appropriate to use as an IDC anchor or link. See Barcode Acceptance Test on page 349. 2. Determines the rectangular region to capture as an image. See Capture Region Determination on page 349. 3. Processes the captured image. See Image Post Processing on page 350. 4. Transmits the data. See Data Transmission on page 350.
348
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
Barcode Acceptance Test
Upon decoding a barcode, the scanner checks that the barcode fits the description of a barcode that anchors or links to an IDC form. To be accepted as an IDC barcode:
· The symbology must be enabled for decode, and also enabled via IDC Symbology on page 354. The IDC
firmware allows enabling between zero and eight symbologies simultaneously: Code 128, Code 39, Interleaved 2 of 5, Discrete 2 of 5, Codabar, PDF417, Data Matrix, and EAN-128.
· The decoded data must satisfy the values set in the IDC Minimum Text Length and IDC Maximum Text
Length parameters. To disable either of these checks, set the value to zero.
If the barcode does not satisfy both requirements, it is sent as a normal (non-IDC) decode.
An IDC barcode is required when IDC Operating Mode on page 353 is set to Anchored or Linked.
Free-Form operating mode does not require a barcode, but transmits decoded data if one is found and satisfies the requirements. If no barcode is decoded, the document capture process starts but may require specifying a non-zero value for the IDC Delay Time on page 363. The scanner must wait for at least this amount of time after trigger pull before capturing a document, unless a barcode is decoded before the time expires.
If Momentary Trigger Mode Timeout on page 76 is enabled, the barcode must be directly under the aiming pattern and within the scanner's decode range, and the region to capture must be completely within the scanner's field-of-view.
Capture Region Determination
After accepting an IDC barcode, the firmware establishes the region to capture as an image. The method used depends on the setting of the IDC Operating Mode as follows.
The IDC firmware emits a single low beep after successfully capturing a region. The scanner is then no longer capturing images and can be moved without disturbing the IDC output. Be sure to hold the trigger button until the decode beep, otherwise the IDC process may be aborted.
IDC Operating Mode = Anchored
A coordinate system is built based on the barcode in its rectified (de-skewed) form. The origin is the center of the barcode, and the x-axis is set toward the right, from the barcode's point of view. The unit module width of the barcode is the unit for x. Similarly, the y-axis is set toward the up direction. The unit for the y-axis is specified via the parameter IDC Aspect on page 357. This is the aspect ratio of a thin bar or space - the barcode's height is divided by this value to get this unit. Set IDC Aspect to zero to automatically calculate the aspect ratio. The barcode can be of different sizes for the same form, as long as the center of the barcode is the same when the barcode's length changes.
From this coordinate system, the IDC area is determined using four parameters: offsets in x and y (IDC X Coordinate, IDC Y Coordinate) to the region's top-left corner, and width and height (IDC Width, IDC Height).
If the capture area is relatively large as compared to the barcode area, the calculation to obtain the capture area is prone to significant errors. A recommended solution is to enclose the form with a single black-lined rectangular border (a box), which is not in contact with any other line on the outside of the form (although it can be connected to lines on the inside of the form). When the IDC Find Box Outline is set, the firmware searches for the box, and does not decode if any edges are broken (such as by a protruding thumb).
The IDC Zoom Limit parameter controls the quality of the captured form. The IDC firmware rejects capturing a form unless the width is at least the IDC Zoom Limit percentage of the IDC Width parameter. For example, if IDC Zoom Limit is set to 100 and IDC Width is set to 150, the form must be at least 300 pixels wide before it is captured (each unit module is scaled to two pixels).
349
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
The IDC Maximum Rotation parameter controls the maximum rotation any edge of the form can have in relation to the scanner's horizontal or vertical axis.
IDC Operating Mode = Free-Form or Linked
The document capture region is a rectangular piece of paper, or a portion of it enclosed by a rectangular border. In either case, all four sides of the capture region must be completely within the scanner's field-of-view, and there must be sufficient contrast at the border of the capture region. For example, if a piece of white paper contains the document to capture, it must be put in front of a dark background. By default, the scanner captures the largest rectangular region within the field-of-view. To specify a particular border type, use the IDC Border Type parameter. The region must contain at least 10% of the field-of-view in two dimensions. If an IDC barcode is decoded, IDC uses its location to start the search for the capture region. Otherwise, it searches the capture region from the center of the field-of-view. IDC also uses the orientation of a decoded IDC barcode to orient the output image.
Image Post Processing
After determining the document capture region, the firmware de-skews and re-samples the region as follows. Enabling IDC Captured Image Brighten calls normalization, which makes the brightness of the image uniform, and enhances contrast as a large percent of background pixels is made completely white (a smaller percent of pixels is made completely black if the firmware determines there is no danger of enhancing the contrast of a very bland area). Enabling IDC Captured Image Sharpen enhances the sharpness of the image. IDC re-samples the image about one output pixel per input pixel for Free-Form or Linked modes and two pixels-per-module in Anchored mode. IDC compresses and transmits the image in one of the standard image formats selected by the IDC File Format Selector, IDC Bits Per Pixel, and IDC JPEG Quality parameters. Note that it may take several seconds for post processing to complete, depending on the size of the captured region, the options enabled, and the scanner model.
Data Transmission
After processing the captured image, IDC assembles the image with the decoded barcode data (if applicable) into an ISO/IEC 15434 style packet and transmits it to the host. The scanner issues the standard decode beep and the trigger can be released. Be sure to set the USB Device Type on page 237 to Symbol Native API (SNAPI) with Imaging Interface.
PC Application and Programming Support
For a sample application running on the Microsoft Windows operating system, contact your Zebra representative. This application displays barcode data and/or captured images from Intelligent Document Capture enabled scanners and allows setting and reading IDC parameters. Complete source code and documentation are also provided for developing custom applications. The application includes documentation for the ISO/IEC 15434 format as used by the IDC firmware and C# code to process it.
350
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
Setting Parameters
This section describes the parameters controlling the IDC firmware and provides programming barcodes for setting them. The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 29 on page 352 (also see Parameter Defaults for all defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary. To set feature values, scan a single barcode or a short barcode sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the imager powers down.
NOTE: Most computer monitors allow scanning barcodes directly on the screen. When scanning from the
screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the barcode clearly, and bars and/or spaces do not merge.
To return all features to default values, scan the Set Factory Defaults on page 62. Throughout the programming
barcode menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
* Indicates default
*Enable Parameter
(1)
Feature/option Option value
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to set the document capture file format to BMP, scan the BMP barcode under IDC File Format Selector on page 357. The scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry. Other parameters require scanning several barcodes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
351
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
Image Document Capture Parameter Defaults
Table 29 lists defaults for IDC parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
· Scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in
memory. To recall default parameter values, see Default Parameters on page 62.
· Configure the scanner using the 123Scan configuration program. See 123Scan and Software Tools.
NOTE: See Parameter Defaults for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default
parameters.
Alternatively, use the sample application to set parameters using the parameter name. The application provides prompts and error checking to assist in setting the parameters correctly and easily. You must use an application to set a parameter to a negative value, as the IDC X Coordinate can require.
Table 29 Intelligent Document Capture (IDC) Parameter Defaults
Parameter
Parameter Name
Parameter Number 1
SSI Number 2
Default
Intelligent Document Capture (IDC) Parameters
IDC Operating Mode
DocCap_MODE
594
F1h 52h
Off
IDC Symbology
DocCap_SYMBOLOGY 655
F1h 8Fh
001
IDC X Coordinate
DocCap_X
596
F4h F1h 54h -151
IDC Y Coordinate
DocCap_Y
597
F4h F1h 55h -050
IDC Width
DocCap_WIDTH
598
F1h 56h
0300
IDC Height
DocCap_HEIGHT
599
F1h 57h
0050
IDC Aspect
DocCap_ASPECT
595
F1h 53h
000
IDC File Format Selector
DocCap_FMT
601
F1h 59h
JPEG
IDC Bits Per Pixel
DocCap_BPP
602
F1h 5Ah
8 BPP
IDC JPEG Quality
DocCap_JPEG_Qual
603
F1h 5Bh
065
IDC Find Box Outline
Sig_FINDBOX
727
F1h D7h
Disable
IDC Minimum Text Length
DocCap_MIN_TEXT
656
F1h 90h
00
IDC Maximum Text Length
DocCap_MAX_TEXT
657
F1h 91h
00
IDC Captured Image Brighten Sig_BRIGHTEN
654
F1h 8Eh
Enable
IDC Captured Image Sharpen Sig_SHARPEN
658
F1h 92h
Enable
IDC Border Type
DocCap_BORDER
829
F2h 3Dh
None
IDC Delay Time
DocCap_DELAY
830
F2h 3Eh
000
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page Number
353 354 355 355 356 356 357 357 358 358 359 359 360 360 361 362 363
352
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
Table 29 Intelligent Document Capture (IDC) Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Name
Parameter Number 1
SSI Number 2
IDC Zoom Limit
Sig_MIN_PERCENT
651
F1h 8Bh
IDC Maximum Rotation
Sig_MAX_ROT
652
F1h 8Ch
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Default 000 00
Page Number
363
364
IDC Operating Mode Parameter Name: DocCap_MODE Parameter # 594 SSI # F1h 52h
Select the operating mode of the Intelligent Document Capture firmware:
· Off - Disables the IDC feature. · Anchored - Requires a barcode decode. The image capture region is based off this barcode. · Free-Form - A printed border or page edge defines the image capture region. A barcode is optional. · Linked - A printed border or page edge defines the image capture region. A barcode is required.
* Off
(0)
Free-Form (2)
Anchored (1)
Linked (3)
353
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
IDC Symbology
Parameter Name: DocCap_SYMBOLOGY
Parameter # 655
SSI # F1h 8Fh
Select the barcode type(s) to use when Document Capture mode is not set to Off. To enable more than one symbology at a time, simply add the values together. For example, to enable PDF417, Data Matrix, and Code 39 write a value of 98 (32 + 64 + 2).
Scan the following barcode, and then scan three barcodes from Numeric Barcodes in the range of 001 to 511 decimal. The default is 001.
Table 30 IDC Symbologies Symbology Code 128 Code 39 I 2 of 5 D 2 of 5 Codabar PD 417 Data Matrix EAN 128 Aztec
Value (Decimal) 1 2 4 8 16 32 64
128 256
IDC Symbology
354
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
IDC X Coordinate Parameter Name: DocCap_X Parameter # 596 SSI # F4h F1h 54h
This parameter only applies when IDC Operating Mode is set to Anchored. Specify the horizontal offset to the top left corner of the region to capture relative to the center of the barcode. Negative values move toward the left. Scan the following barcode, and then scan four barcodes from Numeric Barcodes in the range of +/- 1279. The default is -151. Note that you must use an application to set a negative value.
IDC X Coordinate
IDC Y Coordinate Parameter Name: DocCap_Y Parameter # 597 SSI # F4h F1h 55h
This parameter only applies when IDC Operating Mode is set to Anchored. Specify the vertical offset to the top left corner of the region to capture relative to the center of the barcode. Negative values move toward the top. Scan the following barcode, and then scan four barcodes from Numeric Barcodes in the range of +/- 1023. The default is -050. Note that you must use an application to set a negative value.
IDC Y Coordinate
355
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
IDC Width Parameter Name: DocCap_WIDTH Parameter # 598 SSI # F1h 56h
This parameter only applies when IDC Operating Mode is set to Anchored. Specify the width of the region to capture. Scan the following barcode, and then scan four barcodes from Numeric Barcodes in the range of 0000 to 1279. The default is 0300.
IDC Width
IDC Height Parameter Name: DocCap_HEIGHT Parameter # 599 SSI # F1h 57h
This parameter only applies when IDC Operating Mode is set to Anchored. Specify the height of the region to capture. Scan the following barcode, and then scan four barcodes from Numeric Barcodes in the range of 0000 to 1279. The default is 0050.
IDC Height
356
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
IDC Aspect Parameter Name: DocCap_ASPECT Parameter # 595 SSI # F1h 53h
This parameter only applies when IDC Operating Mode is set to Anchored. Specify the barcode's aspect ratio of a thin bar or space. The barcode's height is divided by this value to obtain the unit in the y-axis. Set this parameter to zero to calculate the aspect value automatically. Scan the following barcode, and then scan three barcodes from Numeric Barcodes in the range of 000 to 255. The default is 000.
IDC Aspect
IDC File Format Selector Parameter Name: DocCap_FMT Parameter # 601 SSI # F1h 59h
Select a document capture file format appropriate for your system (BMP, TIFF, or JPEG). The scanner stores captured areas in the selected format.
* JPEG
(1)
TIFF (4)
BMP (3)
357
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
IDC Bits Per Pixel Parameter Name: DocCap_BPP Parameter # 602 SSI # F1h 5Ah
Select the number of significant bits per pixel (BPP) to use when capturing an image. Select 1 BPP for a black and white image, 4 BPP to assign 1 of 16 levels of grey to each pixel, or 8 BPP to assign 1 of 256 levels of grey to each pixel.
NOTE: The scanner ignores these settings for JPEG file formats, which only support 8 BPP.
1 BPP (0)
4 BPP (1)
* 8 BPP
(2)
IDC JPEG Quality Parameter Name: DocCap_JPEG_Qual Parameter # 603 SSI # F1h 5Bh
Set the amount of JPEG compression to perform on the captured image. Higher numbers produce a better quality image but larger files. Scan the following barcode, and then scan three barcodes from Numeric Barcodes in the range of 005 to 100 decimal. The default is 065.
IDC JPEG Quality
358
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
IDC Find Box Outline Parameter Name: Sig_FINDBOX Parameter # 727 SSI # F1h D7h
This parameter only applies when IDC Operating Mode is set to Anchored. Scan Enable Find Box Outline to search for a rectangular border during document capture.
Enable Find Box Outline (1)
* Disable Find Box Outline
(0)
IDC Minimum Text Length Parameter Name: DocCap_MIN_TEXT Parameter # 656 SSI # F1h 90h
Specify the minimum number of characters encoded in a barcode for the IDC firmware to use it as an anchored or linked barcode. Set this to zero (the default) to disable all checking and use all barcodes. Scan the following barcode, and then scan two barcodes from Numeric Barcodes in the range of 00 to 55 decimal. The default is 00.
IDC Minimum Text Length
359
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
IDC Maximum Text Length Parameter Name: DocCap_MAX_TEXT Parameter # 657 SSI # F1h 91h
Specify the maximum number of characters encoded in a barcode for the IDC firmware to use it as an anchored or linked barcode. Set this to zero (the default) to disable all checking and use all barcodes. Scan the following barcode, and then scan two barcodes from Numeric Barcodes in the range of 00 to 55 decimal. The default is 00.
IDC Maximum Text Length
IDC Captured Image Brighten Parameter Name: Sig_BRIGHTEN Parameter # 654 SSI # F1h 8Eh
Enable Captured Image Brighten to make image brightness uniform and enhance contrast such that a large percent of the background pixels is made completely white (a smaller percent of pixels is made completely black if the program determines there is no danger of enhancing the contrast of a very bland area).
NOTE: This parameter is also used for Signature Capture.
* Enable Captured Image Brighten
(1)
Disable Captured Image Brighten (0)
360
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
IDC Captured Image Sharpen Parameter Name: Sig_SHARPEN Parameter # 658 SSI # F1h 92h
Enable this to enhance the sharpness of the image.
NOTE: This parameter is also used for Signature Capture.
* Enable Captured Image Sharpen
(1)
Disable Captured Image Sharpen (0)
361
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
IDC Border Type Parameter Name: DocCap_BORDER Parameter # 829 SSI # F2h 3Dh
This parameter only applies when IDC Operating Mode is set to Free-Form or Linked. Select the style of border used to determine the outline of the capture region:
· None - Capture the largest rectangular region within the field-of-view. · Black - The border must be black (such as a printed rectangular border). · White - The border must be white (e.g., paper edge on a dark background). · Advanced Edge Detection (AED) - Capture a region defined by edges of any color and potentially
broken.
* None
(0)
White (2)
Black (1)
Advanced Edge Detection (AED) (3)
362
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
IDC Delay Time Parameter Name: DocCap_DELAY Parameter # 830 SSI # F2h 3Eh
This parameter only applies when IDC Operating Mode is set to Free-Form. Set the delay for capturing a document after a trigger pull. Decoding a barcode aborts this delay. Scan the following barcode, and then scan three barcodes from Numeric Barcodes in the range of 000 to 200 decimal in units of 10 msec. The default is 000.
IDC Delay Time
IDC Zoom Limit Parameter Name: Sig_MIN_PERCENT Parameter # 651 SSI # F1h 8Bh
This parameter only applies when IDC Operating Mode is set to Anchored. Set the minimal "zoom" percentage value of a form for it to be considered for capture. This controls the quality of the captured form. The IDC firmware rejects capturing a form unless the width is at least the IDC Zoom Limit percentage of the IDC Width parameter. For example, if you set this parameter to 100 and IDC Width to 150, the form must be at least 300 pixels wide before it is captured (each unit module is scaled to two pixels). Set this to zero (the default) to disable all checking. Scan the following barcode, and then scan three barcodes from Numeric Barcodes in the range of 000 to 100 percent. The default is 000.
IDC Zoom Limit
363
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
IDC Maximum Rotation Parameter Name: Sig_MAX_ROT Parameter # 652 SSI # F1h 8Ch
This parameter only applies when IDC Operating Mode is set to Anchored. Set the maximum rotation any edge of the form can have in relation to the scanner's horizontal or vertical axis for it to be considered for capture. Set this to zero (the default) to disable all checking. Scan the following barcode, and then scan two barcodes from Numeric Barcodes in the range of 00 to 45 decimal. The default is 00.
IDC Maximum Rotation
364
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
Quick Start
This section familiarizes you with some of the Intelligent Document Capture features. IDC Demonstrations on page 366 includes instructions to demonstrate the Anchored, Free-Form, and Linked modes using a sample form to provide an understanding of how to use IDC. These examples do not illustrate all capabilities of the advanced IDC firmware. Build upon these using different parameter settings and forms.
Sample IDC Setup
To set up IDC: 1. Connect a scanner equipped with IDC to the host computer's USB port. 2. To set the scanner to the default settings and proper USB host type, scan Set Defaults followed by the
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) with Imaging Interface barcode. Allow time for the scanner to reset and the USB connection to remunerate after each scan before continuing.
Set Defaults
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) with Imaging Interface
3. Start the sample application and select the scanner in the SNAPI Scanners drop-down menu. 4. Set parameters as specified in IDC Demonstrations on page 366 using the sample application or by scanning
parameter barcodes in this guide. The barcode in the sample form is Code 128, which is enabled by default for decoding and as a Document Capture symbology. You can change these settings for your IDC application. 5. Perform each demo. When scanning, aim the scanner at the barcode in the center of the rectangle. Pull the scanner back so the rectangle is fully contained in the aiming pattern. When you pull the trigger, the scanner emits a low tone to indicate that the IDC firmware identified and captured an image, then a decode beep to indicate that the data transmitted. There may be several seconds between the two beeps, depending on the size of the captured image and options selected (de-skew, brighten, etc). You can move the scanner after the first beep, but continue the hold the trigger or the scanner may end the session before sending the data.
365
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
IDC Demonstrations
Anchored Mode Demo
· Set IDC Operating Mode on page 353 to Anchored. · Set parameters to these values:
· Set IDC Height on page 356 to 100. · Set IDC Width on page 356 to 90. · Set IDC X Coordinate on page 355 to -175. · Set IDC Y Coordinate on page 355 to -50. · Pull the trigger. The scanner decodes the barcode and captures an image of the text scroll. · Rotate the form clockwise so the word Capture is along the bottom edge, and pull the trigger. The scanner
decodes the barcode and captures the same image, including orientation. (This example also works with the form rotated counter-clockwise or upside down).
· Modify the values for height, width, x, and y. Pull the trigger. The captured area changes in size and
location.
· Cover the barcode with a small piece of paper (or your finger) and pull the trigger. The scanner does not
decode the barcode or capture an image.
What This Demonstrates
Anchored mode captures an image of fixed size and location relative to a barcode on the page. Parameters control the height, width, and location. The IDC firmware requires that a barcode is present in order to capture an image. It decodes the barcode and uses it to adjust the image to the upright orientation.
Free-Form Mode Demo
· Set IDC Operating Mode on page 353 to Free-Form. · Pull the trigger. The scanner decodes the barcode and captures an image of the entire rectangle, including
the contents.
· Modify the values for height, width, x, and y. Pull the trigger. Note that the captured image is not affected. · Rotate the form clockwise so the word Capture is along the bottom edge, and pull the trigger. The scanner
decodes the barcode and captures the same image, including orientation. (This example also works with the form rotated counterclockwise or upside down).
· Cover the barcode with a small piece of paper and pull the trigger. The scanner does not decode the
barcode and does not re-orient the captured image to the normal position, i.e., with the logo in the upper-left corner.
What This Demonstrates
Free-Form mode captures an image where a rectangular border on the page determines the size and position. It adjusts the image to the upright orientation if a barcode is found and decoded in the image.
Linked Mode Demo
Set IDC Operating Mode on page 353 to Linked.
Use the examples from the Free-Form Mode Demo, noting that the last item (covering the barcode) does not decode the barcode or capture an image.
366
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
What This Demonstrates Linked mode captures an image where a rectangular border on the page determines the size and position. The IDC firmware requires that a barcode is present in order to capture an image. It decodes the barcode and uses it to adjust the image to the upright orientation.
Other Suggestions
Hold the scanner at an angle (up/down or side to side) to the page instead of perpendicular to it. The IDC firmware de-skews and adjusts the brightness (enabled by default) to produce a quality image when the scanner is held at less than ideal conditions.
Quick Start Form
Figure 24 Quick Start Form
367
Digimarc (DS9308-SRD and DS9308-DLD)
Introduction
Digimarc Barcode is a machine-readable code that is invisible to people.
Digimarc Symbology Selection
Digimarc codes are reported as UPC-A, UPC-E, EAN-13 or GS1 DataBar Expanded.
NOTE: Conversion of the Digimarc reported code types to other barcode types is not supported.
AIM and Symbol code IDs are supported for the reported Digimarc code types.
Picklist
The Digimarc decoder searches configured block areas of the image for Digimarc codes. The Digimarc decoder works the same whether or not Picklist is enabled or disabled.
NOTE: Decode time could be greater given the extra processing done by system and decoder when in Picklist
mode.
368
Digimarc
Digimarc Digital Watermarks
Parameter # 1687 SSI # F8h 06h 97h
To enable or disable the Digimarc Digital Watermarks code scan the appropriate barcode below.
NOTE: Enabling Digimarc Digital Watermarks/DW increases decode times slightly. Increasing the Timeout
Between Decodes, Same Symbol on page 79 may be required to avoid double decodes.
* Enable Digimarc Digital Watermarks/DW
(1)
Disable Digimarc Digital Watermarks/DW (0)
369
Data Formatting: ADF, MDF, Preferred Symbol
Introduction
This chapter briefly describes the Zebra features available for customizing scanner operation.
Advanced Data Formatting (ADF)
Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) allows customizing data before transmission to the host device. Use ADF to edit scanned data to suit the host application's requirements. With ADF you scan one barcode per trigger pull. ADF is programmed using 123Scan. For a video on Creating an Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) Rule using 123Scan, go to: www.zebra.com/ScannerHowToVideos. For additional information, refer to the Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide.
Multicode Data Formatting (Hand-held Mode Only)
Multicode Data Formatting (MDF) enables a 2D scanner to scan all barcodes on a label with a single trigger pull, and then modify and transmit the data to meet host application requirements. MDF supports programming up to nine unique labels into one scanner. MDF also supports scanning multiple barcodes on opposite sides of a box by holding the trigger. Programming options include:
· Output all or specific barcodes · Control the barcode output sequence · Apply unique multicode data formatting (MDF) to each output barcode · Discard scanned data if all required barcodes are not present For more information, refer to the MDF and Preferred Symbol User Guide.
To watch a video on Creating an Multicode Data Formatting (MDF) Rule using 123Scan, go to: http://www.zebra.com/ScannerHowToVideos
370
Data Formatting: ADF, MDF, Preferred Symbol
MDF in Hands-Free Mode
MDF in a hands-free scanning mode may yield multiple unexpected and undesired outputs when a label (most likely on a complex label) passes through the scanner's field of view. This problem happens when the complex label's barcodes can be matched by more than one group (for example, Group 1 represents all barcodes present and Group 2 represent some barcodes present).
NOTE: A similar problem can also occur in the hand-held trigger mode. If multiple MDF rules/groups exist and all the
label is not in the field of view when pressing the trigger, the output may vary depending on which MDF rules/groups match.
The problem is demonstrated in Figure 25 and as follows:
1. As the label is moving through the field of view, it is first partially read (some of the barcodes in the field of view in Frame 2).
2. Then, the second decode occurs as it is fully read (all the barcodes in the field of view in Frame 3). 3. This yields two different outputs (instead of the expected single output) from the presentation of a label. This
problem is driven by a complex label inadvertently matching two different MDF rules/groups, thereby yielding two outputs.
Field of View - Frame 1 No label in field of view
Field of View - Frame 2 2 Barcodes Visible
Partial label in field of view Match MDF Rule for Group 2 Output 2 barcodes
Field of View - Frame 3 3 Barcodes Visible
Full label in field of view Match MDF Rule for Group 1 Output 3 barcodes
Figure 25 Scanning Label in a Horizontal Orientation
NOTE: To minimize issues associated with MDF hands-free mode, see MDF Best Practices on page 372.
371
Data Formatting: ADF, MDF, Preferred Symbol
MDF Best Practices
Suggestions to minimize the undesired multiple outputs during the MDF scanning in hands-free mode are as follows:
· Scan barcodes in a vertical orientation (see Figure 26).
Figure 26 Scanning Label in a Vertical Orientation
· When creating the MDF programming with multiple groups, the Group 1's pattern match should be the
most complicated (hardest to match), which equals to the most number of barcodes and criteria. Then Group 2, 3, and so on should be progressively matched more easily.
· When defining criteria, avoid enabling an output when the pattern is not matched. Set Output if NO
pattern match set as Discard bar code (see Figure 27).
Discard bar code
Figure 27 Figure Match Setting for Output
· Select Discard barcode(s) NOT within the pattern match in the 123Scan MDF setting. For more details,
select What is this? located next to this selection.
372
Data Formatting: ADF, MDF, Preferred Symbol
· To prevent double decodes of the same symbol, increase the Timeout Between Same Symbols setting.
See Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol on page 79 for more details.
· Turn the scanner's aimer on to assist operators in scanning the barcode in a more consistent manner.
Other reasons a label/barcode may not be decoded while in the field of view are as follows:
· The label out of focus (too close or too far away). See Decode Ranges on page 47 for correct working
range.
· Specular reflection (reflection off a shiny surface). · The label is presented at extreme angle to scanner.
Preferred Symbol
Preferred Symbol is a barcode prioritization technique that enables favored decoding of high priority barcode(s). The Preferred Symbol is the only barcode that is decoded and output within the preset Preferred Symbol Timeout. During this time, the scanner attempts to decode the prioritized barcode and reports only this barcode. For more information, refer to the Multicode Data Formatting and Preferred Symbol User Guide, p/n MN-002895-xx. To program Preferred Symbol via 123Scan, select 123Scan > Configuration Wizard > Symbologies screen, and then select Preferred Symbol from the drop-down menu. Preferred Symbol programming is saved in the 123Scan configuration file.
373
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL)
Introduction
The scanner uses internally embedded algorithms to parse out barcode information from standard US driver's licenses and certain other American Association of Motor Vehicle Administrators (AAMVA) compliant ID cards. Scanning these barcodes produces formatted data for use in age verification, credit card application information, and more.
This chapter describes how to program the scanner to read and use the data contained in the 2D barcodes on US driver's licenses and AAMVA compliant ID cards.
Table 31 DL Parsing Parameter Table
Parameter
Default
Page Number
DL Parsing Parameters
Driver's License Parsing
No Driver's License Parsing
375
Parsing Driver's License Data Fields
N/A
376
Driver's License Parse Field Barcodes
N/A
377
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes
N/A
379
Parser Version ID Barcode
N/A
388
Set Default Parameter
N/A
389
Output Gender as M or F
N/A
389
Date Format
CCYYMMDD
390
No Separator
N/A
391
Send Keystroke Control Characters Keyboard Characters
N/A
392
392
396
Parsing Rule Example
N/A
410
Embedded Driver's License Parsing ADF Example
N/A
414
374
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL)
Driver's License Parsing
Parameter # 645 SSI # F1 85
To enable driver's license parsing on the scanner, scan the Embedded Driver's License Parsing barcode. This does not require Zebra software (.DLL). Scan the barcodes on the following pages in the order indicating the sequence of data fields that the scanner outputs. See Parsing Driver's License Data Fields (Embedded Driver's License Parsing) on page 376 for more information.
* No Driver's License Parsing
Embedded Driver's License Parsing
375
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL)
Parsing Driver's License Data Fields (Embedded Driver's License Parsing)
To program a parsing rule: 1. Scan Begin New Driver's License Parse Rule on page 377. 2. Scan any of the field barcodes on the following pages, or Send Keystroke (Control Characters and
Keyboard Characters) on page 392. 3. After entering the entire rule, scan Save Driver's License Parse Rule on page 377 to save the rule.
NOTE: The scanner stores only one driver's license parsing rule in memory at a time. Saving a new rule
replaces the prior rule. To abort the programming sequence at any time during programming, scan Quit Entering Driver's License Rule on page 377. Any previously saved rule is retained. To erase a saved rule, scan Erase Driver's License Parse Rules on page 377.
Embedded Driver's License Parsing Criteria - Code Type
After specifying the fields and their order for the parsed driver's license, you can also apply standard ADF rules to the parsed data using the Parsed Driver's License criterion barcode in the Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide.
NOTE: Only create standard ADF rules on parsed driver's license data when configured for Embedded Driver's
License Parsing. See Embedded Driver's License Parsing ADF Example on page 414 for a sample ADF rule using this code type criterion.
376
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL)
Driver's License Parse Field Barcodes
Begin New Driver's License Parse Rule
Save Driver's License Parse Rule
Quit Entering Driver's License Rule
Erase Driver's License Parse Rules The supported parse fields begin below. Not all IDs present data in the same format. For example, some IDs can have separate fields for first name, last name, and middle initial, while others have a single field with the entire name. Also, some IDs expire on the subject's birth date while the expiration date field only indicates the year. To present data in a consistent format, use the following nine barcodes to return data calculated from the actual data contained in the ID barcode.
First Name
Middle Name/Initial
377
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL)
Driver's License Parse Field Barcodes (continued)
Last Name Name Suffix
Name Prefix Expiration Date
Birth Date Issue Date
ID Number (Formatted)
378
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL)
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes
AAMVA Issuer ID Full Name
Last Name First Name
Middle Name / Initial Name Suffix
Name Prefix
379
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL)
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes (continued)
Mailing Address Line 1
Mailing Address Line 2
Mailing Address City
Mailing Address State
Mailing Address Postal Code
Home Address Line 2
Home Address Line 1
380
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL)
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes (continued)
Home Address City Home Address State
Home Address Postal Code License ID Number
License Class License Restrictions
License Endorsements
381
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL)
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes (continued)
Height (Feet and/or Inches) Height (Centimeters)
Weight (Pounds) Weight (Kilograms)
Eye Color Hair Color
License Expiration Date
382
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL)
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes (continued)
Birth Date Gender
License Issue Date License Issue State
Social Security Number Permit Class
Permit Expiration Date
383
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL)
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes (continued)
Permit ID Number Permit Issue Date
Permit Restrictions Permit Endorsements
AKA Social Security Name AKA Full Name
AKA Last Name AKA First Name
384
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL)
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes (continued)
AKA Middle Name / Initial AKA Name Suffix
AKA Name Prefix AKA Birth Date
Issue Timestamp Number of Duplicates
Medical Codes
385
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL)
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes (continued)
Organ Donor
Nonresident
Customer ID
Weight Range
Document Discriminator
Federal Commission Codes
386
Country
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL)
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes (continued)
Place of Birth Audit Information
Inventory Control Race / Ethnicity
Std Vehicle Class Std Endorsements
Std Restrictions
387
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL)
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes (continued)
Class Description Endorsement Description
Restrictions Description Height in Inches
Height in Centimeters
Parser Version ID Barcode
Include this field to emit embedded parser software version identification Parser Version ID
388
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL)
User Preferences
Set Default Parameter
Scan this barcode to return all parameters to the default values listed in Table 32 on page 416.
* Set All Defaults Output Gender as M or F
Scan this barcode to report the gender as M or F instead of a numeric value. Output gender as M or F
389
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL)
Date Format
Use these barcodes to select the date format to display. Date fields include the following:
· CCYY = 4-digit year (CC=2-digit century [00-99], YY=2-digit year in the century [00-99]) · MM = 2-digit month [01-12] · DD = 2-digit day of the month [00-31]
The default is CCYYMMDD.
NOTE:
To specify a date separator, i.e., a character separating each field of the date, scan the Send <character> barcode that corresponds to the alphanumeric character to use as the date separator immediately following the date format barcode. To select no date separator, scan the No Separator DL parsing rule immediately following the date format barcode.
* CCYYMMDD MMDDCCYY DDMMCCYY
CCYYDDMM
MMCCYYDD
DDCCYYMM
390
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL)
Date Format (continued)
YYMMDD
YYDDMM
MMDDYY
MMYYDD
DDMMYY
DDYYMM
No Separator
Scan this barcode immediately following a date format barcode to use no separator character between the date fields.
No Separator
391
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL)
Send Keystroke (Control Characters and Keyboard Characters)
Control Characters
Scan a Send barcode for the keystroke to send.
Send Control B
Send Control A
Send Control D Send Control F Send Control H
Send Control C Send Control E Send Control G
392
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL) Control Characters (continued)
Send Control I
Send Control J
Send Control L Send Control N Send Control P
Send Control K Send Control M Send Control O
393
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL) Control Characters (continued)
Send Control Q Send Control R
Send Control S Send Control T
Send Control U Send Control V
Send Control W
394
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL) Control Characters (continued)
Send Control X Send Control Y
Send Control Z Send Control [
Send Control \ Send Control ]
395
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL) Control Characters (continued)
Send Control 6
Keyboard Characters
Scan a Send barcode for the keyboard characters to send.
Send Control -
Send Space
Send !
Send "
Send #
396
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL) Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send $ Send %
Send & Send `
Send ( Send )
Send *
397
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL) Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send + Send ,
Send Send .
Send / Send 0
Send 1
398
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL) Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send 2 Send 3
Send 4 Send 5
Send 6 Send 7
Send 8
399
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL) Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send 9 Send :
Send ; Send <
Send = Send >
Send ?
400
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL) Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send @ Send A
Send B Send C
Send D Send E
Send F
401
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL) Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send G Send H
Send I Send J
Send K Send L
Send M
402
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL) Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send N Send O
Send P Send Q
Send R Send S
Send T
403
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL) Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send U Send V
Send W Send X
Send Y Send Z
Send [
404
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL) Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send \ Send ]
Send ^ Send _
Send ` Send a
Send b
405
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL) Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send c Send d
Send e Send f
Send g Send h
Send i
406
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL) Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send j Send k
Send l Send m
Send n Send o
Send p
407
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL) Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send q Send r
Send s Send t
Send u Send v
Send w
408
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL) Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send x Send y
Send z Send {
Send | Send }
Send ~
409
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL) Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send Tab Key
Send Enter Key
Parsing Rule Example
Scan the following barcodes in sequence to program the scanner to extract and transmit first, middle, and last names; mailing address line 1; mailing address line 2; mailing address city; mailing address state; mailing address postal code; and, date of birth. Then, scan a driver's license barcode.
NOTE: This example applies to RS-232. To use this example with a USB interface, enable Function Key
Mapping on page 246 to send the Enter key properly.
1
Embedded Driver's License Parsing
2
3
First Name
Begin New Driver's License Parse Rule
410
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL)
Parsing Rule Example (continued)
4
Send Space
5
Middle Name / Initial
7
6
Send Space
Last Name
9
8
Send Enter Key
Mailing Address Line 1
411
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL)
Parsing Rule Example (continued)
10
Send Space
11
Mailing Address Line 2
13
12
Send Enter Key
Mailing Address City
15
14
Send Space
Mailing Address State
412
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL)
Parsing Rule Example (continued)
16
Send Space
17
Mailing Address Postal Code
19
18
Send Enter Key
Birth Date
21
20
Send Enter Key
Save Driver's License Parse Rule
413
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL)
Embedded Driver's License Parsing ADF Example
This example creates a parsing rule for parsed data configured to result in the format: Last Name, First Name
1
Begin New Driver's License Parse Rule
2
Last Name
3
Send ,
5
4
Send Space
First Name
6
Save Driver's License Parse Rule
414
Driver's License Set Up (DS9308-DL)
Then, in order to limit the full name to 15 characters, create the following ADF rule:
1
Begin New Rule
2
Criterion: Parsed Driver's License
3
Action: Send Next 15 Characters
4
Save Rule For a license belonging to Michael Williams, the parsed data is Williams, Michael and Williams, Micha after applying the previous ADF rule.
415
Parameter Defaults
Table 32 Parameter Defaults
Parameter
Parameter Number 1
SSI Number 2
Default
Page Number
Serial Number
N/A
N/A
N/A
54
Report Software Version
N/A
N/A
N/A
54
Manufacturing Information
N/A
N/A
N/A
54
Standard User Preferences
Set Default Parameter
N/A
N/A
N/A
62
Parameter Barcode Scanning
236
ECh
Enable
63
Beep After Good Decode
56
38h
Enable
63
Beep Volume
140
8Ch
High
64
Beep Tone
145
91h
Medium
65
Beep Duration
628
F1h 74h
Short
66
Volume Adjustment Trigger
403
F0h 93h
5 Seconds
67
Timeout
Suppress Power Up Beeps
721
F1h D1h
Do Not Suppress
68
Direct Decode Indicator
859
F2h 5Bh
Disable
69
Low Power Mode
128
80h
Disable
70
Time Delay to Low Power Mode
146
92h
1 Hour
71
Trigger Mode
138
8Ah
Presentation Mode
73
Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern 306
F0h 32h
Enable
74
Presentation (Hands-free) Decode 590 Aiming Pattern
F1h 4Eh
Disable Presentation
75
(Hands-free) Decode Aiming
Pattern
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
416
Parameter Defaults
Table 32 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number 1
SSI Number 2
Default
Momentary Trigger Mode Timeout 2030
EDh
5 Seconds
Picklist Mode
402
F0h 92h
Enable Picklist Mode in
Hand-held Mode
Continuous Barcode Read
649
F1h 89h
Disable
Unique Barcode Reporting
723
F1h D3h
Enable
Decode Session Timeout
136
88h
9.9 Seconds
Timeout Between Decodes, Same 137
89h
Symbol
0.5 Seconds
Timeout Between Decodes,
144
90h
Different Symbols
0.1 Seconds
Triggered Timeout, Same Symbol 724
F1h D4h
Disable
Mobile Phone/Display Mode
716
F1h CCh
Normal
PDF Prioritization
719
F1h CFh
Disable
PDF Prioritization Timeout
720
F1h D0h
200 ms
Decoding Illumination
298
F0h 2Ah
Enable
Illumination Brightness
669
F1h 9Dh
High
Motion Tolerance (Hand-held
858
Trigger Mode Only)
F2h 5Ah
Less Motion Tolerance
Product ID (PID) Type
1281
F8h 05h 01h Host Type Unique
Product ID (PID) Value
1725
F8h 06h BDh 0
ECLevel
1710
F8h 06h AEh 0
Miscellaneous Options
Enter Key
N/A
N/A
N/A
Tab Key
N/A
N/A
N/A
Transmit Code ID Character
45
2Dh
None
Prefix Value
99, 105
63h, 69h
7013 <CR><LF>
Suffix 1 Value Suffix 2 Value
98, 104 100, 106
62h, 68h 64h, 6Ah
7013 <CR><LF>
Scan Data Transmission Format 235
EBh
Data As Is
FN1 Substitution Values
103, 109
67h, 6Dh
7013 <CR><LF>
Transmit "No Read" Message
94
5E
Disable
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
417
Page Number 76 77
78 78 79 79
80
80 81 82 82 83 83 85
85 86 86
87 87 88 89 89
90 92 93
Parameter Defaults
Table 32 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number 1
SSI Number 2
Default
Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval
1118
F8h 04h 5Eh Disable
securPharm Decoding
1752
F8h 06h D8h Disable
securPharm Output Formatting
1753
F8h 06h D9h No Formatting
Image Capture Preferences
Operational Modes
N/A
N/A
N/A
Image Capture Illumination
361
F0h 69h
Enable
Image Capture Autoexposure
360
F0h 68h
Enable
Fixed Exposure
567
F4h F1h 37h 100
Analog Gain
1232
F4h D0h
Analog Gain x 2
Digital Gain
1233
F4h D1h
32
Gain / Exposure Priority for
562
Snapshot Mode
F1h 32h
Autodetect
Snapshot Mode Timeout
323
F0h 43h
0 (30 seconds)
Snapshot Aiming Pattern
300
F0h 2Ch
Enable
Silence Operational Mode Changes 1293
F8h 05h 0Dh Disable (do not silence)
Image Cropping
301
F0h 2Dh
Disable
Crop to Pixel Addresses
315
F4h F0h 3Bh 0 top
316
F4h F0h 3Ch 0 left
317
F4h F0h 3Dh 799 bottom
318
F4h F0h 3Eh 1279 right
Image Size (Number of Pixels)
302
F0h 2Eh
Full
Image Brightness (Target White) 390
F0h 86h
180
JPEG Image Options
299
F0h 2Bh
Quality
JPEG Quality Value
305
F0h 31h
65
JPEG Size Value
561
F1h 31h
160 kB
Image Enhancement
564
F1h 34h
Low (1)
Image File Format Selection
304
F0h 30h
JPEG
Image Rotation
665
F1h 99h
0
Bits per Pixel (BPP)
303
F0h 2Fh
8 BPP
Signature Capture
93
5Dh
Disable
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page Number 94 95 96
102 103 103 104 105 105 106
107 108 108 109 109
111 112 112 113 113 114 115 116 117 118
418
Parameter Defaults
Table 32 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number 1
Signature Capture Image File
313
Format Selection
Signature Capture Bits per Pixel
314
(BPP)
Signature Capture Width
366
Signature Capture Height
367
Signature Capture JPEG Quality 421
Enable/Disable All Code Types
SSI Number 2 F0h 39h
F0h 3Ah
F4h F0h 6Eh F4h F0h 6Fh F0h A5h
JPEG
8 BPP
400 100 65
Default
1D Symbologies UPC/EAN/JAN UPC-A UPC-E
1
01h
Enable
2
02h
Enable
UPC-E1
12
0Ch
Disable
EAN-8/JAN 8
4
04h
Enable
EAN-13/JAN 13
3
03h
Enable
Bookland EAN
83
53h
Disable
Bookland ISBN Format
576
F1h 40h
ISBN-10
ISSN EAN
617
F1h 69h
Disable
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN
16
Supplementals
(2 and 5 digits)
User-Programmable
Supplementals
579
Supplemental 1:
580
Supplemental 2:
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental
80
Redundancy
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN
672
Supplemental
AIM ID
Transmit UPC-A Check Digit
40
10h
Ignore
F1h 43h F1h 44h
50h
F1h A0h
000
10 Combined
28h
Enable
Transmit UPC-E Check Digit
41
29h
Enable
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
419
Page Number 119 120 121 121 121 131
131 132 132 133 133 134 135 136 137
140
140 141
142 142
Parameter Defaults
Table 32 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number 1
SSI Number 2
Default
Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit
42
2Ah
Enable
UPC-A Preamble
34
22h
System Character
UPC-E Preamble
35
23h
System Character
UPC-E1 Preamble
36
24h
System Character
Convert UPC-E to UPC-A
37
25h
Disable
Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A
38
26h
Disable
EAN/JAN Zero Extend
39
27h
Disable
UCC Coupon Extended Code
85
55h
Disable
Coupon Report
730
F1h DAh
New Coupon Format
UPC Reduced Quiet Zone
1289
F8h 05h 09h Disable
Code 128
Code 128
8
08h
Enable
Set Length(s) for Code 128
209, 210
D1h, D2h
Any Length
GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128) 14
0Eh
Enable
ISBT 128
84
54h
Enable
ISBT Concatenation
577
F1h 41h
Disable
Check ISBT Table
578
F1h 42h
Enable
ISBT Concatenation Redundancy 223
DFh
10
Code 128 <FNC4>
1254
F8h 04h E6h Honor
Code 128 Security Level
751
F1h EFh
Security Level 1
Code 128 Reduced Quiet Zone
1208
F8h 04h B8h Disable
Code 39
Code 39
0
00h
Enable
Trioptic Code 39
13
0Dh
Disable
Convert Code 39 to Code 32
86
56h
Disable
(Italian Pharmacy Code)
Code 32 Prefix
231
E7h
Disable
Set Length(s) for Code 39
18, 19
12h, 13h
1 to 55
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
420
Page Number 143 144 145 146 147 147 148 148 149 150
150 151 152 153 153 154 155 155 156 157
157 158 158
159 159
Parameter Defaults
Table 32 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number 1
SSI Number 2
Code 39 Check Digit Verification 48
30h
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit
43
2Bh
Default Disable Disable
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion
17
Code 39 Security Level
750
11h F1h EEh
Disable Security Level 1
Code 39 Reduced Quiet Zone
1209
F8h 04h B9h Disable
Code 93 Code 93
9
09h
Enable
Set Length(s) for Code 93
26, 27
1Ah, 1Bh
1 to 55
Code 11 Code 11
10
0Ah
Disable
Set Lengths for Code 11
28, 29
1Ch, 1Dh
4 to 55
Code 11 Check Digit Verification 52
34h
Disable
Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) 47
2Fh
Disable
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
6
06h
Enable
Set Lengths for I 2 of 5
22, 23
16h, 17h
6 to 55
I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification
49
31h
Disable
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit
44
2Ch
Disable
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN 13 Febraban
82 1750
52h
Disable
F8h 06h D6h Disable
I 2 of 5 Security Level
1121
F8h 04h 61h Security Level 1
I 2 of 5 Reduced Quiet Zone
1210
F8h 04h BAh Disable
Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF) Discrete 2 of 5
5
05h
Disable
Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5
20, 21
14h 15h
1 to 55
Codabar (NW - 7) Codabar
7
07h
Enable
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
421
Page Number 161 161 162 163 164
164 165
167 167 169 170
170 171 172 173 173 174 175 176
176 177
179
Parameter Defaults
Table 32 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number 1
SSI Number 2
Default
Set Lengths for Codabar
24, 25
18h, 19h
4 to 55
CLSI Editing
54
36h
Disable
NOTIS Editing
55
37h
Disable
Codabar Security Level
1776
F8h 06h F0h Security Level 1
Codabar Upper or Lower Case
855
Start/
Stop Characters Detection
F2h 57h
Upper Case
Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit Verification
1784
F8h 06h F8h Disable
Transmit Codabar Check Digit
704
F1h C0h
Disable
MSI
MSI
11
0Bh
Disable
Set Length(s) for MSI
30, 31
1Eh, 1Fh
4 to 55
MSI Check Digits
50
32h
One MSI Check Digit
Transmit MSI Check Digit
46
2Eh
Disable
MSI Check Digit Algorithm
51
33h
Mod 10/Mod 10
MSI Reduced Quiet Zone
1392
F8h 05h 70h Disable
Chinese 2 of 5
Chinese 2 of 5
408
F0h 98h
Disable
Matrix 2 of 5
Matrix 2 of 5
618
F1h 6Ah
Disable
Matrix 2 of 5 Lengths
619
F1h 6Bh
4 to 55
620
F1h 6Ch
Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit
622
F1h 6Eh
Disable
Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit 623
F1h 6Fh
Disable
Korean 3 of 5
Korean 3 of 5
581
F1h 45h
Disable
Inverse 1D
Inverse 1D
586
F1h 4Ah
Regular
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
422
Page Number 179 181 181 182 183
183 184
184 185 187 187 189 189
190
190 191 193 193
194
194
Parameter Defaults
Table 32 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number 1
SSI Number 2
Default
Page Number
GS1 DataBar
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional
338
F0h 52h
Enable
196
(formerly GS1 DataBar-14), GS1
DataBar Truncated, GS1 DataBar
Stacked, GS1 DataBar Stacked
Omnidirectional
GS1 DataBar Limited
339
F0h 53h
Enable
197
GS1 DataBar Expanded, GS1
340
F0h 54h
Enable
197
DataBar Expanded Stacked
Convert GS1 DataBar to
397
F0h 8Dh
Disable
198
UPC/EAN/JAN
GS1 DataBar Security Level
1706
F8h 06h AAh Level 1
199
GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check 728
F1h D8h
Level 3
200
Symbology-Specific Security Features
Redundancy Level
78
4Eh
1
201
Security Level
77
4Dh
1
203
1D Quiet Zone Level
1288
F8h 05h 08h 1
204
Intercharacter Gap Size
381
F0h 7Dh
Normal
205
Composite Codes
Composite CC-C
341
F0h 55h
Disable
205
Composite CC-A/B
342
F0h 56h
Disable
206
Composite TLC-39
371
F0h 73h
Disable
206
Composite Inverse
1113
F8h 04h 59h Regular Only
206
UPC Composite Mode
344
F0h 58h
UPC Never Linked
208
Composite Beep Mode
398
F0h 8Eh
Beep As Each Code Type is 209
Decoded
GS1-128 Emulation Mode for
427
F0h ABh
Disable
209
UCC/EAN Composite Codes
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
423
Parameter Defaults
Table 32 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number 1
2D Symbologies
PDF417
15
SSI Number 2 0Fh
Default Enable
MicroPDF417
227
E3h
Disable
Code 128 Emulation
123
7Bh
Disable
Data Matrix
292
F0h 24h
Enable
GS1 Data Matrix
1336
F8h 05h 38h Disable
Data Matrix Inverse
588
F1h 4Ch
Inverse Autodetect
Decode Data Matrix Mirror Images 537
F1h 19h
Auto
Maxicode
294
F0h 26h
Disable
QR Code
293
F0h 25h
Enable
GS1 QR
1343
F8h 05h 3Fh Enable
MicroQR
573
F1h 3Dh
Enable
Linked QR Mode
1847
737h
Linked QR Only
Aztec
574
F1h 3Eh
Enable
Aztec Inverse
589
F1h 4Dh
Inverse Autodetect
Han Xin
1167
F8h 04h 8Fh Disable
Han Xin Inverse
1168
F8h 04h 90h Regular
Grid Matrix
1718
F8h 06h B6h Disable
Grid Matrix Inverse
1719
F8h 06h B7h Regular Only
Grid Matrix Mirror DotCode
1736 1906
F8h 06h C8h Regular Only
F8 07 72h
Disable
DotCode Inverse
1907
F8 07 73h
Inverse Autodetect
DotCode Mirrored
1908
F8 07 74h
Autodetect
DotCode Prioritize
1937
F8 07 91h
Enable
Macro PDF Flush Macro PDF Buffer
N/A
N/A
N/A
Abort Macro PDF Entry
N/A
N/A
N/A
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
424
Page Number
210 210 211 212 212 213 214 215 215 216 216 217 218 218 219 219 220 220 221 222 223 224 225
226 226
Parameter Defaults
Table 32 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number 1
SSI Number 2
Default
Postal Codes
US Postnet
89
59h
Disable
US Planet
90
5Ah
Disable
Transmit US Postal Check Digit
95
5Fh
Enable
UK Postal
91
5Bh
Disable
Transmit UK Postal Check Digit
96
60h
Enable
Japan Postal
290
F0h 22h
Disable
Australia Post
291
F0h 23h
Disable
Australia Post Format
718
F1h CEh
Autodiscriminate
Netherlands KIX Code
326
F0h 46h
Disable
USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent 592 Mail
F1h 50h
Disable
UPU FICS Postal
611
F1h 63h
Disable
Mailmark
1337
F8h 05h 39h Disable
USB Host Parameters
USB Device Type
N/A
N/A
USB Keyboard HID
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) Status N/A
N/A
Handshaking
Enable
USB Keystroke Delay
N/A
N/A
No Delay
USB Caps Lock Override
N/A
N/A
Disable
Barcodes with Unknown Characters
N/A
N/A
Send Barcodes with Unknown Characters
USB Convert Unknown to Code 39 N/A
N/A
Disable
USB Fast HID
N/A
N/A
Enable
USB Polling Interval
N/A
N/A
3 msec
Keypad Emulation
N/A
N/A
Enable
Quick Keypad Emulation
N/A
N/A
Enable
Keypad Emulation with Leading
N/A
N/A
Zero
Enable
USB FN1 Substitution
N/A
N/A
Disable
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
425
Page Number
226 227 227 228 228 229 229 230 231 231
232 232
237 239
239 240 240
241 241 242 244 244 245
245
Parameter Defaults
Table 32 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number 1
SSI Number 2
Default
Function Key Mapping
N/A
N/A
Disable
Simulated Caps Lock
N/A
N/A
Disable
Convert Case
N/A
N/A
None
USB Static CDC
N/A
N/A
Enable
CDC Beep on <BEL>
N/A
N/A
Enable
TGCS (IBM) USB Beep Directive N/A
N/A
Ignore
TGCS (IBM) USB Barcode
N/A
N/A
Configuration Directive
Ignore
TGCS (IBM) USB Specification
N/A
N/A
Version
Version 2.2
USB CDC Host Variant
1713
F8 06 B1
Standard CDC
SSI Host Parameters
Select SSI Host
N/A
N/A
N/A
Baud Rate
156
9Ch
9600
Parity
158
9Eh
None
Check Parity
151
97h
Disable
Stop Bits
157
9Dh
1
Software Handshaking
159
9Fh
ACK/NAK
Host RTS Line State
154
9Ah
Low
Decode Data Packet Format
238
EEh
Send Raw Decode Data
Host Serial Response Timeout
155
9Bh
Low - 2 Seconds
Host Character Timeout
239
EFh
Low - 200 msec
Multipacket Option
334
F0h 4Eh
Multipacket Option 1
Interpacket Delay
335
F0h 4Fh
Minimum - 0 msec
Event Reporting
Decode Event
256
F0h 00h
Disable
Boot Up Event
258
F0h 02h
Disable
Parameter Event
259
F0h 03h
Disable
RS-232 Host Parameters
RS-232 Host Types
N/A
N/A
Standard
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
426
Page Number 246 246 247 248 248 248 249
249
250
265 265 267 268 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275
276 277 278
284
Parameter Defaults
Table 32 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number 1
SSI Number 2
Default
Baud Rate
N/A
N/A
9600
Parity
N/A
N/A
None
Stop Bits
N/A
N/A
1 Stop Bit
Data Bits
N/A
N/A
8-bit
Check Receive Errors
N/A
N/A
Enable
Hardware Handshaking
N/A
N/A
None
Software Handshaking
N/A
N/A
None
Host Serial Response Timeout
N/A
N/A
2 Seconds
RTS Line State
N/A
N/A
Low RTS
Beep on <BEL>
N/A
N/A
Disable
Intercharacter Delay
N/A
N/A
0 msec
Nixdorf Beep/LED Options
N/A
N/A
Normal Operation
Barcodes with Unknown Characters
N/A
N/A
Send Barcode With Unknown Characters
IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters
Port Address
N/A
N/A
None
Convert Unknown to Code 39
N/A
N/A
Disable
RS-485 Beep Directive
N/A
N/A
Ignore
RS-485 Barcode Configuration
N/A
N/A
Directive
Ignore
IBM-485 Specification Version
N/A
N/A
Original Specification
Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters
Keyboard Wedge Host Type
N/A
N/A
IBM AT Notebook
Barcodes with Unknown Characters
N/A
N/A
Send Barcodes with Unknown Characters
Keystroke Delay
N/A
N/A
No Delay
Intra-keystroke Delay
N/A
N/A
Disable
Alternate Numeric Keypad
N/A
N/A
Emulation
Enable
Quick Keypad Emulation
N/A
N/A
Enable
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
427
Page Number 286 287 287 288 288 289 291 293 294 294 295 296 296
301 302 302 303
303
307 307
308 308 309
309
Parameter Defaults
Table 32 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number 1
SSI Number 2
Default
Simulated Caps Lock
N/A
N/A
Disable
Caps Lock Override
N/A
N/A
Disable
Convert Case
N/A
N/A
Do Not Convert
Function Key Mapping
N/A
N/A
Disable
FN1 Substitution
N/A
N/A
Disable
Send Make and Break
N/A
N/A
Send Make and Break Scan Codes
OCR Programming Parameters
OCR-A
680
F1h A8h
Disable
OCR-A Variant
684
F1h ACh
OCR-A Full ASCII
OCR-B
681
F1h A9h
Disable
OCR-B Variant
685
F1h ADh
OCR-B Full ASCII
MICR E13B
682
F1h AAh
Disable
US Currency Serial Number
683
F1h ABh
Disable
OCR Orientation
687
F1h AFh
0o
OCR Lines
691
F1h B3h
1
OCR Minimum Characters
689
F1h B1h
3
OCR Maximum Characters
690
F1h B2h
100
OCR Subset
686
F1h AEh
Selected font variant
OCR Quiet Zone
695
F1h B7h
50
OCR Template
547
F1h 23h
99999999
OCR Check Digit Modulus
688
F1h B0h
1
OCR Check Digit Multiplier
700
F1h BCh
121212121212
OCR Check Digit Validation
694
F1h B6h
None
Inverse OCR
856
F2h 58h
Regular
OCR Redundancy
1770
F8h 06h EAh Level 1
Intelligent Document Capture (IDC) Parameters
IDC Operating Mode
594
F1h 52h
Off
IDC Symbology
655
F1h 8Fh
001
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page Number 310 311 311 312 312 313
317 318 319 320 324 325 325 327 327 328 328 329 329 339 339 340 346 347
353 354
428
Parameter Defaults
Table 32 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number 1
SSI Number 2
Default
IDC X Coordinate
596
F4h F1h 54h -151
IDC Y Coordinate
597
F4h F1h 55h -050
IDC Width
598
F1h 56h
0300
IDC Height
599
F1h 57h
0050
IDC Aspect
595
F1h 53h
000
IDC File Format Selector
601
F1h 59h
JPEG
IDC Bits Per Pixel
602
F1h 5Ah
8 BPP
IDC JPEG Quality
603
F1h 5Bh
065
IDC Find Box Outline
727
F1h D7h
Disable
IDC Minimum Text Length
656
F1h 90h
00
IDC Maximum Text Length
657
F1h 91h
00
IDC Captured Image Brighten
654
F1h 8Eh
Enable
IDC Captured Image Sharpen
658
F1h 92h
Enable
IDC Border Type
829
F2h 3Dh
None
IDC Delay Time
830
F2h 3Eh
000
IDC Zoom Limit
651
F1h 8Bh
000
IDC Maximum Rotation
652
F1h 8Ch
00
Digimarc Digital Watermarks
Digimarc Digital Watermarks/DW 1687
F8h 06h 97h Enable
DL Parsing Parameters
Driver's License Parsing
N/A
N/A
No Driver's License Parsing
Parsing Driver's License Data
N/A
N/A
N/A
Fields
Driver's License Parse Field
N/A
N/A
N/A
Barcodes
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes
N/A
N/A
N/A
Parser Version ID Barcode
N/A
N/A
N/A
Set Default Parameter
N/A
N/A
N/A
Output Gender as M or F
N/A
N/A
N/A
Date Format
N/A
N/A
CCYYMMDD
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page Number 355 355 356 356 357 357 358 358 359 359 360 360 361 362 363 363 364
369
375 376
377
379 388 389 389 390
429
Parameter Defaults
Table 32 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number 1
SSI Number 2
Default
No Separator
N/A
N/A
N/A
Send Keystroke Control Characters Keyboard Characters
N/A
N/A
N/A
Parsing Rule Example
N/A
N/A
N/A
Embedded Driver's License
N/A
N/A
N/A
Parsing ADF Example
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page Number 391 392
410 414
430
Numeric Barcodes
Cancel
To correct an error or change a selection, scan the barcode below.
Cancel
Numeric Barcodes
For parameters requiring specific numeric values, scan the appropriately numbered barcode(s).
0 1
2 3
431
Numeric Barcodes
Numeric Barcodes (continued)
4 5
6 7
8 9
432
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Cancel
To correct an error or change a selection, scan the following barcode.
Cancel
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Space $
#
433
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
% *
+
.
/ !
434
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
" &
` (
) :
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
;
435
Alphanumeric Barcodes
< =
> ?
@ [
\
436
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
] ^
_ `
437
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
NOTE: Do not confuse the following barcodes with those on the numeric keypad.
0 1
2 3
4 5
438
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
6 8 End of Message
7 9 Cancel
439
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
A B
C D
E F
440
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
G H
I J
K L
441
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
M N
O P
Q R
442
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
S T
U V
W X
443
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
Y Z
a b
c d
444
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
e f
g h
i j
445
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
k l
m n
o p
446
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
q r
s t
u v
447
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
w x
y z
{ |
448
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
} ~
449
ASCII Character Sets
Introduction
NOTE:
For the Keyboard Wedge Interface, Code 39 Full ASCII interprets the barcode special character ($ + % /) preceding a Code 39 character and assigns an ASCII character value to the pair. For example, if you enable Code 39 Full ASCII and scan +B, it transmits as b, %J as ?, and %V as @. Scanning ABC%I outputs the keystroke equivalent of ABC >.
Table 33 ASCII Character Set
ASCII Value (Prefix/Suffix Value)
Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Char
Keystroke
ASCII Character (Applies to RS-232 Only)
1000
%U
CTRL 2
NUL
1001
$A
CTRL A
SOH
1002
$B
CTRL B
STX
1003
$C
CTRL C
ETX
1004
$D
CTRL D
EOT
1005
$E
CTRL E
ENQ
1006
$F
CTRL F
ACK
1007
$G
1008
$H
1009
$I
CTRL G CTRL H/BACKSPACE1 CTRL I/HORIZONTAL TAB1
BELL BCKSPC HORIZ TAB
1010
$J
CTRL J
LF/NW LN
1011
$K
CTRL K
VT
1012
$L
1013
$M
CTRL L CTRL M/ENTER1
FF CR/ENTER
1014
$N
CTRL N
SO
1The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping on page 246 or Function Key Mapping on page 312. Otherwise, the unbold keystroke transmits.
450
ASCII Character Sets
Table 33 ASCII Character Set (Continued)
ASCII Value (Prefix/Suffix Value)
Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Char
Keystroke
ASCII Character (Applies to RS-232 Only)
1015
$O
CTRL O
SI
1016
$P
CTRL P
DLE
1017
$Q
CTRL Q
DC1/XON
1018
$R
CTRL R
DC2
1019
$S
CTRL S
DC3/XOFF
1020
$T
CTRL T
DC4
1021
$U
CTRL U
NAK
1022
$V
CTRL V
SYN
1023
$W
CTRL W
ETB
1024
$X
CTRL X
CAN
1025
$Y
CTRL Y
EM
1026
$Z
CTRL Z
SUB
1027
%A
CTRL [
ESC
1028
%B
CTRL \
FS
1029
%C
CTRL ]
GS
1030
%D
CTRL 6
RS
1031
%E
CTRL -
US
1032
Space
Space
Space
1033
/A
!
!
1034
/B
"
"
1035
/C
#
#
1036
/D
$
$
1037
/E
%
%
1038
/F
&
&
1039
/G
`
`
1040
/H
(
(
1041
/I
)
)
1042
/J
*
*
1043
/K
+
+
1The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping on page 246 or Function Key Mapping on page 312. Otherwise, the unbold keystroke transmits.
451
ASCII Character Sets
Table 33 ASCII Character Set (Continued)
ASCII Value (Prefix/Suffix Value)
Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Char
Keystroke
ASCII Character (Applies to RS-232 Only)
1044
/L
,
,
1045
-
-
-
1046
.
.
.
1047
/o
/
/
1048
0
0
0
1049
1
1
1
1050
2
2
2
1051
3
3
3
1052
4
4
4
1053
5
5
5
1054
6
6
6
1055
7
7
7
1056
8
8
8
1057
9
9
9
1058
/Z
:
:
1059
%F
;
;
1060
%G
<
<
1061
%H
=
=
1062
%I
>
>
1063
%J
?
?
1064
%V
@
@
1065
A
A
A
1066
B
B
B
1067
C
C
C
1068
D
D
D
1069
E
E
E
1070
F
F
F
1071
G
G
G
1072
H
H
H
1The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping on page 246 or Function Key Mapping on page 312. Otherwise, the unbold keystroke transmits.
452
ASCII Character Sets
Table 33 ASCII Character Set (Continued)
ASCII Value (Prefix/Suffix Value)
Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Char
Keystroke
ASCII Character (Applies to RS-232 Only)
1073
I
I
I
1074
J
J
J
1075
K
K
K
1076
L
L
L
1077
M
M
M
1078
N
N
N
1079
O
O
O
1080
P
P
P
1081
Q
Q
Q
1082
R
R
R
1083
S
S
S
1084
T
T
T
1085
U
U
U
1086
V
V
V
1087
W
W
W
1088
X
X
X
1089
Y
Y
Y
1090
Z
Z
Z
1091
%K
[
[
1092
%L
\
\
1093
%M
]
]
1094
%N
^
^
1095
%O
_
_
1096
%W
`
`
1097
+A
a
a
1098
+B
b
b
1099
+C
c
c
1100
+D
d
d
1101
+E
e
e
1The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping on page 246 or Function Key Mapping on page 312. Otherwise, the unbold keystroke transmits.
453
ASCII Character Sets
Table 33 ASCII Character Set (Continued)
ASCII Value (Prefix/Suffix Value)
Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Char
Keystroke
ASCII Character (Applies to RS-232 Only)
1102
+F
f
f
1103
+G
g
g
1104
+H
h
h
1105
+I
i
i
1106
+J
j
j
1107
+K
k
k
1108
+L
l
l
1109
+M
m
m
1110
+N
n
n
1111
+O
o
o
1112
+P
p
p
1113
+Q
q
q
1114
+R
r
r
1115
+S
s
s
1116
+T
t
t
1117
+U
u
u
1118
+V
v
v
1119
+W
w
w
1120
+X
x
x
1121
+Y
y
y
1122
+Z
z
z
1123
%P
{
{
1124
%Q
I
|
1125
%R
}
}
1126
%S
~
~
1127
Undefined
7013
ENTER
1The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping on page 246 or Function Key Mapping on page 312. Otherwise, the unbold keystroke transmits.
454
ASCII Character Sets
Table 34 ALT Key Character Set ALT Keys 2064 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 2075 2076 2077 2078 2079 2080 2081 2082 2083 2084 2085 2086 2087 2088 2089 2090
Keystroke ALT 2 ALT A ALT B ALT C ALT D ALT E ALT F ALT G ALT H ALT I ALT J ALT K ALT L ALT M ALT N ALT O ALT P ALT Q ALT R ALT S ALT T ALT U ALT V ALT W ALT X ALT Y ALT Z
455
ASCII Character Sets
Table 35 GUI Key Character Set
GUI Key
Keystroke
3000
Right Control Key
3048
GUI 0
3049
GUI 1
3050
GUI 2
3051
GUI 3
3052
GUI 4
3053
GUI 5
3054
GUI 6
3055
GUI 7
3056
GUI 8
3057
GUI 9
3065
GUI A
3066
GUI B
3067
GUI C
3068
GUI D
3069
GUI E
3070
GUI F
3071
GUI G
3072
GUI H
3073
GUI I
3074
GUI J
3075
GUI K
3076
GUI L
3077
GUI M
3078
GUI N
3079
GUI O
3080
GUI P
3081
GUI Q
3082
GUI R
Note: GUI Shift Keys - The Apple TM iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar. Windows-based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key, and to the right of the right ALT key.
456
ASCII Character Sets
Table 35 GUI Key Character Set (Continued)
GUI Key
Keystroke
3083
GUI S
3084
GUI T
3085
GUI U
3086
GUI V
3087
GUI W
3088
GUI X
3089
GUI Y
3090
GUI Z
Note: GUI Shift Keys - The Apple TM iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar. Windows-based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key, and to the right of the right ALT key.
Table 36 PF Key Character Set PF Keys 4001 4002 4003 4004 4005 4006 4007 4008 4009 4010 4011 4012 4013 4014 4015 4016
Keystroke PF 1 PF 2 PF 3 PF 4 PF 5 PF 6 PF 7 PF 8 PF 9 PF 10 PF 11 PF 12 PF 13 PF 14 PF 15 PF 16
457
ASCII Character Sets
Table 37 F Key Character Set F Keys 5001 5002 5003 5004 5005 5006 5007 5008 5009 5010 5011 5012 5013 5014 5015 5016 5017 5018 5019 5020 5021 5022 5023 5024
Table 38 Numeric Key Character Set Numeric Keypad 6042 6043 6044 6045
458
Keystroke F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12 F 13 F 14 F 15 F 16 F 17 F 18 F 19 F 20 F 21 F 22 F 23 F 24
Keystroke * +
Undefined -
ASCII Character Sets
Table 38 Numeric Key Character Set (Continued) Numeric Keypad 6046 6047 6048 6049 6050 6051 6052 6053 6054 6055 6056 6057 6058 6059
Keystroke . / 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Enter Num Lock
Table 39 Extended Key Character Set Extended Keypad 7001 7002 7003 7004 7005 7006 7007 7008 7009 7010 7011 7012 7013 7014
Keystroke Break Delete Pg Up End Pg Dn Pause
Scroll Lock Backspace
Tab Print Screen
Insert Home Enter Escape
459
ASCII Character Sets
Table 39 Extended Key Character Set (Continued) Extended Keypad 7015 7016 7017 7018
Keystroke Up Arrow Dn Arrow Left Arrow Right Arrow
460
Programming Reference
Symbol Code Identifiers
Table 40 Symbol Code Characters
Code Character
Code Type
A
UPC-A, UPC-E, UPC-E1, EAN-8, EAN-13
B
Code 39, Code 32
C
Codabar
D
Code 128, ISBT 128, ISBT 128 Concatenated
E
Code 93
F
Interleaved 2 of 5
G
Discrete 2 of 5, or Discrete 2 of 5 IATA
H
Code 11
J
MSI
K
GS1-128
L
Bookland EAN
M
Trioptic Code 39
N
Coupon Code
R
GS1 DataBar Family
S
Matrix 2 of 5
T
UCC Composite, TLC 39
U
Chinese 2 of 5
V
Korean 3 of 5
X
ISSN EAN, PDF417, Macro PDF417, Micro PDF417
z
Aztec, Aztec Rune
P00
Data Matrix
461
Programming Reference
Table 40 Symbol Code Characters (Continued)
Code Character
P01
QR Code, MicroQR
Code Type
P02
Maxicode
P03
US Postnet
P04
US Planet
P05
Japan Postal
P06
UK Postal
P08
Netherlands KIX Code
P09
Australia Post
P0A
USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail
P0B
UPU FICS Postal
P0C
Mailmark
P0D
Grid Matrix, Grid Matrix Inverse, Grid Matrix Mirror
P0G
GS1 Data Matrix
P0H
Han Xin
P0Q
GS1 QR
P0X
Signature Capture
AIM Code Identifiers
Each AIM Code Identifier contains the three-character string ]cm where:
] = Flag Character (ASCII 93) c = Code Character (see Table 41) m = Modifier Character (see Table 42)
Table 41 Aim Code Characters
Code Character
Code Type
A
Code 39, Code 39 Full ASCII, Code 32
C
Code 128, ISBT 128, ISBT 128 Concatenated, GS1-128,
Coupon (Code 128 portion)
d
Data Matrix, GS1 Data Matrix
E
UPC/EAN, Coupon (UPC portion)
e
GS1 DataBar Family
F
Codabar
462
Programming Reference
Table 41 Aim Code Characters (Continued)
Code Character
G
Code 93
Code Type
H
Code 11
h
Han Xin
I
Interleaved 2 of 5
L
PDF417, Macro PDF417, Micro PDF417
L2
TLC 39
M
MSI
Q
QR Code, MicroQR, GS1 QR
S
Discrete 2 of 5, IATA 2 of 5
U
Maxicode
z
Aztec, Aztec Rune
X
Bookland EAN, ISSN EAN, Trioptic Code 39, Chinese 2 of 5,
Matrix 2 of 5, Korean 3 of 5, US Postnet, US Planet, UK Postal, Japan Postal,
Australia Post, Netherlands KIX Code, USPS 4CB/One Code/ Intelligent Mail, UPU
FICS Postal, Mailmark, Signature Capture
]g
Grid Matrix, Grid Matrix Inverse, Grid Matrix Mirror
The modifier character is the sum of the applicable option values based on Table 42.
Table 42 Modifier Characters
Code Type
Option Value
Option
Code 39
0
No check character or Full ASCII processing.
1
Reader has checked one check character.
3
Reader has checked and stripped check character.
4
Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion.
5
Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion and checked
one check character.
7
Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion and checked
and stripped check character.
Example: A Full ASCII barcode with check character W, A+I+MI+DW, is transmitted as ]A7AIMID where 7 = (3+4).
Trioptic Code 39 0
No option specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: A Trioptic barcode 412356 is transmitted as ]X0412356
463
Programming Reference
Table 42 Modifier Characters (Continued)
Code Type
Option Value
Option
Code 128
0
Standard data packet, no Function code 1 in first symbol position.
1
Function code 1 in first symbol character position.
2
Function code 1 in second symbol character position.
Example: A Code (EAN) 128 barcode with Function 1 character FNC1 in the first position,
AIMID is transmitted as ]C1AIMID
I 2 of 5
0
No check digit processing.
1
Reader has validated check digit.
3
Reader has validated and stripped check digit.
Example: An I 2 of 5 barcode without check digit, 4123, is transmitted as ]I04123
Codabar
0
No check digit processing.
1
Reader has checked check digit.
3
Reader has stripped check digit before transmission.
Example: A Codabar barcode without check digit, 4123, is transmitted as ]F04123
Code 93
0
No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: A Code 93 barcode 012345678905 is transmitted as ]G0012345678905
MSI
0
Check digits are sent.
1
No check digit is sent.
Example: An MSI barcode 4123, with a single check digit checked, is transmitted as ]M14123
D 2 of 5
0
No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: A D 2 of 5 barcode 4123, is transmitted as ]S04123
UPC/EAN
0
Standard data packet in full EAN format, i.e., 13 digits for UPC-A, UPC-E, and EAN-13 (not including supplemental data).
1
Two digit supplemental data only.
2
Five digit supplemental data only.
3
Combined data packet comprising 13 digits from EAN-13, UPC-A or
UPC-E symbol and 2 or 5 digits from supplemental symbol.
4
EAN-8 data packet.
Example: A UPC-A barcode 012345678905 is transmitted as ]E00012345678905
Bookland EAN
0
No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: A Bookland EAN barcode 123456789X is transmitted as ]X0123456789X
ISSN EAN
0
No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: An ISSN EAN barcode 123456789X is transmitted as ]X0123456789X
464
Programming Reference
Table 42 Modifier Characters (Continued)
Code Type
Option Value
Option
Code 11
0
Single check digit
1
Two check digits
3
Check characters validated but not transmitted.
GS1 DataBar Family
No option specified at this time. Always transmit 0. GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional and GS1 DataBar Limited transmit with an Application Identifier "01". Note: In GS1-128 emulation mode, GS1 DataBar is transmitted using Code 128 rules (i.e., ]C1).
Example: A GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional barcode 0110012345678902 is transmitted as ]e00110012345678902.
EAN.UCC Composites (GS1 DataBar, GS1-128, 2D portion of UPC 0 composite)
1
Native mode transmission. Note: UPC portion of composite is transmitted using UPC rules.
Standard data packet.
Data packet containing the data following an encoded symbol separator character.
2
Data packet containing the data following an escape mechanism
character. The data packet does not support the ECI protocol.
3
Data packet containing the data following an escape mechanism
character. The data packet supports the ECI protocol.
GS1-128 emulation Note: UPC portion of composite is transmitted using UPC rules.
1
Data packet is a GS1-128 symbol (i.e., data is preceded with ]JC1).
PDF417,
0
Micro PDF417
1 2
Reader set to conform to protocol defined in 1994 PDF417 symbology specifications. Note: When this option is transmitted, the receiver cannot reliably determine whether ECIs have been invoked or whether data byte 92DEC has been doubled in transmission.
Reader set to follow the ECI protocol (Extended Channel Interpretation). All data characters 92DEC are doubled.
Reader set for Basic Channel operation (no escape character transmission protocol). Data characters 92DEC are not doubled. Note: When decoders are set to this mode, unbuffered Macro symbols and symbols requiring the decoder to convey ECI escape sequences cannot be transmitted.
3
The barcode contains a GS1-128 symbol, and the first codeword is
903-907, 912, 914, 915.
4
The barcode contains a GS1-128 symbol, and the first codeword is in
the range 908-909.
5
The barcode contains a GS1-128 symbol, and the first codeword is in
the range 910-911.
Example: A PDF417 barcode ABCD, with no transmission protocol enabled, is transmitted as ]L2ABCD.
465
Programming Reference
Table 42 Modifier Characters (Continued)
Code Type
Option Value
Option
Data Matrix
0
ECC 000-140, not supported.
1
ECC 200.
2
ECC 200, FNC1 in first or fifth position.
3
ECC 200, FNC1 in second or sixth position.
4
ECC 200, ECI protocol implemented.
5
ECC 200, FNC1 in first or fifth position, ECI protocol implemented.
6
ECC 200, FNC1 in second or sixth position, ECI protocol
implemented.
GS1 Data Matrix 2
ECC 200, FNC1 in first or fifth position.
MaxiCode
0
Symbol in Mode 4 or 5.
1
Symbol in Mode 2 or 3.
2
Symbol in Mode 4 or 5, ECI protocol implemented.
3
Symbol in Mode 2 or 3, ECI protocol implemented in secondary
message.
QR Code
0
Model 1 symbol.
1
Model 2 / MicroQR symbol, ECI protocol not implemented.
2
Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol implemented.
3
Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol not implemented, FNC1 implied in first
position.
4
Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol implemented, FNC1 implied in first
position.
5
Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol not implemented, FNC1 implied in
second position.
6
Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol implemented, FNC1 implied in second
position.
GS1 QR
3
Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol not implemented, FNC1 implied in first position.
Aztec
0
Aztec symbol.
C
Han Xin
0
Aztec Rune symbol.
Generic data, no special features are set. The transmitted data does not follow the AIM ECI protocol.
1
ECI protocol enabled. There is at least one ECI mode encoded.
Transmitted data must follow the AIM ECI protocol.
466
Programming Reference
Table 42 Modifier Characters (Continued)
Code Type
Option Value
Option
Grid Matrix, Grid 0 Matrix Inverse, Grid Matrix Mirror
No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Mailmark
0
No option specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
467
Communication Protocol Functionality
Functionality Supported via Communication (Cable) Interface
Table 43 lists supported scanner functionality by communication protocol.
Table 43 Communication Interface Functionality
Communication Interfaces
USB HID Keyboard Emulation CDC COM Port Emulation SSI over CDC COM Port Emulation IBM Table-top USB IBM Hand-held USB USB OPOS Hand-held Symbol Native API (SNAPI) without Imaging Interface Symbol Native API (SNAPI) with Imaging Interface RS-232 Standard RS-232 ICL RS-232 Fujitsu RS-232 Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode A Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode B Olivetti ORS4500 Omron
Data Transmission
Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported
Supported
Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported
Functionality Remote
Management
Not Available Not Available Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported
Supported
Not Available Not Available Not Available Not Available Not Available Not Available Not Available
Image and Video Transmission
Not Available Not Available Supported Not Available Not Available Not Available Not Available
Supported
Not Available Not Available Not Available Not Available Not Available Not Available Not Available
468
Communication Protocol Functionality
Table 43 Communication Interface Functionality (Continued)
Communication Interfaces
CUTE OPOS/JPOS SSI IBM 4690 Hand-held Scanner Emulation (Port 9B) Table-top Scanner Emulation (Port 17) Non-IBM Scanner Emulation (Port 5B) Keyboard Wedge IBM PC/AT & IBM PC Compatibles IBM AT Notebook
Data Transmission Supported Supported Supported
Supported Supported Supported
Supported Supported
Functionality Remote
Management Not Available Not Available Supported
Not Available Supported Supported
Not Available Not Available
Image and Video Transmission
Not Available Not Available Supported
Not Available Not Available Not Available
Not Available Not Available
469
Country Codes
Introduction
This chapter provides instructions for programming the keyboard to interface with a USB or Keyboard Wedge host. The host powers the scanner. For host setup information, see USB Interface and Keyboard Wedge Interface.
To select a code page for the country keyboard type, see Country Code Pages.
Throughout the programming barcode menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*).
*Indicates Default
*US English (North American)
Feature/Option
470
Country Codes
USB and Keyboard Wedge Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes)
Scan the barcode corresponding to the keyboard type. For a USB host, this setting applies only to the USB Keyboard (HID) device. If the keyboard type is not listed, see Keypad Emulation on page 244 for the USB HID host. For a keyboard wedge host, see Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation on page 309.
NOTE: When changing USB country keyboard types the scanner automatically resets and issues the standard
startup beep sequences.
NOTE: For best results when using international keyboards, enable Quick Keypad Emulation on page 244.
IMPORTANT: · Some country keyboard barcode types are specific to certain Windows operating systems (that is, XP
and Windows 7 or higher). Barcodes requiring a specific Windows OS are noted in the barcode captions.
· Use the French International barcode for Belgian French keyboards.
US English (Mac)
* US English (North American)
Arabic (101)
Albanian
471
Country Codes (Continued)
Country Codes
Arabic (102)
Arabic (102) AZERTY
Azeri (Latin)
Azeri (Cyrillic)
Bosnian (Latin)
Belarusian
Bosnian (Cyrillic)
472
Country Codes (Continued)
Country Codes
Bulgarian (Latin)
Bulgarian Cyrillic (Typewriter) (Bulgarian -Windows XP
Typewriter - Windows 7 or higher)
Canadian French Win7
Canadian French (Legacy)
Canadian Multilingual Standard
Chinese (ASCII)
473
Country Codes (Continued)
Country Codes
Chinese (Simplified)*
Croatian
Chinese (Traditional)* *For CJK keyboard types, see CJK Decode Control.
Czech
Czech (Programmer)
Czech (QWERTY)
Danish
474
Country Codes (Continued)
Country Codes
Dutch (Netherlands)
Estonian
Faeroese
Finnish
French (France)
French International (Belgian French)
French (Canada) 95/98
475
Country Codes (Continued)
Country Codes
French (Canada) 2000/XP*
*There is also a country code barcode for Canadian Multilingual Standard on page 473. Be sure to select the appropriate barcode for your host system.
Galician
German
Greek Latin
Greek (220) Latin
Greek (319) Latin
Greek
476
Country Codes (Continued)
Country Codes
Greek (319) Hebrew Israel Hungarian_101KEY
Greek (220) Greek Polytonic
Hungarian Icelandic
477
Country Codes (Continued)
Country Codes
Irish
Italian
Italian (142)
Japanese (ASCII)
Japanese (SHIFT-JIS)* *For CJK keyboard types, see CJK Decode Control.
Kazakh
Korean (ASCII)
478
Country Codes (Continued)
Country Codes
Korean (Hangul)* *For CJK keyboard types, see CJK Decode Control.
Latin American
Latvian (QWERTY)
Lithuanian (IBM)
479
Kyrgyz Latvian Lithuanian
Country Codes (Continued)
Country Codes
Macedonian (FYROM)
Maltese_47KEY
Mongolian
Norwegian
Polish (214)
Portuguese (Brazil) (Windows XP)
Polish (Programmer)
480
Country Codes (Continued)
Country Codes
Portuguese (Brazilian ABNT2)
Romanian (Windows XP)
Portuguese (Brazilian ABNT)
Portuguese (Portugal)
Romanian (Legacy) (Windows 7 or higher)
Romanian (Standard) (Windows 7 or higher)
481
Country Codes (Continued)
Country Codes
Russian Serbian (Latin)
Slovak
Romanian (Programmer) (Windows 7 or higher)
Russian (Typewriter)
Serbian (Cyrillic)
482
Country Codes (Continued)
Country Codes
Slovenian Spanish (Variation)
Swiss French
Slovak (QWERTY) Spanish Swedish
Swiss German
483
Country Codes (Continued)
Country Codes
Tatar Turkish F UK English US Dvorak
Thai (Kedmanee) Turkish Q Ukrainian
484
Country Codes (Continued)
Country Codes
US Dvorak Right
US Dvorak Left US International
Uzbek
Vietnamese
485
Country Code Pages
Introduction
This chapter provides barcodes for selecting code pages for the country keyboard type selected in Country Codes. If the default code page in Table 44 is appropriate for your selected country keyboard type, you do not need to scan a country code page barcode.
NOTE: ADF rules can also specify a code page based on the symbology and other ADF criteria. Refer to the
Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide.
Country Code Page Defaults
Table 44 lists the code page default for each country keyboard.
Table 44 Country Code Page Defaults Country Keyboard
US English (North American) US English (Mac) Albanian Arabic 101 Arabic 102 Arabic 102 AZERTY Azeri Latin Azeri Cyrillic Belarusian Bosnian Latin Bosnian Cyrillic Bulgarian Latin Bulgarian Cyrillic
Code Page Default Windows 1252 Mac CP10000 Windows 1250 Windows 1256 Windows 1256 Windows 1256 Windows 1254 Windows 1251 Windows 1251 Windows 1250 Windows 1251 Windows 1250 Windows 1251
486
Country Code Pages
Table 44 Country Code Page Defaults (Continued) Country Keyboard
Canadian French Win7 Canadian French (Legacy) Canadian Multilingual Croatian Chinese ASCII Chinese (Simplified) Chinese (Traditional) Czech Czech Programmers Czech QWERTY Danish Dutch Netherland Estonian Faeroese Finnish French (France) French (Canada) 95/98 French (Canada) 2000/XP French International (Belgian French) Galician German Greek Latin Greek220 Latin Greek319 Latin Greek Greek220 Greek319 Greek Polytonic Hebrew Israel Hungarian Hungarian_101KEY
Code Page Default Windows 1252 Windows 1252 Windows 1252 Windows 1250 Windows 1252 Windows 936, GBK Windows 950, Big5 Windows 1250 Windows 1250 Windows 1250 Windows 1252 Windows 1252 Windows 1257 Windows 1252 Windows 1252 Windows 1252 Windows 1252 Windows 1252 Windows 1252 Windows 1252 Windows 1252 Windows 1252 Windows 1253 Windows 1252 Windows 1253 Windows 1253 Windows 1253 Windows 1253 Windows 1255 Windows 1250 Windows 1250
487
Country Code Pages
Table 44 Country Code Page Defaults (Continued) Country Keyboard
Icelandic Irish Italian Italian_142 Japanese ASCII Japanese (Shift-JIS) Kazakh Korean ASCII Korean (Hangul) Kyrgyz Cyrillic Latin America Latvian Latvian QWERTY Lithuanian Lithuanian_IBM Macedonian -FYROM Maltese_47KEY Mongolian-Cyrillic Norwegian Polish_214 Polish Programmer Portuguese Brazil Portuguese Brazilian ABNT Portuguese Brazilian ABNT2 Portuguese Portugal Romanian Romanian Legacy Romanian Standard Romanian Programmer Russian Russian Typewriter
Code Page Default Windows 1252 Windows 1252 Windows 1252 Windows 1252 Windows 1252 Windows 932, Shift-JIS Windows 1251 Windows 1252 Windows 949, Hangul Windows 1251 Windows 1252 Windows 1257 Windows 1257 Windows 1257 Windows 1257 Windows 1251 Windows 1252 Windows 1251 Windows 1252 Windows 1250 Windows 1250 Windows 1252 Windows 1252 Windows 1252 Windows 1252 Windows 1250 Windows 1250 Windows 1250 Windows 1250 Windows 1251 Windows 1251
488
Country Code Pages
Table 44 Country Code Page Defaults (Continued) Country Keyboard
Serbian Latin Serbian Cyrillic Slovak Slovak QWERTY Slovenian Spanish Spanish Variation Swedish Swiss French Swiss German Tatar Thai-Kedmanee Turkish F Turkish Q Ukrainian United Kingdom United States US Dvorak US Dvorak Left Hand US Dvorak Right Hand US International Uzbek Cyrillic Vietnamese
Code Page Default Windows 1250 Windows 1251 Windows 1250 Windows 1250 Windows 1250 Windows 1252 Windows 1252 Windows 1252 Windows 1252 Windows 1252 Windows 1251 Windows 874 Windows 1254 Windows 1254 Windows 1251 Windows 1252 Windows 1252 Windows 1252 Windows 1252 Windows 1252 Windows 1252 Windows 1251 Windows 1258
489
Country Code Pages
Country Code Page Barcodes
Scan the barcode corresponding to the country keyboard code page.
Windows 1250 Latin 2, Central European
Windows 1252 Latin 1, Western European
Windows 1254 Latin 5, Turkish
Windows 1251 Cyrillic, Slavic
Windows 1253 Greek
490
Country Code Pages Country Code Pages (Continued)
Windows 1255 Hebrew
Windows 1256 Arabic
Windows 1257 Baltic
Windows 1258 Vietnamese
Windows 874 Thai
491
Country Code Pages Country Code Pages (Continued)
Windows 20866 Cyrillic KOI8-R
Windows 936 Simplified Chinese GBK
Windows 932 Japanese Shift-JIS
Windows 54936 Simplified Chinese GB18030
Windows 949 Korean Hangul
Windows 950 Traditional Chinese Big5
492
Country Code Pages Country Code Pages (Continued)
MS-DOS 437 Latin US
MS-DOS 737 Greek
MS-DOS 775 Baltic
MS-DOS 850 Latin 1
MS-DOS 852 Latin 2
493
Country Code Pages Country Code Pages (Continued)
MS-DOS 855 Cyrillic
MS-DOS 857 Turkish
MS-DOS 860 Portuguese
MS-DOS 861 Icelandic
MS-DOS 862 Hebrew
494
Country Code Pages Country Code Pages (Continued)
MS-DOS 863 French Canada
MS-DOS 865 Nordic
MS-DOS 866 Cyrillic
MS-DOS 869 Greek 2
495
Country Code Pages Country Code Pages (Continued)
ISO 8859-1 Latin 1, Western European
ISO 8859-2 Latin 2, Central European
ISO 8859-3 Latin 3, South European
ISO 8859-4 Latin 4, North European
ISO 8859-5 Cyrillic
496
Country Code Pages Country Code Pages (Continued)
ISO 8859-6 Arabic
ISO 8859-7 Greek
ISO 8859-8 Hebrew
ISO 8859-9 Latin 5, Turkish
ISO 8859-10 Latin 6, Nordic
497
Country Code Pages Country Code Pages (Continued)
ISO 8859-11 Thai
ISO 8859-13 Latin 7, Baltic
ISO 8859-14 Latin 8, Celtic
ISO 8859-15 Latin 9
ISO 8859-16 Latin 10, South-Eastern European
498
Country Code Pages Country Code Pages (Continued)
UTF-8 UTF-16LE
UTF-16 Little Endian UTF-16BE UTF-16 Big Endian
Mac CP10000 Roman
499
CJK Decode Control
Introduction
This chapter describes control parameters for CJK (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) barcode decode through USB HID Keyboard Emulation mode.
NOTE: Because ADF does not support CJK character processing, there is no format manipulation for CJK
output.
CJK Control Parameters
Unicode Output Control
Parameter # 973
For a Unicode encoded CJK barcode, select one of the following options for unicode output:
· Universal Output to Unicode and MBCS Application - This default method applies to Unicode and
MBCS expected applications, such as MS Word and Notepad on a Windows host.
NOTE: To support Unicode universal output, set up the registry table for the Windows host. See
Unicode/CJK Decode Setup with Windows Host on page 504.
· Output to Unicode Application Only - This method applies only to Unicode expected applications, such
as MS Word and WordPad, but not Notepad.
* Universal Output (0)
Unicode Application Only (1)
500
CJK Decode Control
CJK Output Method to Windows Host
Parameter # 972
For a national standard encoded CJK barcode, select one of the following options for CJK output to a Windows host:
· Universal CJK Output - This is the default universal CJK output method for US English IME or
Chinese/Japanese/Korean ASCII IME on a Windows host. This method converts CJK characters to Unicode and emulates the characters when transmitting to the host. Use the Unicode Output Control parameter to control Unicode output.
NOTE: To support universal CJK output, set up the registry table for the Windows host. See Unicode/CJK
Decode Setup with Windows Host on page 504.
· Other options for CJK output - With the following methods, the scanner sends the CJK character
hexadecimal internal code (Nei Ma) value to the host, or converts the CJK character to Unicode and sends the hexadecimal Unicode value to the host. When using these methods, the Windows host must select the corresponding IME to accept the CJK character. See Unicode/CJK Decode Setup with Windows Host on page 504.
· Japanese Unicode Output · Simplified Chinese GBK Code Output · Simplified Chinese Unicode Output · Korean Unicode Code Output · Traditional Chinese Big5 Code Output (Windows XP) · Traditional Chinese Big5 Code Output (Windows 7) · Traditional Chinese Unicode Code Output (Windows XP) · Traditional Chinese Unicode Code Output (Windows 7)
NOTE: The Unicode emulate output method depends on the host system (Windows XP or Windows 7).
* Universal CJK Output (0)
Japanese Unicode Output (34)
(For Japanese Unicode Output, select Simplified Chinese Unicode IME on the Windows host)
501
CJK Decode Control CJK Output Method to Windows Host (continued)
Chinese (Simplified) GBK Output (1)
Chinese (Simplified) Unicode Output (2)
Korean Unicode Output (50)
(for Korean Unicode Output, select Simplified Chinese Unicode IME on the Windows host)
Chinese (Traditional) Big5 Output (Windows XP) (17)
Chinese (Traditional) Big5 Output (Windows 7) (19)
Chinese (Traditional) Unicode Output (Windows XP) (18)
Chinese (Traditional) Unicode Output (Windows 7) (20)
502
CJK Decode Control
Non-CJK UTF Barcode Output
Parameter # 960
Some country keyboard type layouts contain characters that do not exist in the default code page (see Country Keyboard Type Missing Characters on page 503). Although the default code page can not encode these characters in a barcode, they can be encoded in the UTF-8 barcode. Scan the following barcode to output the Unicode values by emulation mode.
NOTE: Use this special country keyboard type to decode the non-CJK UTF-8 barcode. After decoding,
re-configure the scanner to use the original country keyboard type.
Use US English IME on Windows. See Unicode Output Control on page 500.
Non-CJK UTF-8 Emulation Output
Country Keyboard Type Missing Characters
Country keyboard type: Tatar, Uzbek, Mongolian, Kyrgyz, Kazakh and Azeri Default code page: CP1251
Table 45 Missing Characters
503
CJK Decode Control
Table 45 Missing Characters (Continued)
Country keyboard type: Romanian (Standard) Default code page: CP1250
Table 46 Missing Characters
Country keyboard type: Portuguese-Brazilian (ABNT), Portuguese-Brazilian (ABNT2) Default code page: CP1252
Missing character:
Country keyboard type: Azeri-Latin Default code page: CP1254 Missing characters: ,
Unicode/CJK Decode Setup with Windows Host
This section describes how to set up CJK decode with a Windows host.
Setting Up the Windows Registry Table for Unicode Universal Output
To support the Unicode universal output method, set up the Windows host registry table as follows: 1. Select Start > Run > regedt32 to start the registry editor. 2. Under HKEY_Current_User\Control Panel\Input Method, set EnableHexNumpad to 1 as follows:
[HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Control Panel\Input Method] "EnableHexNumpad"="1" If this key does not exist, add it as type REG_SZ (string value). 3. Reboot the computer to implement the registry change.
Adding CJK IME on Windows
To add the desired CJK input language: 1. Click Start > Control Panel.
504
CJK Decode Control
2. If the Control Panel opens in category view, select Switch to Classic View in the top left corner. 3. Select Regional and Language Options. 4. Click the Language tab. 5. Under Supplemental Language Support, select the Install Files for East Asian Languages check box if not
already selected, and click Apply. This may require a Windows installation CD to install the required files. This step ensures that the East Asian Languages (CJK) are available. 6. Under Text Services and Input Language, click Details. 7. Under Installed Services, click Add. 8. In the Add Input Language dialog box, choose the CJK input language and keyboard layout or Input Method Editor (IME) to add. 9. Click OK twice. The language indicator appears in the system tray (at bottom right corner of the desktop by default). To switch between input languages (keyboard languages) select the language indicator in the system tray. 10. Select the language indicator in the system tray to select the desired country keyboard type. 11. Verify that the characters displayed on each country's keyboard appear.
505
CJK Decode Control
Selecting the Simplified Chinese Input Method on the Host
To select the Simplified Chinese input method:
· Select Unicode/GBK input on Windows XP: Chinese (Simplified) - NeiMa, then click the input bar to
select Unicode or GBK NeiMa input. Or
· Select Unicode/GBK input on Windows 7: Chinese (Simplified) - Microsoft Pinyin New Experience
Input Style, then select Tool Menu > Secondary Inputs > Unicode Input or GB Code Input.
506
CJK Decode Control
Selecting the Traditional Chinese Input Method on the Host
To select the Traditional Chinese input method:
· Select Unicode input on Windows XP: Chinese (Traditional) - Unicode
· Select Big5 input on Windows XP: Chinese (Traditional) - Big5 Code
· Select Unicode/Big5 input on Windows 7: Chinese (Traditional) - New Quick. This option support both
Unicode and Big5 input.
507
Signature Capture
Introduction
CapCode, a signature capture code, is a special pattern that encloses a signature area on a document and allows a scanner to capture a signature. There are several accepted patterns that allow automatic identification of different signatures on the same form. For example, on the federal tax return 1040 form there are three signature areas, one each for two joint filers, and one for a professional preparer. By using different patterns, a program can correctly identify all three, so they can be captured in any sequence and still be identified correctly.
Code Structure
Signature Capture Area
A CapCode is printed as two identical patterns on either side of a signature capture box, as shown in Figure 28. Each pattern extends the full height of the signature capture box. The box is optional, so you can omit it, replace it with a single baseline, or print a baseline with an "X" on top of it towards the left, as is customarily done in the US to indicate a request for signature. However, if an "X" or other markings are added in the signature box area, these are captured with the signature. Figure 28 CapCode
] tÇx WxÉ
508
Signature Capture
CapCode Pattern Structure
A CapCode pattern structure consists of a start pattern followed by a separator space, a signature capture box, a second separator space, and then a stop pattern. Assuming that X is the dimension of the thinnest element, the start and stop patterns each contains 9X total width in 4 bars and 3 spaces. A 7X quiet zone is required to the left and to the right of the CapCode pattern.
Figure 29 CapCode Structure
Capture Box
Quiet Zone
Start
Separator Spaces
Stop
Quiet Zone
The separator spaces on either side of the signature capture box can be between 1X and 3X wide.
Start / Stop Patterns
Table 47 lists the accepted start / stop patterns. The bar and space widths are expressed as multiples of X. You must use the same pattern on either side of a signature capture box. The type value is reported with the captured signature to indicate the purpose of the signature captured.
Table 47 Start / Stop Pattern Definitions
Bar/Space Patterns
B
S
B
S
B
S
B
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
Table 48 lists selectable parameters used to generate the image of the captured signature.
Type
2 5 7 8 9
Table 48 User Defined CapCode Parameters Parameter
Width Height Format JPEG quality
Defined Number of pixels Number of pixels JPEG, BMP, TIFF 1 (most compression) to 100 (best quality)
509
Signature Capture
Table 48 User Defined CapCode Parameters
Parameter
Bits Per Pixel (not applicable to JPEG format)
1 (2 levels) 4 (16 levels) 8 (256 levels)
BMP format does not use compression, JPEG and TIFF formats do.
Defined
Dimensions
The size of the signature capture box is determined by the height and separation of the start and stop patterns. The line width of the signature capture box is insignificant.
The thinnest element width, referred to here as X, is nominally 10 mils (1 mil = 0.0254 mm). Select this as an exact multiple of the pixel pitch of the printer used. For example, when using a 203 DPI (dots-per-inch) printer and printing 2 dots per module, the resulting X dimension is 9.85 mils.
Data Format
The decoder output is formatted according to Table 49. Zebra decoders allow different user options to output or inhibit barcode type. Selecting "Symbol ID" as the barcode type for output identifies the CapCode with letter "i".
Table 49 Data Format
File Format (1 byte)
JPEG - 1 BMP - 3 TIFF - 4
Type (1 byte) See Table 47, last column
Image Size (4 bytes, BIG Endian)
Image Data
(Same bytes as in a data file.)
510
Signature Capture
Additional Capabilities
Regardless of how the signature is captured, the output signature image is de-skewed and right-side up. A scanner that captures signatures automatically determines whether it is scanning a signature or a barcode. You can disable the signature capturing capability in a decoder.
Signature Boxes
Figure 30 illustrates the five acceptable signature boxes. Figure 30 Acceptable Signature Boxes
Type 2:
Type 5:
Type 7:
Type 8:
Type 9:
511
Non-Parameter Attributes (Attribute Data Dictionary)
Introduction
This chapter defines non-parameter attributes.
Attributes
Model Number
Attribute #533
Model number of the scanner. This electronic output matches the printout on the physical device label, for example DS9308-SR00004ZCWW.
Type Size (Bytes) User Mode Access Values
S 18 R Variable
Serial Number
Attribute #534
Unique serial number assigned in the manufacturing facility. This electronic output matches the printout on the physical device label, for example M1J26F45V.
Type Size (Bytes) User Mode Access Values
S 16 R Variable
512
Non-Parameter Attributes (Attribute Data Dictionary)
Date of Manufacture
Attribute #535
Date of device manufacture assigned in the manufacturing facility. This electronic output matches the printout on the physical device label, for example 31OCT18 (which reads the 31st of October 2018).
Type Size (Bytes) User Mode Access Values
S 7 R Variable
Date of First Programming
Attribute #614
Date of first electronic programming represents the first time settings where electronically loaded to the scanner either by 123Scan or via SMS, for example 18MAY17 (which reads the 18th of May 2017).
Type Size (Bytes) User Mode Access Values
S 7 R Variable
Configuration Filename
Attribute #616
The name assigned to the configuration settings loaded electronically to the device either by 123Scan or via SMS.
NOTE: Scanning the Set Defaults barcode automatically changes the configuration filename to factory
defaults.
To indicate the configuration settings loaded to the device were changed, the configuration filename changes to Modified upon scanning any parameter barcode.
Type Size (Bytes) User Mode Access Values
S 17 RW Variable
513
Non-Parameter Attributes (Attribute Data Dictionary)
Beeper/LED
Attribute #6000
Activates the beeper and/or LED.
Type
X
Size (Bytes)
N/A
User Mode Access W
Values:
Beep / LED Action Value
1 high short beep
0
2 high short beeps
1
3 high short beeps
2
4 high short beeps
3
5 high short beeps
4
1 low short beep
5
2 low short beeps
6
3 low short beeps
7
4 low short beeps
8
5 low short beeps
9
1 high long beep
10
2 high long beeps
11
3 high long beeps
12
4 high long beeps
13
5 high long beeps
14
1 low long beep
15
2 low long beeps
16
3 low long beeps
17
4 low long beeps
18
5 low long beeps
19
Fast warble beep
20
Slow warble beep
21
High-low beep
22
Low-high beep
23
High-low-high beep
24
Low-high-low beep
25
High-high-low-low beep 26
Green LED off
42
Green LED on
43
Red LED on
47
Red LED off
48
514
Non-Parameter Attributes (Attribute Data Dictionary)
Parameter Defaults
Attribute #6001
This attribute restores all parameters to their factory defaults.
Type Size (Bytes) User Mode Access Values
X
N/A
W
0 = Restore Defaults 1 = Restore Factory Defaults 2 = Write Custom Defaults
Parameter Buffer
Attribute #6002
Retrieves entire parameter buffer.
Type Size (Bytes) User Mode Access Values
A Variable R Variable
Beep on Next Bootup
Attribute #6003
This attribute configures (enables or disables) beep on next boot up of scanner.
Type Size (Bytes) User Mode Access Values
X N/A W 0 = Disable beep on next bootup 1 = Enable beep on next bootup
Reboot
Attribute #6004
This attribute initiates a device reboot.
Type
X
Size (Bytes)
N/A
User Mode Access W
Values
N/A
515
Non-Parameter Attributes (Attribute Data Dictionary)
Host Trigger Session
Attribute #6005
This attribute triggers a decode session similar to manually depressing the scanner trigger button.
Type Size (Bytes) User Mode Access Values
X N/A W 1 = Start Host Trigger Session 0 = Stop Host Trigger Session
Firmware Version
Attribute #20004
The scanner's operating system version. For example, NBRFMAAC or PAAAABS00-007-R03D0.
Type Size (Bytes) User Mode Access Values
S Variable R Variable
Device Class
Attribute #20007
Description of the device's hardware, for example, Imager or Cordless 2D Imager.
Type Size (Bytes) User Mode Access Values
S 18 R Variable
Scankit Version
Attribute #20008
Identifies the 1D decode algorithms resident on the device, for example SKIT4.33T02.
Type Size (Bytes) User Mode Access Values
S Variable R Variable
516
Non-Parameter Attributes (Attribute Data Dictionary)
Combined Firmware Version
Attribute #20009
Reports firmware version of the multiple CPU's on the single product with space delimiters, for example NBRPUAAA NBRPUDAA.
Type Size (Bytes) User Mode Access Values
S Variable R Variable
RSM Version
Attribute #20011
Identifies the RSM version resident in the device, for example 2.0.
Type Size (Bytes) User Mode Access Values
S 3 R Variable
Top Level Release Name
Attribute #20012
Returns top level combined image firmware name, for example CAAABS00-008-R00.
Type Size (Bytes) User Mode Access Values
S Variable R Variable
Imagekit Version
Attribute #20013
Identifies the 2D decode package resident in the device, for example IMGKIT_4.04T02.
Type Size (Bytes) User Mode Access Values
S Variable R Variable
517
Non-Parameter Attributes (Attribute Data Dictionary)
DL Parser Version
Attribute #25011
Type
Type Array
Size (Bytes)
Variable
Values
Variable
DL Parser Activated
Attribute #25012
Type
Flag
Size (bytes)
1
Values
0 = Not Activated (SR Model) 1 = Activated (DL Model)
ScanSpeed Analytics
IMPORTANT: Decodes times are only reported for barcodes decoded in hand-held mode.
Identifies problematic barcodes to speed up scanning processes.
Zebra ScanSpeed Analytics software allows you to visually identify barcodes that slow down processing and impact efficiency. Over time, the software uses collected data to eliminate poor performing barcodes from inventory. For more information go to www.zebra.com/scanspeedanalytics.
518
ScanSpeed Analytics
Introduction
IMPORTANT: Decodes times are only reported for barcodes decoded in hand-held mode.
This chapter describes the Zebra ScanSpeed Analytics software that allows the identification of barcodes that slow down processes. Over time, the collected data can be used to eliminate poor performing barcodes from inventory. When scanners capture and read data faster, processes run faster. For more information go to www.zebra.com/scanspeedanalytics.
Histogram Decode Information
Within the scanner, each barcode symbology has a series of RSM attributes (Table 50) to access its statistic information: Decode Count; Minimum Decode Time; Slowest Decode Time; Average Decode Time; Slowest Decode Data; and, ScanSpeed Histogram. ScanSpeed Histogram is an array of eight items of double WORD (4 bytes). Each bin holds the count of decoded barcodes per range of decode time. For example, the range of Bin1 decode times is from 0 ms to 75 ms. All the Bin time ranges are show below:
Bin1 <= 75ms Bin2 <= 110ms Bin3 <= 170ms Bin4 <= 300ms Bin5 <= 600ms Bin6 <= 1000ms Bin7 <= 1500ms Bin8 > 1500ms 123Scan displays this histogram data in its Statistics tab shown in Figure 31 on page 520.
519
ScanSpeed Analytics
Figure 31 123Scan Statistics Tab - Histogram Data
Table 50 Attributes Numbers of Barcode Symbology Statistic Information
Barcode Name
Decode Count
Decimal Value
Hex Value (Shown in
Little Endian Format)
Minimum Decode
Time
Slowest Decode
Time (Max Decode Time)
Average Decode
Time
Slowest Decode
Data
UPC
15421
0x3D, 0x3C
15424
15425
15426
15707
EAN/JAN
15428
0x44, 0x3C
15431
15432
15433
15709
2 of 5
15449
0x59, 0x3C
15452
15453
15454
15715
Codabar
15456
0x60, 0x3C
15459
15460
15461
15717
Code 11
15477
0x75, 0x3C
15480
15481
15482
15723
Code 128
15442
0x52, 0x3C
15445
15446
15447
15713
Code 39
15435
0x4B, 0x3C
15438
15439
15440
15711
ScanSpeed Histogram
15706 15708 15714 15716 15722 15712 15710
520
ScanSpeed Analytics
Table 50 Attributes Numbers of Barcode Symbology Statistic Information (Continued)
Barcode Name
Decode Count
Decimal Value
Hex Value (Shown in
Little Endian Format)
Minimum Decode
Time
Slowest Decode
Time (Max Decode Time)
Average Decode
Time
Slowest Decode
Data
Code 93
15463
0x67, 0x3C
15466
15467
15468
15719
Composite
15519
0x9F, 0x3C
15522
15523
15524
15735
GS1 DataBar
15512
0x98, 0x3C
15515
15516
15517
15733
MSI
15470
0x6E,
15473
15474
15475
15721
0x3C
Data Matrix
15491
0x83, 0x3C
15494
15495
15496
15727
PDF
15484
0x7C, 0x3C
15487
15488
15489
15725
Postal Codes
15505
0x91, 0x3C
15508
15509
15510
15731
QR
15498
0x8A,
15501
15502
15503
15729
0x3C
Aztec
15533
0xAD, 0x3C
15536
15537
15538
15739
OCR
15526
0xA6, 0x3C
15529
15530
15531
15737
Maxicode
15659
0x2B, 0x3D
15662
15663
15664
15755
GS1-Data Matrix 15673
0x39, 0x3D
15676
15677
15678
15747
GS1-QR Code 15680
0x40, 0x3D
15683
15684
15685
15749
Coupon
15666
0x32, 0x3D
15669
15670
15671
15757
Other 1D
15540
0xB4, 0x3C
15543
15544
15545
15741
Other 2D
15547
0xBB, 0x3C
15550
15551
15552
15743
Other
15554
0xC2, 0x3C
15557
15558
15559
15745
ScanSpeed Histogram
15718 15734 15732 15720 15726 15724 15730 15728 15738 15736 15754 15746 15748 15756 15740 15742 15744
521
ScanSpeed Analytics
Table 50 Attributes Numbers of Barcode Symbology Statistic Information (Continued)
Barcode Name
Decode Count
Decimal Value
Hex Value (Shown in
Little Endian Format)
Minimum Decode
Time
Slowest Decode
Time (Max Decode Time)
Average Decode
Time
Slowest Decode
Data
Unused Statistic 19999 ID
0x1F, 0x4E
19999
19999
19999
19999
ScanSpeed Histogram
19999
Example
The UPC data below is taken from the first row of Table 50 above.
UPC DECODE COUNT
Attribute #: 15421
Type:
DWORD (4 bytes)
Description: Returns the UPC barcode decode count, including all variants (UPC-A, UPC-E, UPC-E1, etc.).
UPC MINIMUM DECODE TIME
Attribute #: 15424
Type:
DWORD (4 bytes)
Description: Returns the Minimum Decode Time in milliseconds of all UPC barcode decodes.
UPC SLOWEST DECODE TIME
Attribute #: 15425
Type:
DWORD (4 bytes)
Description: Returns the Slowest Decode Time in milliseconds of all UPC barcode decodes.
UPC AVERAGE DECODE TIME
Attribute #: 15426
Type:
DWORD (4 bytes)
Description: Returns the Average Decode Time in milliseconds of all UPC barcode decodes.
UPC SLOWEST DECODE DATA
Attribute #: 15707
Type:
Array of BYTE (25 bytes)
Description: Returns the UPC barcode data with the Slowest Decode Time.
UPC SCANSPEED HISTOGRAM
Attribute #: 15706
Type:
Array of DWORD (32 bytes)
Description: Returns the UPC barcode ScanSpeed Histogram.
522
ScanSpeed Analytics
Image of Slowest Decoded Barcode
The user can configure the scanner to store the image(s) of the slowest decoded barcode.
Table 51 RSM Attributes to Store/Retrieve Image of Slowest Decoded Barcode
Attribute #
Type
Property
Default Value
Description
1755
Array of
RW
WORD
Default format =
{0x1F, 0x4E}
0x1F, 0x4E
No image retained
Barcode name = Unused Statistic ID
Decimal value = 19999 see last row in Table 50 on page 520)
0x3D, 0x3C
Image retained for UPC
Decimal value = 15421
Sample image retained for UPC only = {0x3D, 0x3C}
Attribute 1755 is named List of Stored Images.
This attribute defines which image, by symbology, of the slowest decoded barcode will be stored in the scanner.
One symbology image can be stored in the scanner.
Note:
{0x1F, 0x4E} = a 1 WORD value which is in little-endian format.
1756
WORD
RW
0
Attribute 1756 is named Threshold To Store Slowest Decode Barcode Image.
This attribute defines the threshold above which the scanner stores the image of the slowest decoded barcode.
Specify a Histogram Bin value (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7).
The purpose of setting up this threshold is to reduce the barcode image storage frequency.
0 - No threshold check (default value)
1 - Specifies the decode time threshold as Histogram Bin 1 value of 75 ms
Similarly, the other Histogram Bins specify the corresponding threshold time as follows:
Bin 1 <= 75ms
Bin 2 <= 110ms
Bin 3 <= 170ms
Bin 4 <= 300ms
Bin 5 <= 600ms
Bin 6 <= 1000ms
Bin 7 <= 1500ms
523
ScanSpeed Analytics
Table 51 RSM Attributes to Store/Retrieve Image of Slowest Decoded Barcode (Continued)
Attribute #
Type
Property
Default Value
Description
6036
WORD
WO
N/A
Attribute 6036 is named Retrieve Slowest Decoded Barcode Image.
The image must be retrieved using the SNAPI communication protocol.
This attribute allows you to retrieve from the scanner a single image, by symbology, of the slowest decoded data.
For example, to retrieve the slowest decoded barcode image for a UPC symbology, enter its hex value, 0x3D, 0x3C (decimal value 15421), using a SET command.
See Table 50 on page 520 for symbology hex and decimal values.
524
Sample Barcodes
IMPORTANT: To read a sample barcode the parameter must be enabled. To enable a parameter scan the
appropriate Enable barcode in Symbologies.
UPC/EAN
UPC-A, 100%
0 12345 67890 5
UPC-A with 2-digit Add-on
34
0 12345 67890
525
Sample Barcodes
UPC-A with 5-digit Add-on
98765
0 12345 67890
UPC-E
0 425261 4
UPC-E with 2-digit Add-on
98 0 425261
526
Sample Barcodes
UPC-E with 5-digit Add-on
87654 0 425261
EAN-8
EAN-13, 100%
3 456789 012340
527
Sample Barcodes
EAN-13 with 2-digit Add-on
12
3 456789 012340
EAN-13 with 5-digit Add-on
54321
3 456789 012340
Code 128
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
528
GS1-128
Code 39 Code 93
Sample Barcodes
(01)94019097685457(13)170119(30)17
123ABC
529
Sample Barcodes
Code 11 with 2 Check Digits
2468101275
Interleaved 2 of 5
12345678901231
MSI with 2 Check Digits
123455834
530
Chinese 2 of 5 Matrix 2 of 5 Korean 3 of 5
Sample Barcodes
45454545454 223344 1400230
531
Sample Barcodes
GS1 DataBar
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly GS1 DataBar-14)
7612341562341
GS1 DataBar Truncated
GS1 DataBar Stacked
(01)00614141999996
532
Sample Barcodes
GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional
GS1 DataBar Limited GS1 DataBar Expanded
533
Sample Barcodes
GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked
2D Symbologies
PDF417
Data Matrix
534
GS1 Data Matrix
Sample Barcodes
Maxicode
QR Code
GS1 QR
535
MicroQR
Sample Barcodes
Aztec
0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456 7890123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123 456789
Grid Matrix
NOTE Grid Matrix must be enabled to read the following barcode (see Grid Matrix on page 220).
536
Han Xin
Sample Barcodes
Postal Codes
US Postnet
UK Postal
Japan Postal
5008861
537
Australian Post
OCR
OCR-A
Sample Barcodes
39549554
OCR-B
MICR E13B
538
US Currency
Sample Barcodes
539
Index
Numerics
123Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
123scan LED indicators (on scanner) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 2D bar codes
aztec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 aztec inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 code 128 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 data matrix inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 data matrix mirror images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 grid matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 grid matrix inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 grid matrix mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 GS1 data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 GS1 QR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 han xin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 han xin inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 linked QR mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 maxicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 microPDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 microQR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 QR code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
A
AAMVA field parsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 accessories
cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 EAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 interface cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 partner portal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 power supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 stands and holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 invalid rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 transmit error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 ADF programming indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 advanced data formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 370
aiming momentary trigger mode timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 pattern, hand-held . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 pattern, hands-free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 pattern, snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 snapshot mode timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
aiming pattern orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
ASCII character sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 attributes, non-parameter
beep on next bootup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 configuration filename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 date of first programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 date of manufacture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 firmware version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 host trigger session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 model number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 parameter defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 reboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 scankit version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 scanspeed analytics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518 serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 autoexposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 aztec bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
B
bar codes 1D quiet zone level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 alphanumeric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 analog gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 autoexposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 aztec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 bits per pixel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Chinese 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 CJK non-CJK UTF bar code output . . . . . . . . . . . 503 output method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
540
Index
unicode output control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
CLSI editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 NOTIS editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 start and stop characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 codabar security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 transmit check digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 check ISBT table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 code 128 fnc4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 GS1-128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 ISBT 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 ISBT concatenation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 ISBT concatenation redundancy . . . . . . . . . 155 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 code 128 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 code 32 prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 convert code 39 to code 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 full ASCII conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 trioptic code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 composite beep mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 composite CC-A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 composite CC-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 composite inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 composite TLC-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 GS1-128 emulation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 UPC composite mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 continuous bar code read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 country code page defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 country code pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 country codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 country keyboard types (country codes) . . . . . . . 471 crop to address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 data matrix inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 GS1 data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 mirror images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 decode session timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 digimarc digital watermarks/dw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 digital gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
disable all code types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 discrete 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 driver's license parsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
AAMVA field parsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 driver's license date format . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390 driver's license gender format . . . . . . . . . . . .389 no separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391 parser version ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388 parsing field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 send control characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 send keyboard characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396 set defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 eclevel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 enable all code types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 enter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 febraban . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 fixed exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 FN1 substitution values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 gain and exposure priority for snapshot mode . .106 grid matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 grid matrix inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 grid matrix mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 GS1 databar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 convert to UPC/EAN/JAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 GS1 databar expanded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 GS1 databar limited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 GS1 databar limited margin check . . . . . . . .200 GS1 databar omnidirectional . . . . . . . . . . . .196 security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199 han xin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 IBM bar code configuration directive . . . . . . . . . .303 beep directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 convert unknown to code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 IBM specification version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303 port address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 IDC aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357 bits per pixel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358 border type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362 captured image brighten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360 captured image sharpen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361 default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 delay time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 file format selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357 find box outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359 height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 JPEG quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358 maximum rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 maximum text length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360 minimum text length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359 operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
541
Index
symbology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 X coordinate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Y coordinate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 zoom limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 103 illumination brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 image brightness (target white) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 image capture default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 image cropping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 image enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 image file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 image rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 image size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 intercharacter gap size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 convert to EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173, 174 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171, 172 reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 inverse 1D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 JPEG image options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 JPEG quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 JPEG size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 keyboard wedge alternate numeric keypad emulation . . . . . . . 309 caps lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 convert case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 FN1 substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 function key mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 host types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 intra-keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 quick keypad emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 send make and break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 simulated caps lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Korean 3 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 linked QR mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 macro PDF abort entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 flush buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 matrix 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 maxicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 microPDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 mobile phone/display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 motion tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
check digit algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 check digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 numeric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431 numeric bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431 OCR check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339 check digit multiplier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339 check digit validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340 default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 inverse OCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 maximum characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 MICR E13B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 minimum character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 OCR-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 OCR-A variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 OCR-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 OCR-B variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 subset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 US currency serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325 operational modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 PDF prioritization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 PDF prioritization timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 pid type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 pid value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 Australia post . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 Australia post format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Japan postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 mailmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Netherlands KIX code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 transmit UK postal check digit . . . . . . . . . . . .228 transmit US postal check digit . . . . . . . . . . . .227 UK postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 UPU FICS postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 US planet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 US postnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail . . . . . .231 prefix/suffix values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 product information manufacturing info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 QR code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 GS1 QR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 microQR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
542
Index
redundancy level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 RS-232
baud rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 beep on bel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 check receive errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 data bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 hardware handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 host serial response timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 host types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 intercharacter delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 nixdorf beep LED options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 RTS line state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 software handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291, 292 stop bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 scan data options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 securPharm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 securPharm output formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 signature capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 signature capture bits per pixel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 signature capture file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 signature capture height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 signature capture JPEG quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 signature capture width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 silence operational mode changes . . . . . . . . . . . 108 snapshot aiming pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 snapshot mode timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 SSI baud rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 boot up event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 check parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 data packet format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 decode event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 host character timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 host RTS line state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 host serial response timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 interpacket delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 multipacket option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 parameter event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 software handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 stop bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 symbologies default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 tab key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 timeout between decodes, different symbols . . . . 80 timeout between decodes, same symbol . . . . . . . 79 transmit code ID character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 transmit no read message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 triggered timeout, same symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
unique bar code reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 unsolicited heartbeat interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 UPC/EAN supplemental redundancy . . . . . . . . .140 UPC/EAN/JAN
bookland EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 bookland ISBN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 convert UPC-E to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 coupon report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 EAN-13/JAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 EAN-8/JAN-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 ISSN EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 supplemental AIM ID format . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 supplementals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 transmit UPC-A check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 transmit UPC-E check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 transmit UPC-E1 check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 UCC coupon extended code . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 UPC reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 UPC-A preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 UPC-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 UPC-E preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 UPC-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 UPC-E1 preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 user programmable supplementals . . . . . . . .140 USB bar code configuration directive . . . . . . . . . .249 beep directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249 caps lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 convert case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247 convert unknown to code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 device type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237, 238 fast HID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 function key mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 IBM specification version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249 keyboard FN1 substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245 keypad emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 keypad emulation with leading zero . . . . . . .245 keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239 polling interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 quick keypad emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 simulated caps lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 SNAPI handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239 static CDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 barcodes beep after good decode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 beep duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 beep tones standard tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 direct decode indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 hand-held decode aiming pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 hand-held trigger mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
543
Index
hands-free decode aiming pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 low power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 momentary trigger mode timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 parameter scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 picklist mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 set defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 speaker volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 suppress power up beeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 time delay to low power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 UPC/EAN/JAN
EAN/JAN extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 USB
CDC beep on bel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 user preferences
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 beep
duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 beep tone adjustment
standard beep tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 beeper
beep after good decode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 suppress on power up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 beeper indicators 123scan host specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 ADF programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 image capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 macro PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 parameter programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 RS-232 host specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 USB host specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
C
cables inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 33 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 signal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
character sets ALT key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 extended key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 F key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 GUI key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 numeric key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 PF key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Chinese 2 of 5 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
CJK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 control parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 country keyboard missing characters . . . . . . . . . 503 decode setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
input method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506 cleaning the devices
approved for standard devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 how to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 known harmful ingredients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 codabar bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179 CLSI editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179 NOTIS editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181 security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 start and stop characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 code 11 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530 transmit check digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 code 128 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 check ISBT table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 fnc4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 GS1-128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 ISBT 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 ISBT concatenation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 ISBT concatenation redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528 security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 code 128 emulation bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 code 39 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 code 32 prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 code 39 security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 convert code 39 to code 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 full ASCII conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525, 529 transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 trioptic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 code 93 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529 code identifiers AIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462 modifier characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463 Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461 transmitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 communication protocol cable interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 composite bar codes beep mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 composite CC-A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 composite CC-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 composite inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 composite TLC-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
544
Index
GS1-128 emulation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 UPC composite mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 configurations accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 stands and holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 connecting IBM interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 interface cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 keyboard wedge interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 RS-232 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 conventions notational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 country code pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 country codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 cropping images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
keyboard characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396 no separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391 parser version ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388 rule example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
E
EAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 eclevel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 error indications
ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 exposure options analog gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 autoexposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 digital gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 fixed exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 gain and exposure priority for snapshot mode . .106 illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83, 103
D
data matrix bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 data matrix inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 GS1 data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 mirror images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536, 537, 538
decode ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 DL parsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 IBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 IDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 image capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 OCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 SSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 user preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 digimarc digital watermarks/dw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 discrete 2 of 5 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 driver's license parsing AAMVA field parsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 ADF example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 control characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 data fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 date format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 field parsing bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 gender format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
F
features, scanner LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
firmware flash update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
G
gain analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
grid matrix bar codes sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
gs1 data matrix bar codes sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
GS1 databar bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 convert GS1 databar to UPC/EAN/JAN . . . . . . .198 GS1 databar expanded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 GS1 databar limited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 GS1 databar limited margin check . . . . . . . . . . .200 GS1 databar omnidirectional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532 security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
GS1 QR bar codes sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
H
han xin bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
host specific indicators 123scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
545
Index
RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 host types IBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 SSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
I
IBM bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
IDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 bar code acceptance test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 capture region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 data transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 demonstrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 image post processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 quick start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 quick start form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 sample setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 103 brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
image capture default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 operational modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
image capture beeper and LED indicators . . . . . . . . . 42 image options
bits per pixel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 cropping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 image brightness (target white) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 image enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 image rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 image size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 JPEG image options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 JPEG quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 JPEG size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 signature capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 signature capture file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 information, service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 interface cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 interleaved 2 of 5 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 convert to EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 febraban . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171, 172
reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530 security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
J
JPEG image options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
K
keyboard types (country codes) Albanian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 Arabic (101) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 Arabic (102) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 Arabic (102) Azerty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 Azeri (Cyrillic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 Azeri (Latin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 Belarusian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 Bosnian (Cyrillic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 Bosnian (Latin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 Bulgarian (Latin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 Bulgarian Cyrillic (Typewriter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 Canadian French (Legacy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 Canadian French Win7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 Canadian Multilingual Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 Chinese (ASCII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 Chinese (Simplified) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 Chinese (Traditional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 Croatian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 Czech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 Czech (Programmer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 Czech (QWERTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 Danish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 Dutch (Netherlands) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 Estonian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 Faeroese . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 Finnish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 French (Canada) 2000/XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476 French (Canada) 95/98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 French (France) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 French International . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 Galician . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476 German . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476 Greek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476 Greek (220) Latin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476 Greek (319) Latin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476 Greek 220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477 Greek 319 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477 Greek Latin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476 Greek Polytonic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477 Hebrew Israel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477 Hungarian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
546
Index
Hungarian_101KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 Irish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Islandic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 Italian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Italian (142) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Japanese (ASCII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Japanese (SHIFT-JIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Kazakh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Korean (ASCII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Korean (Hangul) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Kyrgyz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Latin American . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Latvian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Latvian (QWERTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Lithuanian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Lithuanian (IBM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Macedonian (FYROM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 Maltese_47KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 Mongolian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 Norwegian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 Polish (214) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 Polish (Programmer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 Portuguese (Brazil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 Portuguese (Brazilian ABNT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 Portuguese (Brazilian ABNT2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 Portuguese (Portugal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 Romanian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 Romanian (Legacy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 Romanian (Programmer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 Romanian (Standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 Russian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 Russian (Typewriter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 Serbian (Cyrillic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 Serbian (Latin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 Slovak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 Slovak (QWERTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 Slovenian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 Spanish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 Spanish (Variation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 Swedish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 Swiss French . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 Swiss German . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 Tatar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 Thai (Kedmanee) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 Turkish F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 Turkish Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 UK English . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 Ukranian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 US Dvorak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 US Dvorak Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 US Dvorak Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 US English . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 US International . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 Uzbek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 Vietnamese . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
keyboard wedge bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 keyboard map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Korean 3 of 5 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
L
LED indicators 123scan host specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 ADF programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 image capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 macro PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 parameter programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 RS-232 host specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 USB host specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
M
macro PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 abort entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 flush buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
macro PDF beeper and LED indicators . . . . . . . . . . . .44 maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
approved cleaners for standard devices . . . . . . . .49 how to clean the devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 known harmful ingredients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 matrix 2 of 5 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190 check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 maxicode bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 microPDF417 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 microQR code bar codes sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536 mounting wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 MSI bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 check digit algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 check digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530 transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 multicode data formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
547
Index
N
non-parameter attributes beep on next bootup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 configuration filename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 date of first programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 date of manufacture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 firmware version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 host trigger session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 model number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 parameter defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 reboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 scankit version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 scanspeed analytics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518 serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
O
OCR bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
P
parameter programming indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 partner portal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 PDF417 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
PDF prioritization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534 pinouts scanner signal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 postal code bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Australia post . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Australia post format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Japan postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 mailmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Netherlands KIX code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537 transmit UK postal check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 transmit US postal check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 UK postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 UPU FICS postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 US planet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 US postnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail . . . . . . . . . 231 power supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 power supply connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 preferred symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 product id (pid) value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 product id type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 product information manufacturing info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 report software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Q
QR code bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 GS1 QR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 microQR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536, 537, 538
R
related documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 related software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 RS-232
bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284 connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 host parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 RSM commands and responses over SSI . . . . . . . . . .261
S
sample bar codes aztec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536 Chinese 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530 code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528 code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525, 529 code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529 data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536, 537, 538 grid matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536 gs1 data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535 GS1 databar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532 GS1 QR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535 han xin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537 interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530 Korean 3 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 matrix 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 microQR code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536 MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530 PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534 QR code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536, 537, 538 UK postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537 UPC/EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525 US postnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
scanning aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
scanning beeper and LED indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 scanspeed analytics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519 security
1D quiet zone level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 intercharacter gap size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 redundancy level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 service information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 setting defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
548
Index
setup connecting a keyboard wedge host . . . . . . . . . . 305 connecting a USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 connecting an IBM most . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 connecting an RS-232 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 connecting power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 inserting interface cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
signal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 signature capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
bits per pixel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 code structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 data format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510 dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510 file format selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 JPEG quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 signature boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511 start and stop patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509 width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 SMS LED indicators (on scanner) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 software tools 123Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 preferred symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 speaker speaker volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 SSI bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254, 258 data transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 event reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256, 258 low power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 RSM commands and responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 RTS CTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 symbologies bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
T
technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 trigger mode, hand-held . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
U
unicode output control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 UPC/EAN bar codes
supplemental redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 UPC/EAN/JAN bar codes
bookland EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 bookland ISBN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 convert UPC-E to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 coupon report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 decode supplementals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 EAN-13/JAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 EAN-8/JAN-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 ISSN EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525 supplemental AIM ID format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 transmit UPC-A check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 transmit UPC-E check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 transmit UPC-E1 check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 UCC coupon extended code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 UPC reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 UPC-A preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 UPC-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 UPC-E preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 UPC-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 UPC-E1 preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 user programmable supplementals . . . . . . . . . . .140 UPC/EAN/JAN barcodes EAN/JAN zero extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 USB bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237 connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
549
www.zebra.com
Acrobat Distiller 20.0 (Windows)